Table of Contents
List of Tables
List of Examples
\s
and matching a literal dot in patternsmime.types
open-hook
close-hook
append-hook
Table of Contents
NeoMutt is a small but very powerful text-based MIME mail client. NeoMutt is highly configurable, and is well suited to the mail power user with advanced features like key bindings, keyboard macros, mail threading, regular expression searches and a powerful pattern matching language for selecting groups of messages.
The homepage can be found at https://neomutt.org.
<neomutt-users@neomutt.org>
– help, bug reports and
feature requests. To subscribe to this list, please send a mail to
<neomutt-users-request@neomutt.org>
with the subject
"subscribe".
<neomutt-devel@neomutt.org>
– development mailing
list. To subscribe to this list, please send a mail to
<neomutt-devel-request@neomutt.org>
with the subject
"subscribe".
Bugs may be reported on the devel mailing list, or on GitHub: https://github.com/neomutt/neomutt/issues
For the IRC user community, visit channel #neomutt on irc.libera.chat.
There are various ways to contribute to the NeoMutt project.
Especially for new users it may be helpful to meet other new and experienced users to chat about NeoMutt, talk about problems and share tricks.
Since translations of NeoMutt into other languages are highly appreciated, the NeoMutt developers always look for skilled translators that help improve and continue to maintain stale translations.
For contributing code patches for new features and bug fixes, please refer to the developer pages at https://neomutt.org/dev.html for more details.
This section lists typographical conventions followed throughout this manual. See table Table 1.1, “Typographical conventions for special terms” for typographical conventions for special terms.
Table 1.1. Typographical conventions for special terms
Item | Refers to... |
---|---|
printf(3) |
UNIX manual pages, execute man 3 printf
|
<PageUp> | named keys |
<create-alias> | named NeoMutt function |
^G | Control+G key combination |
$mail_check | NeoMutt configuration option |
$HOME | environment variable |
Examples are presented as:
neomutt -v
Within command synopsis, curly brackets (“{}”) denote a set of options of which one is mandatory, square brackets (“[]”) denote optional arguments, three dots denote that the argument may be repeated arbitrary times.
NeoMutt is Copyright © 2015-2024 Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
and friends.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
Table of Contents
This section is intended as a brief overview of how to use NeoMutt. There are many other features which are described elsewhere in the manual. There is even more information available in the NeoMutt FAQ and various web pages. See the NeoMutt homepage for more details.
The keybindings described in this section are the defaults as distributed. Your local system administrator may have altered the defaults for your site. You can always type “?” in any menu to display the current bindings.
The first thing you need to do is invoke NeoMutt, simply by typing
neomutt
at the command line. There are various
command-line options, see either the NeoMutt man page or the
reference.
NeoMutt is a text-based application which interacts with users through different menus which are mostly line-/entry-based or page-based. A line-based menu is the so-called “index” menu (listing all messages of the currently opened folder) or the “alias” menu (allowing you to select recipients from a list). Examples for page-based menus are the “pager” (showing one message at a time) or the “help” menu listing all available key bindings.
The user interface consists of a context sensitive help line at the top, the menu's contents followed by a context sensitive status line and finally the command line. The command line is used to display informational and error messages as well as for prompts and for entering interactive commands.
NeoMutt is configured through variables which, if the user wants to permanently use a non-default value, are written to configuration files. NeoMutt supports a rich config file syntax to make even complex configuration files readable and commentable.
Because NeoMutt allows for customizing almost all key bindings, there are so-called “functions” which can be executed manually (using the command line) or in macros. Macros allow the user to bind a sequence of commands to a single key or a short key sequence instead of repeating a sequence of actions over and over.
Many commands (such as saving or copying a message to another folder) can be applied to a single message or a set of messages (so-called “tagged” messages). To help selecting messages, NeoMutt provides a rich set of message patterns (such as recipients, sender, body contents, date sent/received, etc.) which can be combined into complex expressions using the boolean and and or operations as well as negating. These patterns can also be used to (for example) search for messages or to limit the index to show only matching messages.
NeoMutt supports a “hook” concept which allows the user to execute arbitrary configuration commands and functions in certain situations such as entering a folder, starting a new message or replying to an existing one. These hooks can be used to highly customize NeoMutt's behavior including managing multiple identities, customizing the display for a folder or even implementing auto-archiving based on a per-folder basis and much more.
Besides an interactive mode, NeoMutt can also be used as a command-line tool to send messages. See Table 9.1, “Command line options” for a complete list of command-line options.
The index is the screen that you usually see first when you start NeoMutt. It gives an overview over your emails in the currently opened mailbox. By default, this is your system mailbox. The information you see in the index is a list of emails, each with its number on the left, its flags (new email, important email, email that has been forwarded or replied to, tagged email, ...), the date when email was sent, its sender, the email size, and the subject. Additionally, the index also shows thread hierarchies: when you reply to an email, and the other person replies back, you can see the other person's email in a "sub-tree" below. This is especially useful for personal email between a group of people or when you've subscribed to mailing lists.
The pager is responsible for showing the email content. On the top of the pager you have an overview over the most important email headers like the sender, the recipient, the subject, and much more information. How much information you actually see depends on your configuration, which we'll describe below.
Below the headers, you see the email body which usually contains the message. If the email contains any attachments, you will see more information about them below the email body, or, if the attachments are text files, you can view them directly in the pager.
To give the user a good overview, it is possible to configure NeoMutt to show different things in the pager with different colors. Virtually everything that can be described with a regular expression can be colored, e.g. URLs, email addresses or smileys.
The file browser is the interface to the local or remote file system. When selecting a mailbox to open, the browser allows custom sorting of items, limiting the items shown by a regular expression and a freely adjustable format of what to display in which way. It also allows for easy navigation through the file system when selecting file(s) to attach to a message, select multiple files to attach and many more.
Some mail systems can nest mail folders inside other mail folders.
The normal open entry commands in NeoMutt will open the mail folder and
you can't see the sub-folders. If you instead use the
<descend-directory>
function it will go into
the directory and not open it as a mail directory.
The Sidebar shows a list of all your mailboxes. The list can be turned on and off, it can be themed and the list style can be configured.
This part of the manual is suitable for beginners. If you already know NeoMutt you could skip ahead to the main Sidebar guide. If you just want to get started, you could use the sample Sidebar neomuttrc.
To check if NeoMutt supports “Sidebar”, look for the
string +sidebar
in the neomutt version.
neomutt -v
Let's turn on the Sidebar:
set sidebar_visible set sidebar_format = "%B%<F? [%F]>%* %<N?%N/>%S" set mail_check_stats
You will see something like this. A list of mailboxes on the left. A list of emails, from the selected mailbox, on the right.
Fruit [1] 3/8| 1 + Jan 24 Rhys Lee (192) Yew Animals [1] 2/6| 2 + Feb 11 Grace Hall (167) Ilama Cars 4| 3 Feb 23 Aimee Scott (450) Nectarine Seas 1/7| 4 ! Feb 28 Summer Jackson (264) Lemon | 5 Mar 07 Callum Harrison (464) Raspberry | 6 N + Mar 24 Samuel Harris (353) Tangerine | 7 N + Sep 05 Sofia Graham (335) Cherry | 8 N Sep 16 Ewan Brown (105) Ugli | |
This user has four mailboxes: “Fruit”, “Cars”, “Animals” and “Seas”.
The current, open, mailbox is “Fruit”. We can also see information about the other mailboxes. For example: The “Animals” mailbox contains, 1 flagged email, 2 new emails out of a total of 6 emails.
The Sidebar adds some new functions to NeoMutt.
The user pressed the “c” key to
<change-folder>
to the
“Animals” mailbox. The Sidebar automatically updated
the indicator to match.
Fruit [1] 3/8| 1 Jan 03 Tia Gibson (362) Caiman Animals [1] 2/6| 2 + Jan 22 Rhys Lee ( 48) Dolphin Cars 4| 3 ! Aug 16 Ewan Brown (333) Hummingbird Seas 1/7| 4 Sep 25 Grace Hall ( 27) Capybara | 5 N + Nov 12 Evelyn Rogers (453) Tapir | 6 N + Nov 16 Callum Harrison (498) Hedgehog | | | |
Let's map some functions:
bind index,pager \CP sidebar-prev # Ctrl-P – Previous Mailbox bind index,pager \CN sidebar-next # Ctrl-N – Next Mailbox bind index,pager \CO sidebar-open # Ctrl-O – Open Highlighted Mailbox
Pressing “Ctrl-N” (Next mailbox) twice will move the Sidebar highlight to down to the “Seas” mailbox.
Fruit [1] 3/8| 1 Jan 03 Tia Gibson (362) Caiman Animals [1] 2/6| 2 + Jan 22 Rhys Lee ( 48) Dolphin Cars 4| 3 ! Aug 16 Ewan Brown (333) Hummingbird Seas 1/7| 4 Sep 25 Grace Hall ( 27) Capybara | 5 N + Nov 12 Evelyn Rogers (453) Tapir | 6 N + Nov 16 Callum Harrison (498) Hedgehog | | | |
Functions <sidebar-next>
and
<sidebar-prev>
move the Sidebar
highlight. They
do not change the open mailbox.
Press “Ctrl-O”
(<sidebar-open>
) to open the highlighted
mailbox.
Fruit [1] 3/8| 1 ! Mar 07 Finley Jones (139) Molucca Sea Animals [1] 2/6| 2 + Mar 24 Summer Jackson ( 25) Arafura Sea Cars 4| 3 + Feb 28 Imogen Baker (193) Pechora Sea Seas 1/7| 4 N + Feb 23 Isla Hussain (348) Balearic Sea | | | | | |
The Sidebar shows a list of mailboxes in a panel.
Everything about the Sidebar can be configured.
Visibility
Width
Display all
Limit to mailboxes with new mail
Pin mailboxes to display always
The order in which mailboxes are displayed
Unsorted (order of mailboxes commands)
Sorted alphabetically
Sorted by number of new mails
Sidebar indicators and divider
Mailboxes depending on their type
Mailboxes depending on their contents
Hide/Unhide the Sidebar
Select previous/next mailbox
Select previous/next mailbox with new mail
Page up/down through a list of mailboxes
Misc
Support for Unicode mailbox names (UTF-8)
Everything about the Sidebar can be configured.
For a quick reference:
The most important variable is
$sidebar_visible
. You can set this in your
“neomuttrc”, or bind a key to the function
<sidebar-toggle-visible>
.
set sidebar_visible # Make the Sidebar visible by default bind index,pager B sidebar-toggle-visible # Use 'B' to switch the Sidebar on and off
Next, decide how wide you want the Sidebar to be. 25 characters might be enough for the mailbox name and some numbers. Remember, you can hide/show the Sidebar at the press of button.
Finally, you might want to change the divider character. By default, Sidebar draws an ASCII line between it and the Index panel. If your terminal supports it, you can use a Unicode line-drawing character.
set sidebar_width = 25 # Plenty of space set sidebar_divider_char = '│' # Pretty line-drawing character
$sidebar_format
allows you to customize the
Sidebar display. For an introduction, read
format strings including the
section about
conditionals.
The default value is: %D%* %n
A more detailed value is:
%B%<F? [%F]>%* %<N?%N/>%S
Which breaks down as:
%B
– Mailbox name
%<F? [%F]>
– If flagged emails
[%F]
, otherwise nothing
%*
– Pad with spaces
%<N?%N/>
– If new emails
%N/
, otherwise nothing
%S
– Total number of emails
Table 2.1. sidebar_format
Format | Notes | Description |
---|---|---|
%B | Name of the mailbox | |
%d | * ‡ | Number of deleted messages |
%D | Descriptive name of the mailbox | |
%F | * † | Number of flagged messages in the mailbox |
%L | * ‡ | Number of messages after limiting |
%n | * | If there's new mail, display “N”, otherwise “ ” (space). |
%N | * † | Number of unread messages in the mailbox (seen or unseen) |
%o | * † | Number of old messages in the mailbox (unread, but seen) |
%r | * † | Number of read messages in the mailbox |
%S | * † | Size of mailbox (total number of messages) |
%t | * ‡ | Number of tagged messages in the mailbox |
%Z | * † | Number of new messages in the mailbox (unread, unseen) |
%! | “!”: one flagged message; “!!”: two flagged messages; “n!”: n flagged messages (for n > 2). Otherwise prints nothing. | |
%>X | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with “X” | |
%|X | Pad to the end of the line with “X” | |
%*X | Soft-fill with character “X” as pad |
* = Can be optionally printed if nonzero
† = To use these expandos, you must first:
set mail_check_stats
‡ = Only applicable to the current folder
Here are some examples. They show the number of (F)lagged, (N)ew and (S)ize.
$sidebar_delim_chars
tells Sidebar how to
split up mailbox paths. For local directories use
“/”; for IMAP folders use “.”
This example works well if your mailboxes have unique names after the last separator.
Add some mailboxes of different depths.
set folder="~/mail" mailboxes =fruit/apple =fruit/banana =fruit/cherry mailboxes =water/sea/sicily =water/sea/archipelago =water/sea/sibuyan mailboxes =water/ocean/atlantic =water/ocean/pacific =water/ocean/arctic
Shorten the names:
set sidebar_short_path # Shorten mailbox names (truncate all subdirs) set sidebar_component_depth=1 # Shorten mailbox names (truncate 1 subdirs) set sidebar_delim_chars="/" # Delete everything up to the last or Nth / character
The screenshot below shows what the Sidebar would look like
before and after shortening using
sidebar_short_path
.
|fruit/apple |apple |fruit/banana |banana |fruit/cherry |cherry |water/sea/sicily |sicily |water/sea/archipelago |archipelago |water/sea/sibuyan |sibuyan |water/ocean/atlantic |atlantic |water/ocean/pacific |pacific |water/ocean/arctic |arctic
The screenshot below shows what the Sidebar would look like
before and after shortening using
sidebar_component_depth=1
.
|fruit/apple |apple |fruit/banana |banana |fruit/cherry |cherry |water/sea/sicily |sea/sicily |water/sea/archipelago |sea/archipelago |water/sea/sibuyan |sea/sibuyan |water/ocean/atlantic |ocean/atlantic |water/ocean/pacific |ocean/pacific |water/ocean/arctic |ocean/arctic
This example works well if you have lots of mailboxes which are arranged in a tree.
Add some mailboxes of different depths.
set folder="~/mail" mailboxes =fruit mailboxes =fruit/apple =fruit/banana =fruit/cherry mailboxes =water mailboxes =water/sea mailboxes =water/sea/sicily =water/sea/archipelago =water/sea/sibuyan mailboxes =water/ocean mailboxes =water/ocean/atlantic =water/ocean/pacific =water/ocean/arctic
Shorten the names:
set sidebar_short_path # Shorten mailbox names set sidebar_delim_chars="/" # Delete everything up to the last / character set sidebar_folder_indent # Indent folders whose names we've shortened set sidebar_indent_string=" " # Indent with two spaces
The screenshot below shows what the Sidebar would look like before and after shortening.
|fruit |fruit |fruit/apple | apple |fruit/banana | banana |fruit/cherry | cherry |water |water |water/sea | sea |water/sea/sicily | sicily |water/sea/archipelago | archipelago |water/sea/sibuyan | sibuyan |water/ocean | ocean |water/ocean/atlantic | atlantic |water/ocean/pacific | pacific |water/ocean/arctic | arctic
Sometimes, it will be necessary to add mailboxes, that you don't use, to fill in part of the tree. This will trade vertical space for horizontal space (but it looks good).
If you have a lot of mailboxes, sometimes it can be useful to
hide the ones you aren't using.
$sidebar_new_mail_only
tells Sidebar to only
show mailboxes that contain new, or flagged, email.
Sometimes it is useful to only show mailboxes that have mails in
them, while hiding the rest.
$sidebar_non_empty_mailbox_only
tells the
Sidebar to only show mailboxes with a non-zero number of mails.
If you want some mailboxes to be always visible, then use the
sidebar_pin
command. It takes a list of
mailboxes as parameters.
set sidebar_new_mail_only # Only mailboxes with new/flagged email sidebar_pin +fruit +fruit/apple # Always display these two mailboxes
Here is a sample color scheme:
color sidebar_background default black # Black background color sidebar_indicator default color17 # Dark blue background color sidebar_highlight white color238 # Grey background color sidebar_spool_file yellow default # Yellow color sidebar_unread cyan default # Light blue color sidebar_new green default # Green color sidebar_ordinary default default # Default colors color sidebar_flagged red default # Red color sidebar_divider color8 default # Dark grey
There is a priority order when coloring Sidebar mailboxes. e.g. If
a mailbox has new mail it will have the
sidebar_new
color, even if it also contains
flagged mails.
Table 2.3. Sidebar Color Priority
Priority | Color | Description |
---|---|---|
Highest | sidebar_indicator | Mailbox is open |
sidebar_highlight | Mailbox is highlighted | |
sidebar_new | Mailbox contains new mail | |
sidebar_unread | Mailbox contains unread mail | |
sidebar_flagged | Mailbox contains flagged mail | |
sidebar_spool_file | Mailbox is the spool_file (receives incoming mail) | |
Lowest | sidebar_ordinary | Mailbox does not match above |
The help screen is meant to offer a quick help to the user. It lists the current configuration of key bindings and their associated commands including a short description, and currently unbound functions that still need to be associated with a key binding (or alternatively, they can be called via the NeoMutt command prompt).
The compose menu features a split screen containing the information which really matters before actually sending a message by mail: who gets the message as what (recipients and who gets what kind of copy). Additionally, users may set security options like deciding whether to sign, encrypt or sign and encrypt a message with/for what keys. Also, it's used to attach messages, to re-edit any attachment including the message itself.
The alias menu is used to help users finding the recipients of messages. For users who need to contact many people, there's no need to remember addresses or names completely because it allows for searching, too. The alias mechanism and thus the alias menu also features grouping several addresses by a shorter nickname, the actual alias, so that users don't have to select each single recipient manually. The alias menu is also used to display the result of external address queries.
As will be later discussed in detail, NeoMutt features a good and stable MIME implementation, that is, it supports sending and receiving messages of arbitrary MIME types. The attachment menu displays a message's structure in detail: what content parts are attached to which parent part (which gives a true tree structure), which part is of what type and what size. Single parts may saved, deleted or modified to offer great and easy access to message's internals.
The most important navigation keys common to line- or entry-based menus are shown in Table 2.4, “Most common navigation keys in entry-based menus” and in Table 2.5, “Most common navigation keys in page-based menus” for page-based menus.
Table 2.4. Most common navigation keys in entry-based menus
Key | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
j or <Down> | <next-entry> | move to the next entry |
k or <Up> | <previous-entry> | move to the previous entry |
z or <PageDn> | <page-down> | go to the next page |
Z or <PageUp> | <page-up> | go to the previous page |
= or <Home> | <first-entry> | jump to the first entry |
* or <End> | <last-entry> | jump to the last entry |
q | <quit> | exit the current menu |
? | <help> | list all keybindings for the current menu |
Table 2.5. Most common navigation keys in page-based menus
Key | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
J or <Return> | <next-line> | scroll down one line |
<Backspace> | <previous-line> | scroll up one line |
K, <Space> or <PageDn> | <next-page> | move to the next page |
- or <PageUp> | <previous-page> | move the previous page |
<Home> | <top> | move to the top |
<End> | <bottom> | move to the bottom |
NeoMutt has a built-in line editor for inputting text, e.g. email addresses or filenames. The keys used to manipulate text input are very similar to those of Emacs. See Table 2.6, “Most common line editor keys” for a full reference of available functions, their default key bindings, and short descriptions.
Table 2.6. Most common line editor keys
Key | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
^A or <Home> | <bol> | move to the start of the line |
^B or <Left> | <backward-char> | move back one char |
Esc B | <backward-word> | move back one word |
^D or <Delete> | <delete-char> | delete the char under the cursor |
^E or <End> | <eol> | move to the end of the line |
^F or <Right> | <forward-char> | move forward one char |
Esc F | <forward-word> | move forward one word |
<Tab> | <complete> | complete filename, alias, or label |
^T | <complete-query> | complete address with query |
^K | <kill-eol> | delete to the end of the line |
Esc d | <kill-eow> | delete to the end of the word |
^W | <kill-word> | kill the word in front of the cursor |
^U | <kill-line> | delete entire line |
^V | <quote-char> | quote the next typed key |
<Up> | <history-up> | recall previous string from history |
<Down> | <history-down> | recall next string from history |
^R | <history-search> | use current input to search history |
<BackSpace> | <backspace> | kill the char in front of the cursor |
Esc u | <upcase-word> | convert word to upper case |
Esc l | <downcase-word> | convert word to lower case |
Esc c | <capitalize-word> | capitalize the word |
^G | n/a | abort |
<Return> | n/a | finish editing |
^G
is the generic “abort” key
in NeoMutt. In addition to the line editor, it can also be used
to abort prompts. Generally, typing ^G
at a
confirmation prompt or line editor should abort the entire action.
You can remap the editor functions using the bind command. For example, to make the <Delete> key delete the character in front of the cursor rather than under, you could use:
bind editor <delete> backspace
NeoMutt maintains a history for the built-in editor. The number of
items is controlled by the $history
variable and can be made persistent using an external file specified
using $history_file and
$save_history. You may cycle through
them at an editor prompt by using the
<history-up>
and/or
<history-down>
commands. NeoMutt will
remember the currently entered text as you cycle through history, and
will wrap around to the initial entry line.
NeoMutt maintains several distinct history lists, one for each of the following categories:
.neomuttrc
commands
addresses and aliases
shell commands
filenames
patterns
everything else
NeoMutt automatically filters out consecutively repeated items from the history. If $history_remove_dups is set, all repeated items are removed from the history. It also mimics the behavior of some shells by ignoring items starting with a space. The latter feature can be useful in macros to not clobber the history's valuable entries with unwanted entries.
Similar to many other mail clients, there are two modes in which mail is read in NeoMutt. The first is a list of messages in the mailbox, which is called the “index” menu in NeoMutt. The second mode is the display of the message contents. This is called the “pager.”
The next few sections describe the functions provided in each of these modes.
Common keys used to navigate through and manage messages in the index are shown in Table 2.7, “Most common message index keys”. How messages are presented in the index menu can be customized using the $index_format variable.
Table 2.7. Most common message index keys
Key | Description |
---|---|
c | change to a different mailbox |
Esc c | change to a folder in read-only mode |
C | copy the current message to another mailbox |
Esc C | decode a message and copy it to a folder |
Esc s | decode a message and save it to a folder |
D | delete messages matching a pattern |
d | delete the current message |
F | mark as important |
l | show messages matching a pattern |
N | mark message as new |
o | change the current sort method |
O | reverse sort the mailbox |
q | save changes and exit |
s | save-message |
T | tag messages matching a pattern |
t | toggle the tag on a message |
Esc t | toggle tag on entire message thread |
U | undelete messages matching a pattern |
u | undelete-message |
v | view-attachments |
x | abort changes and exit |
<Return> | display-message |
<Tab> | jump to the next new or unread message |
@ | show the author's full e-mail address |
$ | save changes to mailbox |
/ | search |
Esc / | search-reverse |
^L | clear and redraw the screen |
^T | untag messages matching a pattern |
In addition to who sent the message and the subject, a short summary
of the disposition of each message is printed beside the message
number. Zero or more of the “flags” in
Table 2.8, “Message status flags” may appear, some of which can
be turned on or off using these functions:
<set-flag>
and
<clear-flag>
bound by default to
“w” and “W” respectively.
Furthermore, the flags in Table 2.9, “Message recipient flags” reflect who the message is addressed to. They can be customized with the $to_chars variable.
Table 2.8. Message status flags
Flag | Description |
---|---|
D | message is deleted (is marked for deletion) |
d | message has attachments marked for deletion |
K | contains a PGP public key |
N | message is new |
O | message is old |
P | message is PGP encrypted |
r | message has been replied to |
S | message is signed, and the signature is successfully verified |
s | message is signed |
! | message is flagged |
* | message is tagged |
n | thread contains new messages (only if collapsed) |
o | thread contains old messages (only if collapsed) |
By default, NeoMutt uses its built-in pager to display the contents
of messages (an external pager such as less(1)
can
be configured, see $pager variable). The
pager is very similar to the Unix program less(1)
though not nearly as featureful.
Table 2.10. Most common pager keys
Key | Description |
---|---|
<Return> | go down one line |
<Space> | display the next page (or next message if at the end of a message) |
- | go back to the previous page |
n | search for next match |
S | skip beyond quoted text |
T | toggle display of quoted text |
? | show keybindings |
/ | regular expression search |
Esc / | backward regular expression search |
\ | toggle highlighting of search matches |
^ | jump to the top of the message |
In addition to key bindings in Table 2.10, “Most common pager keys”, many
of the functions from the index menu are also available in the pager,
such as <delete-message>
or
<copy-message>
(this is one advantage over
using an external pager to view messages).
Also, the internal pager supports a couple other advanced features. For one, you can set $pager_read_delay to operate in a preview mode, where new messages are not marked read unless you remain on the message for a certain length of time. Additionally, it will accept and translate the “standard” nroff sequences for bold and underline. These sequences are a series of either the letter, backspace (“^H”), the letter again for bold or the letter, backspace, “_” for denoting underline. NeoMutt will attempt to display these in bold and underline respectively if your terminal supports them. If not, you can use the bold and underline color objects to specify a color or mono attribute for them.
Additionally, the internal pager supports the ANSI escape sequences for character attributes. NeoMutt translates them into the correct color and character settings. The sequences NeoMutt supports are:
\e[ Ps; Ps; ... Ps;m
where Ps can be one of the codes shown in Table 2.11, “ANSI escape sequences”.
Table 2.11. ANSI escape sequences
Escape code | Description |
---|---|
0 | All attributes off |
1 | Bold on |
3 | Italics on |
4 | Underline on |
5 | Blink on |
7 | Reverse video on |
3 <color> | Foreground color is <color> (see Table 2.12, “Color sequences”) |
4 <color> | Background color is <color> (see Table 2.12, “Color sequences”) |
NeoMutt uses these attributes for handling
text/enriched
messages, and they can also be used
by an external autoview script for
highlighting purposes.
If you change the colors for your display, for example by changing the color associated with color2 for your xterm, then that color will be used instead of green.
Note that the search commands in the pager take regular expressions, which are not quite the same as the more complex patterns used by the search command in the index. This is because patterns are used to select messages by criteria whereas the pager already displays a selected message.
So-called “threads” provide a hierarchy of messages where replies are linked to their parent message(s). This organizational form is extremely useful in mailing lists where different parts of the discussion diverge. NeoMutt displays threads as a tree structure.
In NeoMutt, when a mailbox is sorted by threads, there are a few additional functions available in the index and pager modes as shown in Table 2.13, “Most common thread mode keys”.
Table 2.13. Most common thread mode keys
Key | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
^D | <delete-thread> | delete all messages in the current thread |
^U | <undelete-thread> | undelete all messages in the current thread |
^N | <next-thread> | jump to the start of the next thread |
^P | <previous-thread> | jump to the start of the previous thread |
^R | <read-thread> | mark the current thread as read |
Esc d | <delete-subthread> | delete all messages in the current subthread |
Esc u | <undelete-subthread> | undelete all messages in the current subthread |
Esc n | <next-subthread> | jump to the start of the next subthread |
Esc p | <previous-subthread> | jump to the start of the previous subthread |
Esc r | <read-subthread> | mark the current subthread as read |
Esc t | <tag-thread> | toggle the tag on the current thread |
Esc v | <collapse-thread> | toggle collapse for the current thread |
Esc V | <collapse-all> | toggle collapse for all threads |
P | <parent-message> | jump to parent message in thread |
In the index, the subject of threaded children messages will be prepended with thread tree characters. By default, the subject itself will not be duplicated unless $hide_thread_subject is unset. Special characters will be added to the thread tree as detailed in Table 2.14, “Special Thread Characters”.
Table 2.14. Special Thread Characters
Character | Description | Notes |
---|---|---|
& | hidden message | see $hide_limited and $hide_top_limited |
? | missing message | see $hide_missing and $hide_top_missing |
* | pseudo thread | see $strict_threads; not displayed when $narrow_tree is set |
= | duplicate thread | see $duplicate_threads; not displayed when $narrow_tree is set |
Collapsing a thread displays only the first message in the thread and
hides the others. This is useful when threads contain so many
messages that you can only see a handful of threads on the screen.
See %M in $index_format. For
example, you could use %<M?(#%03M)&(%4l)>
in
$index_format to optionally display
the number of hidden messages if the thread is collapsed. The
%<char?if-part&else-part>
syntax is explained in detail in
format string conditionals.
Technically, every reply should contain a list of its parent messages in the thread tree, but not all do. In these cases, NeoMutt groups them by subject which can be controlled using the $strict_threads variable.
In addition, the index and pager menus have these interesting functions:
<check-stats>
Calculate statistics for all monitored mailboxes declared using the mailboxes command. It will calculate statistics despite $mail_check_stats being unset.
<create-alias>
(default: a)
Creates a new alias based upon the current message (or prompts for a new one). Once editing is complete, an alias command is added to the file specified by the $alias_file variable for future use
NeoMutt does not read the $alias_file upon startup so you must explicitly source the file.
<check-traditional-pgp>
(default: Esc P)
This function will search the current message for content
signed or encrypted with PGP the “traditional”
way, that is, without proper MIME tagging. Technically, this
function will temporarily change the MIME content types of the
body parts containing PGP data; this is similar to the
<edit-type>
function's effect.
<edit-raw-message>
This command (available in the index and pager) allows you to edit the raw current message as it's present in the mail folder. After you have finished editing, the changed message will be appended to the current folder, and the original message will be marked for deletion; if the message is unchanged it won't be replaced.
<edit>
is
a synonym of this for backwards compatibility.
See also
<edit-or-view-raw-message>
,
<view-raw-message>
.
<edit>
Alias of
<edit-raw-message>
for backwards compatibility.
<edit-or-view-raw-message>
(default: e)
This command (available in the index and pager) is the same as
<edit-raw-message>
if the mailbox is writable, otherwise it the same as
<view-raw-message>
.
<edit-type>
(default: ^E on the
attachment menu, and in the pager and index menus; ^T on the
compose menu)
This command is used to temporarily edit an attachment's content type to fix, for instance, bogus character set parameters. When invoked from the index or from the pager, you'll have the opportunity to edit the top-level attachment's content type. On the attachment menu, you can change any attachment's content type. These changes are not persistent, and get lost upon changing folders.
Note that this command is also available on the compose menu. There, it's used to fine-tune the properties of attachments you are going to send.
<enter-command>
(default:
“:”)
This command is used to execute any command you would normally put in a configuration file. A common use is to check the settings of variables, or in conjunction with macros to change settings on the fly.
<extract-keys>
(default: ^K)
This command extracts PGP public keys from the current or tagged message(s) and adds them to your PGP public key ring.
<forget-passphrase>
(default: ^F)
This command wipes the passphrase(s) from memory. It is useful, if you misspelled the passphrase.
<list-reply>
(default: L)
Reply to the current or tagged message(s) by extracting any
addresses which match the regular expressions given by the
lists or
subscribe
commands, but also honor any
Mail-Followup-To
header(s) if the
$honor_followup_to
configuration variable is set. In addition, the
List-Post
header field is examined for
mailto:
URLs specifying a mailing list
address. Using this when replying to messages posted to
mailing lists helps avoid duplicate copies being sent to the
author of the message you are replying to.
<list-subscribe>
Send an email to the address specified in the List-Subscribe header as specified in RFC2369.
<list-unsubscribe>
Send an email to the address specified in the List-Unsubscribe header as specified in RFC2369.
<pipe-message>
(default: |)
Asks for an external Unix command and pipes the current or tagged message(s) to it. The variables $pipe_decode, $pipe_decode_weed, $pipe_split, $pipe_sep and $wait_key control the exact behavior of this function.
<resend-message>
(default: Esc e)
NeoMutt takes the current message as a template for a new message. This function is best described as "recall from arbitrary folders". It can conveniently be used to forward MIME messages while preserving the original mail structure. Note that the amount of headers included here depends on the value of the $weed variable.
This function is also available from the attachment menu. You
can use this to easily resend a message which was included with
a bounce message as a message/rfc822
body
part.
<shell-escape>
(default: !)
Asks for an external Unix command and executes it. The $wait_key can be used to control whether NeoMutt will wait for a key to be pressed when the command returns (presumably to let the user read the output of the command), based on the return status of the named command. If no command is given, an interactive shell is executed.
<skip-headers>
(default: H)
This function will skip to the first line of the body, past the headers of the current message, regardless of current position.
<view-raw-message>
This command (available in the index and pager) opens the raw
message read-only in an editor. This command does not allow
editing the message, use
<edit-raw-message>
for this.
See also
<edit-raw-message>
,
<edit-or-view-raw-message>
.
<skip-quoted>
(default: S)
This function will make the internal pager go forward to the next segment of non-quoted body text (whether the first line of the body after headers, or following a line of quoted text), or print a message if no further unquoted text can be found.
The variable $pager_skip_quoted_context can be used to show some quoted context prior to the selected line.
<toggle-quoted>
(default: T)
The pager uses the $quote_regex variable to detect quoted text when displaying the body of the message. This function toggles the display of the quoted material in the message. It is particularly useful when being interested in just the response and there is a large amount of quoted text in the way.
The variable $toggle_quoted_show_levels can be used to show some context by continuing to show that number of levels rather than hiding all quoted levels.
The bindings shown in Table 2.15, “Most common mail sending keys” are available in the index and pager to start a new message.
Table 2.15. Most common mail sending keys
Key | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
m | <mail> | compose a new message |
r | <reply> | reply to sender |
g | <group-reply> | reply to all recipients |
<group-chat-reply> | reply to all recipients preserving To/Cc | |
L | <list-reply> | reply to a mailing list |
L | <list-subscribe> | send a subscription email to a mailing list |
L | <list-unsubscribe> | send an unsubscription email to a mailing list |
f | <forward> | forward message |
b | <bounce> | bounce (remail) message |
Esc k | <mail-key> | mail a PGP public key to someone |
Bouncing a message sends the message as-is to the recipient you specify. Forwarding a message allows you to add comments or modify the message you are forwarding. These items are discussed in greater detail in the next section “Forwarding and Bouncing Mail”.
NeoMutt will then enter the compose menu and
prompt you for the recipients to place on the “To:”
header field when you hit m
to start a new
message. Next, it will ask you for the “Subject:” field
for the message, providing a default if you are replying to or
forwarding a message. You again have the chance to adjust recipients,
subject, and security settings right before actually sending the
message. See also
$ask_cc,
$ask_bcc,
$auto_edit,
$bounce,
$fast_reply, and
$include for changing how and if
NeoMutt asks these questions.
When replying, NeoMutt fills these fields with proper values depending on the reply type. The types of replying supported are:
Reply to the author directly.
Reply to the author; cc all other recipients; consults alternates and excludes you.
Reply to the author and other recipients in the To list; cc other recipients in the Cc list; consults alternates and excludes you.
Reply to all mailing list addresses found, either specified via configuration or auto-detected. See Section 14, “Mailing Lists” for details.
After getting recipients for new messages, forwards or replies, NeoMutt will then automatically start your $editor on the message body. If the $edit_headers variable is set, the headers will be at the top of the message in your editor; the message body should start on a new line after the existing blank line at the end of headers. Any messages you are replying to will be added in sort order to the message, with appropriate $attribution_intro, $indent_string and $attribution_trailer. When forwarding a message, if the $mime_forward variable is unset, a copy of the forwarded message will be included. If you have specified a $signature, it will be appended to the message.
Once you have finished editing the body of your mail message, you are returned to the compose menu providing the functions shown in Table 2.16, “Most common compose menu keys” to modify, send or postpone the message.
Table 2.16. Most common compose menu keys
Key | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
a | <attach-file> | attach a file |
A | <attach-message> | attach message(s) to the message |
Esc k | <attach-key> | attach a PGP public key |
d | <edit-description> | edit description on attachment |
D | <detach-file> | detach a file |
t | <edit-to> | edit the To field |
Esc f | <edit-from> | edit the From field |
r | <edit-reply-to> | edit the Reply-To field |
c | <edit-cc> | edit the Cc field |
b | <edit-bcc> | edit the Bcc field |
y | <send-message> | send the message |
s | <edit-subject> | edit the Subject |
S | <smime-menu> | select S/MIME options |
f | <edit-fcc> | specify an “Fcc” mailbox |
p | <pgp-menu> | select PGP options |
P | <postpone-message> | postpone this message until later |
q | <quit> | quit (abort) sending the message |
w | <write-fcc> | write the message to a folder |
i | <ispell> | check spelling (if available on your system) |
^F | <forget-passphrase> | wipe passphrase(s) from memory |
The compose menu is also used to edit the attachments for a message
which can be either files or other messages. The
<attach-message>
function to will prompt you
for a folder to attach messages from. You can now tag messages in
that folder and they will be attached to the message you are sending.
Note that certain operations like composing a new mail, replying, forwarding, etc. are not permitted when you are in that folder. The %r in $status_format will change to a “A” to indicate that you are in attach-message mode.
After exiting the compose menu via <send-message>
,
the message will be sent. If configured and enabled, this can happen via
mixmaster or
$smtp_url. Otherwise
$sendmail will be invoked. Prior to
version 2019-11-29, NeoMutt enabled $write_bcc by
default, assuming the MTA would automatically remove a
Bcc:
header as part of delivery. Starting with 2019-11-29, the
option is unset by default, but no longer affects the fcc copy of the message.
When editing the header because of $edit_headers being set, there are a several pseudo headers available which will not be included in sent messages but trigger special NeoMutt behavior.
If you specify either of
Mutt-Fcc:
filename
Fcc:
filename
as a header, NeoMutt will pick up filename
just as if you had used the <edit-fcc>
function in the compose menu. It can later be
changed from the compose menu.
You can also attach files to your message by specifying either of
Mutt-Attach:
filename [description]
Attach:
filename [description]
where filename is the file to attach and description is an optional string to use as the description of the attached file. Spaces in filenames have to be escaped using backslash (“\”). The file can be removed as well as more added from the compose menu.
If you want to use PGP, you can specify either of
Mutt-PGP:
[
E
|
S
|
S
<id> ]
Pgp:
[
E
|
S
|
S
<id> ]
“E” selects encryption, “S” selects signing and “S<id>” selects signing with the given key, setting $pgp_sign_as for the duration of the message composition session. The selection can later be changed in the compose menu.
If you want to use S/MIME, you can specify either of
Mutt-SMIME:
[
E
|
S
|
S
<id> ]
Smime:
[
E
|
S
|
S
<id> ]
“E” selects encryption, “S” selects signing and “S<id>” selects signing with the given key, setting $smime_sign_as for the duration of the message composition session. The selection can later be changed in the compose menu.
When replying to messages, the In-Reply-To: header contains the Message-Id of the message(s) you reply to. If you remove or modify its value, NeoMutt will not generate a References: field, which allows you to create a new message thread, for example to create a new message to a mailing list without having to enter the mailing list's address.
If you intend to start a new thread by replying, please make really sure you remove the In-Reply-To: header in your editor. Otherwise, though you'll produce a technically valid reply, some netiquette guardians will be annoyed by this so-called “thread hijacking”.
If you want to use Mixmaster, you can specify the chain via:
Mutt-Mix:
[ remailer1
[ remailer2
[ ... ] ] ]
The chain can later be changed in the mixmaster menu.
If you have told NeoMutt to PGP or S/MIME encrypt a message, it will guide you through a key selection process when you try to send the message. NeoMutt will not ask you any questions about keys which have a certified user ID matching one of the message recipients' mail addresses. However, there may be situations in which there are several keys, weakly certified user ID fields, or where no matching keys can be found.
In these cases, you are dropped into a menu with a list of keys from
which you can select one. When you quit this menu, or NeoMutt can't
find any matching keys, you are prompted for a user ID. You can, as
usually, abort this prompt using ^G
. When you do
so, NeoMutt will return to the compose screen.
Once you have successfully finished the key selection, the message will be encrypted using the selected public keys when sent out.
To ensure you can view encrypted messages you have sent, you may wish to set $pgp_self_encrypt and $pgp_default_key for PGP, or $smime_self_encrypt and $smime_default_key for S/MIME.
Most fields of the entries in the key selection menu (see also $pgp_entry_format) have obvious meanings. But some explanations on the capabilities, flags, and validity fields are in order.
The flags sequence (“%f”) will expand to one of the flags in Table 2.17, “PGP key menu flags”.
Table 2.17. PGP key menu flags
Flag | Description |
---|---|
R | The key has been revoked and can't be used. |
X | The key is expired and can't be used. |
d | You have marked the key as disabled. |
c | There are unknown critical self-signature packets. |
The capabilities field (“%c”) expands to a two-character sequence representing a key's capabilities. The first character gives the key's encryption capabilities: A minus sign (“-”) means that the key cannot be used for encryption. A dot (“.”) means that it's marked as a signature key in one of the user IDs, but may also be used for encryption. The letter “e” indicates that this key can be used for encryption.
The second character indicates the key's signing capabilities. Once again, a “-” implies “not for signing”, “.” implies that the key is marked as an encryption key in one of the user-ids, and “s” denotes a key which can be used for signing.
Finally, the validity field (“%t”) indicates how
well-certified a user-id is. Its values depend on the backend used.
Note that S/MIME (which uses X509 certificates) has no concept of
validity, so this field simply shows x
.
The possible values listed in Table 2.18, “PGP key menu validity”.
Table 2.18. PGP key menu validity
Flag (classic PGP) | Flag (GPGME) | Description |
---|---|---|
N/A | ? | indicates unknown validity |
? | q | indicates undefined validity |
- | n | indicates a never valid key (untrusted association) |
space | m | indicates marginal validity (partially trusted) |
+ | f | indicates full validity (fully trusted) |
N/A | u | indicates ultimate validity |
N/A | x | the entry is an X509 certificate (S/MIME) |
format=flowed
-style messages (or
f=f
for short) are text/plain
messages that consist of paragraphs which a receiver's mail client
may reformat to its own needs, which mostly means to customize line
lengths regardless of what the sender sent. Technically this is
achieved by letting lines of a “flowable” paragraph
end in spaces except for the last line.
While for text-mode clients like NeoMutt it's best to assume only a standard 80x24 character cell terminal, it may be desired to let the receiver decide completely how to view a message.
NeoMutt only supports setting the required
format=flowed
MIME parameter on outgoing
messages if the $text_flowed
variable is set, specifically it does not add the trailing spaces.
After editing, NeoMutt properly space-stuffs the message.
Space-stuffing is required by RFC3676, defining
format=flowed
, and means to prepend a space to:
all lines starting with a space
lines starting with the word
“From
” followed by space
all lines starting with
“>
”, which is not intended to
be a quote character
NeoMutt only supports space-stuffing for the first two types of
lines but not for the third: It is impossible to safely detect
whether a leading >
character starts a quote
or not.
All leading spaces are to be removed by receiving clients to restore the original message prior to further processing.
As NeoMutt provides no additional features to compose
f=f
messages, it's completely up to the user and
his editor to produce proper messages. Please consider your
editor's documentation if you intend to send f=f
messages.
For example, vim provides the
w
flag for its formatoptions
setting to assist in creating f=f
messages, see
:help fo-table
for details.
NeoMutt has some support for reformatting when viewing and replying
to format=flowed
messages. In order to take
advantage of these, $reflow_text
must be set.
Paragraphs are automatically reflowed and wrapped at a width specified by $reflow_wrap.
In its original format, the quoting style of
format=flowed
messages can be difficult to
read, and doesn't intermix well with non-flowed replies.
Setting
$reflow_space_quotes
adds spaces after each level of quoting when in the pager and
replying in a non-flowed format (i.e. with
$text_flowed unset).
If $reflow_space_quotes is unset, NeoMutt will still add one trailing space after all the quotes in the pager (but not when replying).
Bouncing and forwarding let you send an existing message to recipients
that you specify. Bouncing a message sends a verbatim copy of a message
to alternative addresses as if they were the message's original
recipients specified in the Bcc header. Forwarding a message, on the
other hand, allows you to modify the message before it is resent (for
example, by adding your own comments). Bouncing is done using the
<bounce>
function and forwarding using the
<forward>
function bound to “b”
and “f” respectively.
Forwarding can be done by including the original message in the new message's body (surrounded by indicating lines) or including it as a MIME attachment, depending on the value of the $mime_forward variable. Decoding of attachments, like in the pager, can be controlled by the $forward_decode and $mime_forward_decode variables, respectively. The desired forwarding format may depend on the content, therefore $mime_forward is a quadoption which, for example, can be set to “ask-no”.
NeoMutt's default ($mime_forward=“no” and $forward_decode=“yes”) is to use standard inline forwarding. In that mode all text-decodable parts are included in the new message body. Other attachments from the original email can also be attached to the new message, based on the quadoption $forward_attachments.
The inclusion of headers is controlled by the current setting of the $weed variable, unless $mime_forward is set.
By default a forwarded message does not reference the messages it contains. When $forward_references is set, a forwarded message includes the “In-Reply-To:” and “References:” headers, just like a reply would. Hence the forwarded message becomes part of the original thread instead of starting a new one.
Editing the message to forward follows the same procedure as sending or replying to a message does, but can be disabled via the quadoption $forward_edit.
At times it is desirable to delay sending a message that you have
already begun to compose. When the
<postpone-message>
function is used in the
compose menu, the body of your message and
attachments are stored in the mailbox specified by the
$postponed variable. This means that
you can recall the message even if you exit NeoMutt and then restart it
at a later time.
Once a message is postponed, there are several ways to resume it. From the command line you can use the “-p” option, or if you compose a new message from the index or pager you will be prompted if postponed messages exist. If multiple messages are currently postponed, the postponed menu will pop up and you can select which message you would like to resume.
If you postpone a reply to a message, the reply setting of the message is only updated when you actually finish the message and send it. Also, you must be in the same folder with the message you replied to for the status of the message to be updated.
See also the $postpone quad-option.
NeoMutt has different types of logging/error messages
Primitive Errors: errors emitted by C library functions such as
fopen()
.
Errors
Warnings
Message: Informational messages such as
Sorting mailbox...
.
Debug: Debug messages usually only interesting while debugging.
These log messages are shown in the command bar at the bottom of the UI
(usually below the status line) and errors are shown in a different
colour than the other message types. The colours used for displaying
can be adjusted with color error ...
and
color message ...
, respectively. See the
description of color
for the precise syntax.
The command bar shows only the last message. To show the last 100
messages (this includes all types of messages from debug to error) the
function
<show-log-messages>
can be used.
Debug messages are not shown by default. To enable them NeoMutt must be
compiled with +debug
. Furthermore, the debug log
level must be set with the
-d
command line parameter
at startup. The -d
parameter expects a debug level
which can range from 1 to 5 and affects verbosity of the debug
messages. A value of 2 is recommended for the start. If debug logging
is enabled, all log messages (i.e. errors, warnings, ..., debug) are
additionally written to the file ~/.neomuttdebug0
.
NeoMutt supports encrypting and signing emails when used interactively. In batch mode, cryptographic operations are disabled, so these options can't be used to sign an email sent via a cron job, for instance.
The recommended way to enable OpenPGP and S/MIME is to use GPGME. This library is integrated into NeoMutt and can perform all the common crypto functions the user will need.
# Enable GPGME
set crypt_use_gpgme
If you have complex crypto needs, then you can enable the
“classic mode” by disabling GPGME and setting all
pgp_command_*
and smime_command_*
config variables.
For example config, see: gpg.rc
and
smime.rc
in the
Contrib repository.
# Use manual crypto functions
unset crypt_use_gpgme
set pgp_clear_sign_command = "..."
...
set smime_decrypt_command = "..."
...
The two most important settings are $pgp_default_key and $pgp_sign_as. To perform encryption, you must set the first variable. If you have a separate signing key, or only have a signing key, then set the second. Most people will only need to set $pgp_default_key.
Starting with version 2.1.0, GnuPG automatically uses an
agent
to prompt for your passphrase. If you are
using a version older than that, you'll need to ensure an agent is
running (alternatively, you can unset
$pgp_use_gpg_agent and NeoMutt
will prompt you for your passphrase). The agent in turn uses a
pinentry
program to display the prompt. There are
many different kinds of pinentry programs that can be used: qt, gtk2,
gnome3, fltk, and curses. However, NeoMutt does
not work properly with the tty pinentry program.
Please ensure you have one of the GUI or curses pinentry programs
installed and configured to be the default for your system.
As with OpenPGP, the two most important settings are $smime_default_key and $smime_sign_as. To perform encryption and decryption, you must set the first variable. If you have a separate signing key, or only have a signing key, then set the second. Most people will only need to set $smime_default_key.
When using GPGME as S/MIME backend, keys and certificates are
managed by GnuPG. You can add your key (or certificates) to
GnuPG with the command
“gpgsm --import mykey.p12
”.
Note that in order to use the key for signing or encrypting, the root
certificate of that key must be trusted, which might involve editing
~/.gnupg/trustlist.txt
.
Consult your documentation of GnuPG for details, in particular
gpgsm
.
In “classic mode”, keys and certificates are managed by
the smime_keys
program that comes with NeoMutt. By
default they are stored under ~/.smime/
. (This is
set by the smime.rc
file with
$smime_certificates and
$smime_keys.) To initialize this
directory, use the command “smime_keys
init
” from a shell prompt. The program can be then
be used to import and list certificates. You may also want to
periodically run “smime_keys refresh
”
to update status flags for your certificates.
Table of Contents
When NeoMutt starts up it looks for two configuration files – one “system” file and one “user” file.
NeoMutt first reads the system configuration file, then the user configuration file. The two files are merged in the sense that "last setting wins". That is, if a setting is defined in both files, the user configuration file's value for that setting is the one that takes precedence and becomes effective.
NeoMutt searches for several different file names when looking for config. It looks for NeoMutt config files before Mutt config files and versioned config before plain config. For example:
This allows the user to create separate NeoMutt and Mutt config files on the same system.
NeoMutt will search for a system config file in
a neomutt
directory in several places. First it
searches the locations specified in the
XDG_CONFIG_DIRS
environment variable, which
defaults to /etc/xdg
. Next, it looks in
/etc
. Finally, it tries
/usr/share
.
The system config file will not be read if the “-n” option is used on the command line.
NeoMutt will read just one file, the first file it finds, from the list below.
NeoMutt will search for a user config file in several places. First
it looks in the directory specified in the
XDG_CONFIG_HOME
environment variable, which
defaults to ~/.config/neomutt
. Next, it looks in
~
(your home directory). Finally, it tries
~/.neomutt
.
You may specify your own location for the user config file using the “-F” option on the command line.
NeoMutt will read just one file, the first file it finds, from the list below.
The majority of NeoMutt's config will be read from two files: the
system config in /etc
and the user config in, e.g.
~/.neomuttrc
The last file that gets read will overwrite any settings from previous config files. This means that an administrator can set some defaults which the user can override.
Additionally, there are a handful of config items which can be set using an environment variable. They have a lower priority than the NeoMutt config files: $editor, $from, $mailcap_path, $news_server, shell, $spool_file, $tmp_dir,
Finally, it's possible to
set some variables directly on the
command-line using the -e
option.
NeoMutt is highly configurable because it's meant to be customized to your needs and preferences. However, this configurability can make it difficult when just getting started. A few sample neomuttrc files are available in the Contrib Repo.
An initialization file consists of a series of commands. Each line of the file may contain one or more commands. When multiple commands are used, they must be separated by a semicolon (“;”).
The hash mark, or pound sign (“#”), is used as a “comment” character. You can use it to annotate your initialization file. All text after the comment character to the end of the line is ignored.
Example 3.2. Commenting configuration files
my_hdr X-Disclaimer: Why are you listening to me? # This is a comment
Single quotes (“'”) and double quotes (“"”) can be used to quote strings which contain spaces or other special characters. The difference between the two types of quotes is similar to that of many popular shell programs, namely that a single quote is used to specify a literal string (one that is not interpreted for shell variables or quoting with a backslash [see next paragraph]), while double quotes indicate a string for which should be evaluated. For example, backticks are evaluated inside of double quotes, but not for single quotes.
“\” quotes the next character, just like in a shell. For example, if want to put quotes “"” inside of a string, you can use “\” to force the next character to be a literal instead of interpreted character.
“\\” means to insert a literal “\” into the line. “\n” and “\r” have their usual C meanings of linefeed and carriage-return, respectively.
A “\” at the end of a line can be used to split commands over multiple lines as it “escapes” the line end, provided that the split points don't appear in the middle of command names. Lines are first concatenated before interpretation so that a multi-line can be commented by commenting out the first line only.
Example 3.4. Splitting long configuration commands over several lines
set status_format="some very \ long value split \ over several lines"
Using “\” at the end of a line only removes the newline character.
Any leading whitespace on the following lines will be part of the configuration.
It is also possible to substitute the output of a Unix command in an initialization file. This is accomplished by enclosing the command in backticks (``). In Example 3.5, “Using external command's output in configuration files”, the output of the Unix command “uname -a” will be substituted before the line is parsed. Since initialization files are line oriented, only the first line of output from the Unix command will be substituted.
Example 3.5. Using external command's output in configuration files
my_hdr X-Operating-System: `uname -a`
To avoid the output of backticks being parsed, place them inside double quotes. In Example 3.6, “Preventing the output of backticks from being parsed”, the output of the gpg decryption is assigned directly to $imap_pass, so that special characters in the password (e.g.“'”, “#”, “$”) are not parsed and interpreted specially by neomutt.
Example 3.6. Preventing the output of backticks from being parsed
set imap_pass="`gpg --batch -q --decrypt ~/.neomutt/account.gpg`"
Both environment variables and NeoMutt variables can be accessed by prepending “$” to the name of the variable. For example,
If NeoMutt can't find a matching config variable, it will try to find a matching environment variable.
will cause NeoMutt to save outgoing messages to a folder named
“sent_on_kremvax” if the environment variable
$HOSTNAME
is set to “kremvax.” (See
$record for details.)
NeoMutt expands the variable when it is assigned, not when it is used. If the value of a variable on the right-hand side of an assignment changes after the assignment, the variable on the left-hand side will not be affected.
The commands understood by NeoMutt are explained in the next paragraphs. For a complete list, see the command reference.
All configuration files are expected to be in the current locale as specified by the $charset variable which doesn't have a default value since it's determined by NeoMutt at startup. If a configuration file is not encoded in the same character set the $config_charset variable should be used: all lines starting with the next are recoded from $config_charset to $charset.
This mechanism should be avoided if possible as it has the following implications:
These variables should be set early in a configuration file with $charset preceding $config_charset so NeoMutt knows what character set to convert to.
If $config_charset is set, it should be set in each configuration file because the value is global and not per configuration file.
Because NeoMutt first recodes a line before it attempts to parse it, a conversion introducing question marks or other characters as part of errors (unconvertible characters, transliteration) may introduce syntax errors or silently change the meaning of certain tokens (e.g. inserting question marks into regular expressions).
Usage:
group
[
-group
name
...] {
-rx
regex
... |
-addr
address
... }ungroup
[
-group
name
...] {
*
|
-rx
regex
... |
-addr
address
... }
NeoMutt supports grouping addresses logically into named groups. An
address or regular expression can appear in several groups at the same
time. These groups can be used in
patterns (for searching, limiting and
tagging) and in hooks by using group patterns. This can be useful to
classify mail and take certain actions depending on in what groups the
message is. For example, the NeoMutt user's mailing list would fit into
the categories “mailing list” and
“NeoMutt-related”. Using
send-hook
, the
sender can be set to a dedicated one for writing mailing list messages,
and the signature could be set to a NeoMutt-related one for writing to
a NeoMutt list – for other lists, the list sender setting still applies
but a different signature can be selected. Or, given a group only
containing recipients known to accept encrypted mail,
“auto-encryption” can be achieved easily.
The group command is used to directly add either
addresses or regular expressions to the specified group or groups. The
different categories of arguments to the group
command can be in any order. The flags -rx
and
-addr
specify what the following strings (that
cannot begin with a hyphen) should be interpreted as: either a regular
expression or an email address, respectively.
These address groups can also be created implicitly by the
alias,
lists,
subscribe and
alternates
commands by specifying the optional -group
option.
For example,
alternates -group me address1 address2 alternates -group me -group work address3
would create a group named “me” which contains all three addresses and a group named “work” which contains only your work address address3. Besides many other possibilities, this could be used to automatically mark your own messages in a mailing list folder as read or use a special signature for work-related messages.
The ungroup command is used to remove addresses or
regular expressions from the specified group or groups. The syntax is
similar to the group command, however the special
character *
can be used to empty a group of all of
its contents. As soon as a group gets empty because all addresses and
regular expressions have been removed, it'll internally be removed, too
(i.e. there cannot be an empty group). When removing regular
expressions from a group, the regex must be
specified exactly as given to the group command or
-group
argument.
Usage:
alias
[
-group
name
...]
key
address
[
, address
...] [
# comment
]unalias
[
-group
name
...] {
*
|
key
... }
It's usually very cumbersome to remember or type out the address of someone you are communicating with. NeoMutt allows you to create “aliases” which map a short string to a full address.
If you want to create an alias for more than one address, you must separate the addresses with a comma (“,”).
The optional -group
argument to
alias causes the aliased address(es) to be added to
the named group.
To add an alias:
# Some aliases, one with a comment alias alan Alan Jones <alan@example.com> alias briony Briony Williams <bw@example.com> alias jim James Smith <js@example.com> # Pointy-haired boss # An alias that references two other aliases alias friends alan, briony
To remove an alias or aliases (“*” means all aliases):
unalias muttdude unalias *
Note: The alias key is matched case insensitively when creating (checking for duplicates), removing, or expanding aliases.
Unlike other mailers, NeoMutt doesn't require aliases to be defined in
a special file. The alias command can appear
anywhere in a configuration file, as long as this file is
sourced. Consequently,
you can have multiple alias files, or you can have all aliases defined
in your .neomuttrc
.
On the other hand, the
<create-alias>
function can use only one file, the one pointed to by the
$alias_file variable (which is
~/.neomuttrc
by default). This file is not special
either, in the sense that NeoMutt will happily append aliases to any
file, but in order for the new aliases to take effect you need to
explicitly source this
file too.
Example 3.8. Configuring external alias files
source /usr/local/share/NeoMutt.aliases source ~/.mail_aliases set alias_file=~/.mail_aliases
To use aliases, you merely use the alias at any place in NeoMutt where NeoMutt prompts for addresses, such as the To: or Cc: prompt. You can also enter aliases in your editor at the appropriate headers if you have the $edit_headers variable set.
In addition, at the various address prompts, you can use the tab character to expand a partial alias to the full alias. If there are multiple matches, NeoMutt will bring up a menu with the matching aliases. In order to be presented with the full list of aliases, you must hit tab without a partial alias, such as at the beginning of the prompt or after a comma denoting multiple addresses.
In the alias menu, you can select as many aliases as you want with the
tag-entry
key (default: <Space> or t), and use
the exit key (default: q) to return to the address
prompt.
Usage:
bind
map
[
,map
...]
key
function
unbind
{
*
|
map
[
,map
...]
} [
key
]
This command allows you to change the default key bindings (operation invoked when pressing a key).
The bind
command allows to assign a new effect to
a key (e.g. a
) or a keysequence
(e.g. gh
– that is pressing g
followed by a press of h
). Its syntax is:
bind
map
[
,map
...]
key
function
map specifies in which menu the binding belongs. Multiple maps may be specified by separating them with commas (no additional whitespace is allowed). The currently defined maps are:
This is not a real menu, but is used as a fallback for all of the other menus except for the pager and editor modes. If a key is not defined in another menu, NeoMutt will look for a binding to use in this menu. This allows you to bind a key to a certain function in multiple menus instead of having multiple bind statements to accomplish the same task.
The alias menu is the list of your personal aliases as defined in
your .neomuttrc
. It is the mapping from
a short alias name to the full email address(es) of the
recipient(s).
The attachment menu is used to access the attachments on received messages.
The browser is used for both browsing the local directory structure, and for listing all of your incoming mailboxes.
The editor is used to allow the user to enter a single line of
text, such as the To or
Subject prompts in the
compose
menu.
The index is the list of messages contained in a mailbox.
The compose menu is the screen used when sending a new message.
The pager is the mode used to display message/attachment data, and help listings.
The pgp menu is used to select the OpenPGP keys used to encrypt outgoing messages.
The smime menu is used to select the OpenSSL certificates used to encrypt outgoing messages.
The postpone menu is similar to the index menu, except is used when recalling a message the user was composing, but saved until later.
The query menu is the browser for results returned by $query_command.
The mixmaster screen is used to select remailer options for outgoing messages (if NeoMutt is compiled with Mixmaster support).
key is the key (or key sequence) you wish to bind. To specify a control character, use the sequence \Cx, where x is the letter of the control character (for example, to specify control-A use “\Ca”). Note that the case of x as well as \C is ignored, so that \CA, \Ca, \cA and \ca are all equivalent. An alternative form is to specify the key as a three digit octal number prefixed with a “\” (for example \177 is equivalent to \c?). In addition, key may be a symbolic name as shown in Table 3.5, “Symbolic key names”.
Table 3.5. Symbolic key names
Symbolic name | Meaning |
---|---|
\t | tab |
<tab> | tab |
<backtab> | backtab / shift-tab |
\r | carriage return |
\n | newline |
\e | escape/alt |
<esc> | escape/alt |
<up> | up arrow |
<down> | down arrow |
<left> | left arrow |
<right> | right arrow |
<pageup> | Page Up |
<pagedown> | Page Down |
<backspace> | Backspace |
<delete> | Delete |
<insert> | Insert |
<enter> | Enter |
<return> | Return |
<keypadenter> | Enter key on numeric keypad |
<home> | Home |
<end> | End |
<space> | Space bar |
<f1> | function key 1 |
<f10> | function key 10 |
The <what-key>
function can be used to explore
keycode and symbolic names for other keys on your keyboard. Executing
this function will display information about each key pressed, until
terminated by ^G
.
key does not need to be enclosed in quotes unless it contains a space (“ ”) or semi-colon (“;”).
function specifies which action to take when key is pressed. For a complete list of functions, see the reference. Note that the bind expects function to be specified without angle brackets.
The special function <noop>
unbinds the
specified key sequence. It is recommended to use
unbind
instead.
To remove a binding of a key or key sequence
unbind
can be used. Its syntax is:
unbind
{
*
|
map
[
,map
...]
} [
key
]
map specifies from which menus the key sequence
should be removed. Multiple maps may be specified by separating them
with commas (no additional whitespace is allowed). If
*
is given, then the key sequence is removed from
all menus. Valid menu names and their description are listed
in the bind
section.
key is the key or key sequence to be unbound. It may be omitted in which case all keybindings in the given menus are removed. To prevent NeoMutt from becoming unusable some fallback key bindings are added afterwards. The fallback keybindings added depend on the menu, they are listed in Table 3.6, “Fallback key bindings”.
Table 3.6. Fallback key bindings
Menu | Key | Bound Function |
---|---|---|
generic | <enter> | <select-entry> |
generic | <return> | <select-entry> |
generic | : | <enter-command> |
generic | ? | <help> |
generic | q | <exit> |
alias | ? | <help> |
alias | q | <exit> |
attach | ? | <help> |
attach | q | <exit> |
browser | ? | <help> |
browser | q | <exit> |
editor | <backspace> | <backspace> |
editor | \177 | <backspace> |
index | <enter> | <display-message> |
index | <return> | <display-message> |
index | ? | <help> |
index | q | <exit> |
compose | ? | <help> |
compose | q | <exit> |
pager | ? | <help> |
pager | q | <exit> |
pager | : | <enter-command> |
pgp | ? | <help> |
pgp | q | <exit> |
smime | ? | <help> |
smime | q | <exit> |
postpone | ? | <help> |
postpone | q | <exit> |
query | ? | <help> |
query | q | <exit> |
mix | ? | <help> |
mix | q | <exit> |
A key binding can also be unbound by mapping it to the special
function <noop>
. It is, however,
recommended to use unbind
instead.
Prior to 2022, NeoMutt used a default ncurses mode
(“nl()
”). This mode maps keyboard
input of either <Enter>
or
<Return>
to the same value, which NeoMutt
interpreted as <Return>
internally.
However, starting in version 2.2, this mode is turned off,
allowing <Return>
and
<Enter>
to be mapped separately, if
desired. The default keyboard mappings set both, but you can
override this or create new bindings with one or the other (or
both).
Note that in terminal application, such as NeoMutt,
<Enter>
is the same as “\n”
and ^J
; while <Return>
is the same as “\r” and ^M
.
Due to a limitation of NeoMutt, creating key bindings, or macros, will overwrite existing mappings with similar, shorter, names.
bind index g group-reply bind index gg first-entry
In this example, the g
binding will be overwritten
and cannot be used. Newer versions of NeoMutt will warn the user
about this.
To avoid warnings on startup, first set the shorter binding to
noop
(no operation).
bind index g noop bind index gg first-entry
The same is also possible using unbind
.
unbind index g bind index gg first-entry
Some key bindings are controlled by the terminal, and so by
default can't be bound inside NeoMutt. These may include
^C
, ^\
, ^Q
,
^S
, ^Z
, and on BSD/Mac
^Y
. These terminal settings can be viewed and
changed using the stty
program.
“stty -a
” will list the bound
characters (not all of them affect NeoMutt), and what actions they
take when pressed. For example,
you may see “intr = ^C
” in its
output. This means typing ^C
will send an
interrupt signal. “quit = ^\
”
means typing ^\
(commonly also
^4
) will send a quit signal.
To unbind a key from an action, you invoke “stty action
undef”. For example, “stty quit
undef
” will unbind ^\
(and
^4
) from sending the quit signal. Once unbound
(e.g, by placing that line in your .profile, or in a NeoMutt wrapper
script/function) you can use the key sequence in your NeoMutt
bindings.
Usage:
cd
directory
The cd
command changes NeoMutt's current working directory.
This affects commands and functions like source
,
change-folder
, and save-entry
that use
relative paths. Using cd
without directory changes to your
home directory.
Usage:
charset-hook
alias
charset
iconv-hook
charset
local-charset
The charset-hook command defines an alias for a character set. This is useful to properly display messages which are tagged with a character set name not known to NeoMutt.
The iconv-hook command defines a system-specific name for a character set. This is helpful when your systems character conversion library insists on using strange, system-specific names for character sets.
Usage:
folder-hook
[
-noregex
]
regex
command
It is often desirable to change settings based on which mailbox you are
reading. The folder-hook command provides a method
by which you can execute any configuration command.
The command is executed before loading any mailboxes
matching regex. The -noregex
switch controls whether regex is matched using
a simple string comparison or a full regex match.
If a mailbox matches multiple folder-hooks, they are
executed in the order given in the .neomuttrc
.
The regex parameter has mailbox shortcut expansion performed on the first character. See Mailbox Matching in Hooks for more details.
If you use the “!” shortcut for $spool_file at the beginning of regex, you must place it inside of double or single quotes in order to distinguish it from the logical not operator for the expression.
Settings are not restored when you leave the mailbox. For example, a command action to perform is to change the sorting method based upon the mailbox being read:
folder-hook work "set sort=threads"
However, the sorting method is not restored to its previous value when reading a different mailbox. To specify a default command, use the regex “.” before other folder-hooks adjusting a value on a per-folder basis because folder-hooks are evaluated in the order given in the configuration file.
The keyboard buffer will not be processed until after all hooks are run; multiple push or exec commands will end up being processed in reverse order.
The following example will set the sort
variable to date-sent
for all folders but to
threads
for all folders containing
“work” in their name.
Usage:
macro
menu
[
,menu
...]
key
sequence
[
description
]unmacro
{
*
|
map
| [
,map
...]} [
key
]
Macros are a convenient way to automate various actions.
This command allows you to create a macro.
macro
menu
[
,menu
...]
key
sequence
[
description
]
Macros are useful when you would like a single key to perform a series of actions. When you press key in menu menu, NeoMutt will behave as if you had typed sequence. So if you have a common sequence of commands you type, you can create a macro to execute those commands with a single key or fewer keys.
menu is the map which the macro will be bound in. Multiple maps may be specified by separating multiple menu arguments by commas. Whitespace may not be used in between the menu arguments and the commas separating them.
key and sequence are expanded by the same rules as the key bindings with some additions. The first is that control characters in sequence can also be specified as ^x. In order to get a caret (“^”) you need to use ^^. Secondly, to specify a certain key such as up or to invoke a function directly, you can use the format <key name> and <function name>. For a listing of key names see the section on key bindings. Functions are listed in the reference.
The advantage with using function names directly is that the macros will work regardless of the current key bindings, so they are not dependent on the user having particular key definitions. This makes them more robust and portable, and also facilitates defining of macros in files used by more than one user (e.g., the system neomuttrc).
Optionally you can specify a descriptive text after sequence, which is shown in the help screens if they contain a description.
Macro definitions (if any) listed in the help screen(s), are silently truncated at the screen width, and are not wrapped.
This command will remove a macro.
macro
menu
[
,menu
...]
key
sequence
[
description
]
map specifies from which menus the macro
should be removed. Multiple maps may be specified by separating them
with commas (no additional whitespace is allowed). If
*
is given, then the macro is removed from
all menus. Valid menu names and their description are listed
in the bind
section.
key is the key or key sequence to be unbound. It may be omitted in which case all macros in the given menus are removed.
Missing key sequence in unmacro command means unmacro all macros in menus given in menu.
Usage:
color
[
compose
]
object
[
attribute
...]
foreground
background
color
pattern-object
[
attribute
...]
foreground
background
pattern
color
regex-object
[
attribute
...]
foreground
background
regex
color
status
[
attribute
...]
foreground
background
[
regex
[
num
]]uncolor
[
compose
]
object
uncolor
pattern-object
{
pattern
|
*
}uncolor
regex-object
{
regex
|
*
}uncolor
status
{
regex
|
*
}
If your terminal supports color, you can spice up NeoMutt by creating your own color scheme.
The config variable
$color_directcolor must be
set to its final value before using any
color
command.
The types of objects that can be colored fall into two categories: Simple Colors such as the highlight in the index, and Color Lists such as the status bar. These lists can created complexing coloring rules.
Objects in NeoMutt can be given colors and attributes to make things easier to find and use.
Objects must be given both a foreground and
background color (it is not possible to specify one or the other).
Note that default
can be used as transparent
color (see below).
Colors can be specified in up to three ways, using their name
such as green
, blue
;
by their number in the palette,
such as color12
, color207
(the palette consists of the
256 Xterm colors);
or by using hexadecimal RGB codes #RRGGBB
, where
RR
, GG
, BB
are the red, green, and blue components given as a hexadecimal number
between 00 and FF (=255), e.g. #00FFFF
(bright
cyan) or #12af84
(greenish). The last syntax is
only accepted if $color_directcolor
is set.
Named colours may also be prefixed by a modifier.
bright
or light
will make the
color boldfaced or light (e.g., brightred
).
alert
to make a blinking/alert color (e.g.,
alertred
).
The precise behavior depends on the terminal and its configuration.
In particular, the boldfaced/light difference and such background
colors may be available only for terminals configured with at least
16 colors, as specified by the $TERM
environment variable.
foreground and background can be one of the following:
white
black
green
magenta
blue
cyan
yellow
red
default
In addition to the colors, objects may have their attributes set:
none
bold
italic
reverse
standout
underline
If your terminal supports it, the special keyword default can be used as a transparent color. In this case default can be used to only set the foreground or background color. The following sets the foreground and background color individually: the first command leaves the foreground untouched while the second one leaves the background untouched:
# Make error messages white text on a red background
color error default red
color error white default
On startup NeoMutt tries to detect whether the terminal it is running
in supports directcolor (aka TrueColor aka 24-bit color). If the
terminal does, NeoMutt enables the config variable
$color_directcolor otherwise
it disables it. Furthermore, NeoMutt allows to use the RGB colors
syntax with the color
command to colour elements
with 24-bit colors.
For the detection to work the
TERM environment variable must be set up
properly to advertise the terminals directcolor capability.
TERM-values which do that usually end in
-direct
, e.g. xterm-direct
.
If NeoMutt does not detect directcolor color support, but you are sure your terminal supports it, you may try to explicitly set the TERM environment variable by starting NeoMutt from the terminal as follows:
TERM=xterm-direct neomutt
If that still does not help, you can additionally force NeoMutt to use directcolors by setting $color_directcolor. Setting this variable manually is strongly discouraged since it usually leads to wrong colors.
Most of NeoMutt's colorable objects follow simple rules. They don't use a pattern and any new configuration will overwrite the old colours.
Simple colors can be undone by setting the foreground and background
to default
, or by using the uncolor
command.
These are general NeoMutt objects:
Table 3.7. Simple Colours
Colour Name | Description |
---|---|
attachment | Colour for attachment headers |
bold | Highlighting bold patterns in the body of messages |
error | Error messages printed by NeoMutt |
hdrdefault | Default colour of the message header in the pager |
indicator | Arrow or bar used to indicate the current item in a menu |
markers | The "+" markers at the beginning of wrapped lines in the pager |
message | Informational messages |
normal | Default colour for all text |
options | The key letters in multi-choice questions |
progress | Visual progress bar |
prompt | A question |
search | Highlighting of words in the pager |
signature | Email's signature lines (.sig) |
tilde | The "~" used to pad blank lines in the pager |
tree | Thread tree drawn in the message index and attachment menu |
underline | Highlighting underlined patterns in the body of messages |
warning | Warning messages |
# Make error messages white text on a red background color error white red # Make questions bold, underlined, with light blue text (with default background) color prompt bold underline cyan default
uncolor error uncolor prompt
These are sidebar objects. See Sidebar Intro for more details.
Table 3.8. Simple Sidebar Colours
Colour Name | Description |
---|---|
sidebar_background | The entire sidebar panel |
sidebar_divider | The dividing line between the Sidebar and the Index/Pager panels |
sidebar_flagged | Mailboxes containing flagged mail |
sidebar_highlight | Cursor to select a mailbox |
sidebar_indicator | The mailbox open in the Index panel |
sidebar_new | Mailboxes containing new mail |
sidebar_ordinary | Mailboxes that have no new/flagged mails, etc |
sidebar_spool_file | Mailbox that receives incoming mail |
sidebar_unread | Mailboxes containing unread mail |
color sidebar_divider brightblack default
uncolor sidebar_divider
These are compose objects.
The compose objects use a slightly different format of command.
They prefix the style with the word compose
.
Table 3.9. Simple Compose Colours
Colour Name | Description |
---|---|
header | Header labels, e.g. From: |
security_encrypt | Mail will be encrypted |
security_sign | Mail will be signed |
security_both | Mail will be encrypted and signed |
security_none | Mail will not be encrypted or signed |
color compose header bold white default
uncolor compose header
The quoted objects refer to quoted lines in an email reply.
They are defined using the
$reply_regex
config variable.
The quoted email colours don't use pattern.
The first colour, quoted
provides a default colour
for all quoted text. Also, each different level of quoting can be given
a different colour using, quoted1
,
quoted2
, quoted3
up to
quoted9
.
Table 3.10. Quoted Email Colours
Colour Name | Description |
---|---|
quoted | Text matching $quote_regex in the body of a message |
quoted1 | 1 level deeper quoted text, e.g. > > text |
quoted2 | 2 level deeper quoted text, e.g. > > > text |
... | ... |
quoted9 | 9 level deeper quoted text |
color quoted brightblue default color quoted1 brightgreen default color quoted2 yellow default
uncolor quoted uncolor quoted1 uncolor quoted2
Some objects in NeoMutt support lists of color rules. Each rule has a pattern and a color. Each is checked in turn and any matching rules are applied cumulatively (overlaid).
When applying the colours, each pattern will be tested against the field to be colored. All of the matching patterns will have their colors applied in the order they are configured.
The color lists work in slightly different ways to each other.
attach_headers
, body
and
header
match a regular expression
(regex) in the header/body of a email.
index
objects match a pattern
in the email index (see Section 3, “Patterns: Searching, Limiting and Tagging”)
Note that IMAP server-side searches (=b, =B, =h) are not
supported for color index patterns.
When $header_color_partial
is unset (the default), a header
matched by
regex will have color applied to the entire
header. When set, color is applied only to the exact text matched by
regex.
For the status
list, the
regular expression is optional. Without one,
the command will set the default style for the status bar. With a
regex (and an optional number), it's possible to style parts of the
status bar. See: Status-Color feature
for more detail.
Color lists can be undone by using the uncolor
command and the pattern or *
to match.
Table 3.11. Colour Regex Lists
Colour Name | Match | Description |
---|---|---|
attach_headers | regex | Attachment headers |
body | regex | Email body |
header | regex | Email headers |
index | pattern | Default highlighting of the entire index line |
index_author | pattern | Author in the index: %A , %a , %F , %L , %n |
index_collapsed | pattern | Number of messages in a collapsed thread: %M |
index_date | pattern | Date field: %d , %D , %{fmt} , %[fmt] , %(fmt) |
index_flags | pattern | Flags in the index: %S , %Z |
index_label | pattern | Message label: %y , %Y |
index_number | pattern | Message number: %C |
index_size | pattern | Message size: %c , %cr , %l |
index_subject | pattern | Subject in the index: %s |
index_tag | pattern | Tags in the index: %G |
index_tags | pattern | Transformed message tags: %g , %J |
status | regex | Status bar |
# Highlight emails from work (entire line) color index cyan default "~f @work.com" # Extra highlighting for the boss (just the author column) color index_author cyan red "~f boss@work.com"
uncolor index "~f @work.com"
# Clear all index_author colors
uncolor index_author *
# Add some highlights to the body of an email color body bold red default "(urgent|important)" color body yellow default "(warning|notice)" # Make the label header red color header cyan default "X-Label"
uncolor body "(urgent|important)"
# Clear all body colors
uncolor body *
uncolor header "X-Label"
# Set the default color for the entire status line color status blue white # Highlight New, Deleted, or Flagged emails color status brightred white '(New|Del|Flag):[0-9]+' # Highlight the contents of the []s but not the [] themselves color status red default '\[([^]]+)\]' 1
uncolor status '(New|Del|Flag):[0-9]+' uncolor status *
If your terminal does not support color, it is still possible change the video attributes through the use of the “mono” command. Usage:
mono
object
attribute
mono
{
header
|
body
}
attribute
regex
mono
index-object
attribute
pattern
unmono
{
index-object
|
header
|
body
} {
*
|
pattern
... }
For object, composeobject, and attribute, see the color command.
When displaying a message in the pager, NeoMutt folds long header lines at $wrap columns. Though there're precise rules about where to break and how, NeoMutt always folds headers using a tab for readability. (Note that the sending side is not affected by this, NeoMutt tries to implement standards compliant folding.)
Despite not being a real header, NeoMutt will also display an mbox "From_" line in the pager along with other headers. This line can be manipulated with ignore/unignore and hdr_order/unhdr_order commands.
Usage:
ignore
string
[
string
...]unignore
{
*
|
string
... }
Messages often have many header fields added by automatic processing systems, or which may not seem useful to display on the screen. This command allows you to specify header fields which you don't normally want to see in the pager.
You do not need to specify the full header field name. For example, “ignore content-” will ignore all header fields that begin with the string “content-”. “ignore *” will ignore all headers.
To remove a previously added token from the list, use the “unignore” command. The “unignore” command will make NeoMutt display headers matching the given string. For example, if you do “ignore x-” it is possible to “unignore x-mailer”.
“unignore *” will remove all tokens from the ignore list.
Example 3.10. Header weeding
# Sven's draconian header weeding
ignore *
unignore from date subject to cc
unignore organization organisation x-mailer: x-newsreader: x-mailing-list:
unignore posted-to:
The above example will show "From:" headers as well as mbox
"From_" lines. To hide the latter, instead use
"unignore from: date subject to cc
" on
the second line.
Usage:
hdr_order
header
[
header
...]unhdr_order
{
*
|
header
... }
With the hdr_order command you can specify an order in which NeoMutt will attempt to present these headers to you when viewing messages.
“unhdr_order*” will clear all previous headers from the order list, thus removing the header order effects set by the system-wide startup file.
Usage:
alternates
[
-group
name
...]
regex
[
regex
...]unalternates
[
-group
name
...] {
*
|
regex
... }
With various functions, NeoMutt will treat messages differently, depending on whether you sent them or whether you received them from someone else. For instance, when replying to a message that you sent to a different party, NeoMutt will automatically suggest to send the response to the original message's recipients – responding to yourself won't make much sense in many cases. (See $reply_to.)
Many users receive e-mail under a number of different addresses. To fully use NeoMutt's features here, the program must be able to recognize what e-mail addresses you receive mail under. That's the purpose of the alternates command: It takes a list of regular expressions, each of which can identify an address under which you receive e-mail.
As addresses are matched using regular expressions and not exact strict comparisons, you should make sure you specify your addresses as precise as possible to avoid mismatches. For example, if you specify:
alternates user@example
NeoMutt will consider
“some-user@example
” as being your
address, too which may not be desired. As a solution, in such cases
addresses should be specified as:
alternates '^user@example$'
The -group
flag causes all of the subsequent regular
expressions to be added to the named group.
The unalternates command can be used to write exceptions to alternates regex. If an address matches something in an alternates command, but you nonetheless do not think it is from you, you can list a more precise regex under an unalternates command.
To remove a regular expression from the alternates list, use the unalternates command with exactly the same regex. Likewise, if the regex for an alternates command matches an entry on the unalternates list, that unalternates entry will be removed. If the regex for unalternates is “*”, all entries on alternates will be removed.
Usage:
lists
[
-group
name
...]
regex
[
regex
...]unlists
{
*
|
regex
... }subscribe
[
-group
name
...]
regex
[
regex
...]unsubscribe
{
*
|
regex
... }
NeoMutt has a few nice features for
handling mailing lists. In order to
take advantage of them, you must specify which addresses belong to
mailing lists, and which mailing lists you are subscribed to. NeoMutt
also has limited support for auto-detecting mailing lists: it supports
parsing mailto:
links in the common
List-Post:
header which has the same effect as
specifying the list address via the lists command
(except the group feature). Once you have done this, the
<list-reply>
function will work for all known lists. Additionally, when you send a
message to a known list and $followup_to
is set, NeoMutt will add a Mail-Followup-To header. For unsubscribed
lists, this will include your personal address, ensuring you receive a
copy of replies. For subscribed mailing lists, the header will not,
telling other users' mail user agents not to send copies of replies to
your personal address.
The Mail-Followup-To header is a non-standard extension which is not supported by all mail user agents. Adding it is not bullet-proof against receiving personal CCs of list messages. Also note that the generation of the Mail-Followup-To header is controlled by the $followup_to configuration variable since it's common practice on some mailing lists to send Cc upon replies (which is more a group- than a list-reply).
More precisely, NeoMutt maintains lists of regular expressions for the addresses of known and subscribed mailing lists. Every subscribed mailing list is known. To mark a mailing list as known, use the list command. To mark it as subscribed, use subscribe.
You can use regular expressions with both commands. To mark all messages sent to a specific bug report's address on Debian's bug tracking system as list mail, for instance, you could say
subscribe [0-9]+.*@bugs.debian.org
as it's often sufficient to just give a portion of the list's e-mail address.
Specify as much of the address as you need to to remove ambiguity. For
example, if you've subscribed to the NeoMutt mailing list, you will
receive mail addressed to neomutt-users@neomutt.org
.
So, to tell NeoMutt that this is a mailing list, you could add
lists neomutt-users@
to your initialization file. To
tell NeoMutt that you are subscribed to it, add
subscribe neomutt-users
to your
initialization file instead. If you also happen to get mail from
someone whose address is neomutt-users@example.com
,
you could use
lists ^neomutt-users@neomutt\\.org$
or
subscribe ^neomutt-users@neomutt\\.org$
to match only mail from the actual list.
The -group
flag adds all of the subsequent regular
expressions to the named address group
in addition to adding to the specified address list.
The “unlists” command is used to remove a token from the list of known and subscribed mailing-lists. Use “unlists *” to remove all tokens.
To remove a mailing list from the list of subscribed mailing lists, but keep it on the list of known mailing lists, use unsubscribe.
Usage:
mbox-hook
[
-noregex
]
regex
mailbox
This command is used to move read messages from a specified mailbox to a different mailbox automatically when you quit or change folders. regex is used to specifying the mailbox to treat as a “spool” mailbox and mailbox specifies where mail should be saved when read. The -noregex switch controls whether regex is matched using a simple string comparison or a full regex match.
The regex parameter has mailbox shortcut expansion performed on the first character. See Mailbox Matching in Hooks for more details.
Note that execution of mbox-hooks is dependent on the $move configuration variable. If set to “no” (the default), mbox-hooks will not be executed.
Unlike some of the other hook commands, only the first matching regex is used (it is not possible to save read mail in more than a single mailbox).
Usage:
mailboxes
[
[
-label
label
|
-nolabel
]
[
-notify
|
-nonotify
]
[
-poll
|
-nopoll
]
mailbox
] [...]named-mailboxes
label
mailbox
{
label
mailbox
...}unmailboxes
{
*
|
mailbox
... }
This command specifies folders which can receive mail and which will be checked for new messages periodically.
The -label
argument can be used to specify an
alternative label to print in the sidebar or mailbox browser instead
of the mailbox path. A label may be removed via the
-nolabel
argument. If unspecified, an existing
mailbox label will be unchanged.
Use -nonotify
to disable notifying when new mail
arrives. The -notify
argument can be used to
re-enable notifying for an existing mailbox. If unspecified: a new
mailbox will notify by default, while an existing mailbox will be
unchanged.
To disable polling, specify -nopoll
before the
mailbox name. The -poll
argument can be used to
re-enable polling for an existing mailbox. If unspecified: a new
mailbox will poll by default, while an existing mailbox will be
unchanged.
folder can either be a local file or directory (Mbox/Mmdf or Maildir/Mh). If NeoMutt was built with POP and/or IMAP support, folder can also be a POP/IMAP folder URL. The URL syntax is described in Section 1.2, “URL Syntax”, POP and IMAP are described in Section 3, “POP3 Support” and Section 4, “IMAP Support” respectively.
NeoMutt provides a number of advanced features for handling (possibly many) folders and new mail within them, please refer to Section 13, “New Mail Detection” for details (including in what situations and how often NeoMutt checks for new mail). Additionally, $new_mail_command can be used to run a command when new mail is detected.
The “unmailboxes” command is used to remove a token from the list of folders which receive mail. “unmailboxes” can be used on the mailbox path, “$folder”-abbreviated path, or description. Use “unmailboxes *” to remove all tokens.
The folders in the mailboxes command are resolved when the command is executed, so if these names contain shortcut characters (such as “=” and “!”), any variable definition that affects these characters (like $folder and $spool_file) should be set before the mailboxes command. If none of these shortcuts are used, a local path should be absolute as otherwise NeoMutt tries to find it relative to the directory from where NeoMutt was started which may not always be desired.
Usage:
my_hdr
string
unmy_hdr
{
*
|
field
... }
The my_hdr command allows you to create your own header fields which will be added to every message you send and appear in the editor if $edit_headers is set.
For example, if you would like to add an “Organization:”
header field to all of your outgoing messages, you can put the command
something like shown in Example 3.12, “Defining custom headers” in your
.neomuttrc
.
Space characters are not allowed between the keyword and the colon (“:”). The standard for electronic mail (RFC2822) says that space is illegal there, so NeoMutt enforces the rule.
If you would like to add a header field to a single message, you should
either set the $edit_headers
variable, or use the <edit-headers>
function
(default: “E”) in the compose menu so that you can edit
the header of your message along with the body.
To remove user defined header fields, use the unmy_hdr command. You may specify an asterisk (“*”) to remove all header fields, or the fields to remove. For example, to remove all “To” and “Cc” header fields, you could use:
unmy_hdr to cc
Usage:
fcc-save-hook
pattern
mailbox
fcc-hook
pattern
mailbox
save-hook
pattern
mailbox
fcc-save-hook is a shortcut, equivalent to doing both a fcc-hook and a save-hook with its arguments, including %-expansion on mailbox according to $index_format.
If the pattern is a plain string, or a regex, it will be expanded to a pattern using $default_hook.
fcc-hook is used to save outgoing mail in a mailbox other than $record. NeoMutt searches the initial list of message recipients for the first matching pattern and uses mailbox as the default “Fcc:” mailbox. If no match is found the message will be saved to $record mailbox.
fcc-hook [@.]aol\\.com$ +spammers
...will save a copy of all messages going to the aol.com domain to the “+spammers” mailbox by default.
save-hook is used to override the default mailbox used when saving messages. mailbox will be used as the default if the message matches pattern.
Example 3.13. Using %-expandos in save-hook
# default: save all to ~/Mail/<author name> save-hook . ~/Mail/%F # save from john@turing.ox.ac.uk and john@ox.ac.uk to $folder/smith save-hook john@(turing\\.)?ox\\.ac\\.uk$ +smith # save from aol.com to $folder/spam save-hook aol\\.com$ +spam
Also see the fcc-save-hook command.
To provide more flexibility and good defaults, NeoMutt applies the expandos of $index_format to mailbox after it was expanded. See Message Matching in Hooks for information on the exact format of pattern.
Usage:
reply-hook
pattern
command
send-hook
pattern
command
send2-hook
pattern
command
These commands can be used to execute arbitrary configuration commands based upon recipients of the message. pattern is used to match the message, see Message Matching in Hooks for details. command is executed when pattern matches.
If the pattern is a plain string, or a regex, it will be expanded to a pattern using $default_hook.
reply-hook is matched against the message you are replying to, instead of the message you are sending. send-hook is matched against all messages, both new and replies.
reply-hooks are matched
before the send-hook,
regardless of the order specified in the user's
configuration file. However, you can inhibit
send-hook in the reply case by using the pattern
'! ~Q'
(not replied, see
Message Matching in Hooks) in the send-hook
to tell when reply-hook have been executed.
send2-hook is matched every time a message is changed, either by editing it, or by using the compose menu to change its recipients or subject. send2-hook is executed after send-hook, and can, e.g., be used to set parameters such as the $sendmail variable depending on the message's sender address.
For each type of send-hook or
reply-hook, when multiple matches occur, commands
are executed in the order they are specified in the
.neomuttrc
(for that type of hook).
Example:
send-hook work "set
mime_forward signature=''"
Another typical use for this command is to change the values of the $attribution_intro, $attribution_locale, and $signature variables in order to change the language of the attributions and signatures based upon the recipients.
send-hook's are only executed once after getting the initial list of recipients. They are not executed when resuming a postponed draft. Adding a recipient after replying or editing the message will not cause any send-hook to be executed, similarly if $auto_edit is set (as then the initial list of recipients is empty). Also note that my_hdr commands which modify recipient headers, or the message's subject, don't have any effect on the current message when executed from a send-hook.
Usage:
message-hook
pattern
command
This command can be used to execute arbitrary configuration commands
before viewing or formatting a message based upon information about the
message. command is executed if the
pattern matches the message to be displayed. When
multiple matches occur, commands are executed in the order they are
specified in the .neomuttrc
.
If the pattern is a plain string, or a regex, it will be expanded to a pattern using $default_hook.
See Message Matching in Hooks for information on the exact format of pattern.
Example:
message-hook ~A 'set pager=builtin' message-hook '~f freshmeat-news' 'set pager="less \"+/^ subject: .*\""'
Usage:
crypt-hook
regex
keyid
When encrypting messages with PGP/GnuPG or OpenSSL, you may want to associate a certain key with a given e-mail address automatically, either because the recipient's public key can't be deduced from the destination address, or because, for some reasons, you need to override the key NeoMutt would normally use. The crypt-hook command provides a method by which you can specify the ID of the public key to be used when encrypting messages to a certain recipient. You may use multiple crypt-hooks with the same regex; multiple matching crypt-hooks result in the use of multiple keyids for a recipient. During key selection, NeoMutt will confirm whether each crypt-hook is to be used (unless the $crypt_confirm_hook option is unset). If all crypt-hooks for a recipient are declined, NeoMutt will use the original recipient address for key selection instead.
The meaning of keyid is to be taken broadly in this context: You can either put a numerical key ID or fingerprint here, an e-mail address, or even just a real name.
Usage:
index-format-hook
name
[!]pattern
format-string
This command is used to inject format strings dynamically into $index_format based on pattern matching against the current message.
If the pattern is a plain string, or a regex, it will be expanded to a pattern using $default_hook.
The $index_format expando %@name@ specifies a placeholder for the injection. Index-format-hooks with the same name are matched using pattern against the current message. Matching is done in the order specified in the .muttrc, with the first match being used. The hook's format-string is then substituted and evaluated.
Because the first match is used, best practice is to put a catch-all ~A pattern as the last hook. Here is an example showing how to implement dynamic date formatting:
set index_format="%4C %-6@date@ %-15.15F %Z (%4c) %s" index-format-hook date "~d<1d" "%[%H:%M]" index-format-hook date "~d<1m" "%[%a %d]" index-format-hook date "~d<1y" "%[%b %d]" index-format-hook date "~A" "%[%m/%y]"
Another example, showing a way to prepend to the subject. Note that without a catch-all ~A pattern, no match results in the expando being replaced with an empty string.
set index_format="%4C %@subj_flags@%s" index-format-hook subj_flags "~f boss@example.com" "** BOSS ** " index-format-hook subj_flags "~f spouse@example.com" ":-) "
Usage:
push
string
This command adds the named string to the beginning of the keyboard buffer. The string may contain control characters, key names and function names like the sequence string in the macro command. You may use it to automatically run a sequence of commands at startup, or when entering certain folders. For example, Example 3.14, “Embedding push in folder-hook” shows how to automatically collapse all threads when entering a folder.
For using functions like shown in the example, it's important to use
angle brackets (“<” and “>”) to make
NeoMutt recognize the input as a function name. Otherwise it will
simulate individual just keystrokes, i.e.
“push collapse-all
” would be
interpreted as if you had typed “c”, followed by
“o”, followed by “l”, ..., which is not
desired and may lead to very unexpected behavior.
Keystrokes can be used, too, but are less portable because of potentially changed key bindings. With default bindings, this is equivalent to the above example:
folder-hook . 'push \eV'
because it simulates that Esc+V was pressed (which is the default
binding of <collapse-all>
).
Usage:
exec
function
[
function
...]
This command can be used to execute any function. Functions are listed
in the function reference.
“exec function
” is
equivalent to “push <function>
”.
Usage:
score
pattern
value
unscore
{
*
|
pattern
... }
The score commands adds value
to a message's score if pattern matches it.
pattern is a string in the format described in the
patterns section (note: For efficiency
reasons, patterns which scan information not available in the index,
such as ~b
, ~B
,
~h
, ~M
, or ~X
may not be used). value is a positive or negative
integer. A message's final score is the sum total of all matching
score entries. However, you may optionally prefix
value with an equal sign (“=”) to
cause evaluation to stop at a particular entry if there is a match.
Negative final scores are rounded up to 0.
The unscore command removes score entries from the list. You must specify the same pattern specified in the score command for it to be removed. The pattern “*” is a special token which means to clear the list of all score entries.
Scoring occurs as the messages are read in, before the mailbox is sorted. Because of this, patterns which depend on threading, such as ~=, ~$, and ~(), will not work by default. A workaround is to push the scoring command in a folder hook. This will cause the mailbox to be rescored after it is opened and input starts being processed:
folder-hook . 'push "<enter-command>score ~= 10<enter>"'
Usage:
spam
regex
format
nospam
{
*
|
regex
}
NeoMutt has generalized support for external spam-scoring filters. By
defining your spam regular expressions with the spam and
nospam
commands, you can limit,
search, and sort your mail
based on its spam attributes, as determined by the external filter. You
also can display the spam attributes in your index display using the
%H
selector in the
$index_format variable. (Tip: try
%<H?[%H] >
to display spam tags only when they are
defined for a given message.)
Note: the value displayed by %H
and searched by
~H
is stored in the
header cache. NeoMutt isn't smart enough to
invalidate a header cache entry based on changing spam
rules, so if you aren't seeing correct %H
values, try
temporarily turning off the header cache. If that fixes the problem,
then once your spam rules are set to your liking, remove your stale
header cache files and turn the header cache back on.
Your first step is to define your external filter's spam headers using
the spam command. regex
should be a regular expression that matches a header in a mail message.
If any message in the mailbox matches this regular expression, it will
receive a “spam tag” or “spam attribute”
(unless it also matches a nospam regular expression
– see below.) The appearance of this attribute is entirely up to you,
and is governed by the format parameter.
format can be any static text, but it also can
include back-references from the regex
expression. (A regular expression “back-reference” refers
to a sub-expression contained within parentheses.)
%1
is replaced with the first back-reference in the
regex, %2
with the second, etc.
To match spam tags, NeoMutt needs the corresponding header information which is always the case for local and POP folders but not for IMAP in the default configuration. Depending on the spam header to be analyzed, $imap_headers may need to be adjusted.
If you're using multiple spam filters, a message can have more than one spam-related header. You can define spam rules for each filter you use. If a message matches two or more of these regular expressions, and the $spam_separator variable is set to a string, then the message's spam tag will consist of all the format strings joined together, with the value of $spam_separator separating them.
For example, suppose one uses DCC, SpamAssassin, and PureMessage, then the configuration might look like in Example 3.15, “Configuring spam detection”.
Example 3.15. Configuring spam detection
spam "X-DCC-.*-Metrics:.*(....)=many" "90+/DCC-%1" spam "X-Spam-Status: Yes" "90+/SA" spam "X-PerlMX-Spam: .*Probability=([0-9]+)%" "%1/PM" set spam_separator=", "
If then a message is received that DCC registered with
“many” hits under the “Fuz2” checksum, and
that PureMessage registered with a 97% probability of being spam, that
message's spam tag would read 90+/DCC-Fuz2, 97/PM
.
(The four characters before “=many” in a DCC report
indicate the checksum used – in this case, “Fuz2”.)
If the $spam_separator variable is unset, then each spam rule match supersedes the previous one. Instead of getting joined format strings, you'll get only the last one to match.
The spam tag is what will be displayed in the index when you use
%H
in the
$index_format variable. It's also
the string that the ~H
pattern-matching expression
matches against for <search>
and
<limit>
functions. And it's what sorting by
spam attribute will use as a sort key.
That's a pretty complicated example, and most people's actual environments will have only one spam filter. The simpler your configuration, the more effective NeoMutt can be, especially when it comes to sorting.
Generally, when you sort by spam tag, NeoMutt will sort
lexically – that is, by ordering strings
alphanumerically. However, if a spam tag begins with a number, NeoMutt
will sort numerically first, and lexically only when two numbers are
equal in value. (This is like UNIX's sort -n
.)
A message with no spam attributes at all – that is, one that didn't
match any of your spam rules
– is sorted at lowest priority. Numbers are sorted next, beginning with
0 and ranging upward. Finally, non-numeric strings are sorted, with
“a” taking lower priority than “z”. Clearly,
in general, sorting by spam tags is most effective when you can coerce
your filter to give you a raw number. But in case you can't, NeoMutt
can still do something useful.
The nospam command can be used to write exceptions to spam rules. If a header field matches something in a spam command, but you nonetheless do not want it to receive a spam tag, you can list a more precise regular expression under a nospam command.
If the regex given to nospam is exactly the same as the regex on an existing spam rule entry, the effect will be to remove the entry from the spam rules list, instead of adding an exception. Likewise, if the regex for a spam command matches an entry on the nospam rule list, that nospam entry will be removed. If the regex for nospam is “*”, all entries on both lists will be removed. This might be the default action if you use spam and nospam in conjunction with a folder-hook.
You can have as many spam or
nospam commands as you like. You can even do your
own primitive spam detection within NeoMutt – for
example, if you consider all mail from MAILER-DAEMON
to be spam, you can use a spam command like this:
spam "^From: .*MAILER-DAEMON" "999"
NeoMutt supports these types of configuration variables:
A boolean expression, either “yes” or “no”.
A signed integer number in the range -32768 to 32767.
A signed integer number in the range -2147483648 to 2147483647.
Arbitrary text.
A specialized string for representing paths including support for mailbox shortcuts (see Section 10, “Mailbox Shortcuts”) as well as tilde (“~”) for a user's home directory and more.
Like a boolean but triggers a prompt when set to “ask-yes” or “ask-no” with “yes” and “no” preselected respectively.
A specialized string allowing only particular words as values depending on the variable.
A regular expression, see Section 2, “Regular Expressions” for an introduction.
Specifies the type of folder to use: mbox, mmdf, mh or maildir. Currently only used to determine the type for newly created folders.
An email address either with or without real_name. The older
“user@example.org (Joe User)
”
form is supported but strongly deprecated.
Arbitrary text, see Section 27.3, “User-Defined Variables” for details.
The following commands are available to manipulate and query variables:
Usage:
set
{
[
no
|
inv
|
&
|
?
]
variable
} [...]set
{
variable=value
|
variable+=increment
|
variable-=decrement
} [...]unset
variable
[
variable
...]reset
variable
[
variable
...]toggle
variable
[
variable
...]set
variable
?
This command is used to set (and unset) configuration variables. There are several basic types of variables: boolean, number, string, string list and quadoption. boolean variables can be set (true) or unset (false). number variables can be assigned a positive integer value. The value of numeric variables can be incremented += and decremented -=. String list variables use += for appending to the string list and -= for removal from the string list. string variables consist of any number of printable characters and must be enclosed in quotes if they contain spaces or tabs. You may also use the escape sequences “\n” and “\t” for newline and tab, respectively. Content of a string variable can be extended using +=. quadoption variables are used to control whether or not to be prompted for certain actions, or to specify a default action. A value of yes will cause the action to be carried out automatically as if you had answered yes to the question. Similarly, a value of no will cause the action to be carried out as if you had answered “no.” A value of ask-yes will cause a prompt with a default answer of “yes” and ask-no will provide a default answer of “no.”
Prefixing a variable with “no” will unset it. Example:
set noask_bcc
.
For boolean variables, you may optionally prefix
the variable name with inv
to toggle the value (on
or off). This is useful when writing macros. Example:
set invsmart_wrap
.
The toggle command automatically prepends the
inv
prefix to all specified variables.
The unset command automatically prepends the
no
prefix to all specified variables.
Using the <enter-command>
function in the
index menu, you can query the value of
a variable by suffixing the name of the variable with a question
mark:
set allow_8bit?
The old prefix query syntax (set
?allow_8bit
) is also still supported.
The question mark is actually only required for boolean and quadoption variables.
The reset command resets all given variables to the compile time defaults (hopefully mentioned in this manual). If you use the command set and prefix the variable with “&” this has the same behavior as the reset command.
With the reset command there exists the special variable “all”, which allows you to reset all variables to their system defaults.
Along with the variables listed in the
Configuration variables section,
NeoMutt supports user-defined variables with names starting with
my_
as in, for example,
my_cfgdir
.
The set command either creates a custom
my_
variable or changes its value if it
exists already. Use of += will adjust
a custom variable using the same behavior as a string
variable, by appending additional characters (this is true
even if the current contents of the variable resemble an
integer, which is different than the behavior of
+= on built-in numeric
variables). The unset and
reset commands remove the variable
entirely.
Since user-defined variables are expanded in the same way that environment variables are (except for the shell-escape command and backtick expansion), this feature can be used to make configuration files more readable.
The following example defines and uses the variable
my_cfgdir
to abbreviate the calls of the
source command:
Example 3.16. Using user-defined variables for config file readability
set my_cfgdir = $HOME/neomutt/config
source $my_cfgdir/hooks $my_cfgdir/macros
# more source commands...
A custom variable can also be used in macros to backup the current
value of another variable. In the following example, the value of
the $delete is changed temporarily
while its original value is saved as my_delete
.
After the macro has executed all commands, the original value of
$delete is restored.
Example 3.17. Using user-defined variables for backing up other config option values
macro pager ,x '\ <enter-command>set my_delete=$delete<enter>\ <enter-command>set delete=yes<enter>\ ...\ <enter-command>set delete=$my_delete<enter>'
Since NeoMutt expands such values already when parsing the
configuration file(s), the value of $my_delete
in the last example would be the value of
$delete exactly as it was at that
point during parsing the configuration file. If another statement
would change the value for $delete
later in the same or another file, it would have no effect on
$my_delete
. However, the expansion can be
deferred to runtime, as shown in the next example, when escaping
the dollar sign.
Example 3.18. Deferring user-defined variable expansion to runtime
macro pager <PageDown> "\ <enter-command> set my_old_pager_stop=\$pager_stop pager_stop<Enter>\ <next-page>\ <enter-command> set pager_stop=\$my_old_pager_stop<Enter>\ <enter-command> unset my_old_pager_stop<Enter>"
Note that there is a space between
<enter-command>
and the
set configuration command, preventing NeoMutt
from recording the macro's commands into its
history.
Variables are always assigned string values which NeoMutt parses into its internal representation according to the type of the variable, for example an integer number for numeric types. For all queries (including $-expansion) the value is converted from its internal type back into string. As a result, any variable can be assigned any value given that its content is valid for the target. This also counts for custom variables which are of type string. In case of parsing errors, NeoMutt will print error messages. Example 3.19, “Type conversions using variables” demonstrates type conversions.
Example 3.19. Type conversions using variables
set my_lines = "5" # value is string "5" set pager_index_lines = $my_lines # value is integer 5 set my_sort = "date-received" # value is string "date-received" set sort = "last-$my_sort" # value is sort last-date-received set my_inc = $read_inc # value is string "10" (default of $read_inc) set my_foo = $my_inc # value is string "10"
These assignments are all valid. If, however, the value of
$my_lines
would have been “five” (or
something else that cannot be parsed into a number), the assignment
to $pager_index_lines
would have produced an error
message.
Type conversion applies to all configuration commands which take arguments. But please note that every expanded value of a variable is considered just a single token. A working example is:
set my_pattern = "~A"
set my_number = "10"
# same as: score ~A +10
score $my_pattern +$my_number
What does not work is:
set my_mx = "+mailbox1 +mailbox2" mailboxes $my_mx +mailbox3
because the value of $my_mx
is interpreted as
a single mailbox named “+mailbox1 +mailbox2” and not two
distinct mailboxes.
Usage:
source
filename
[
filename
...]
This command allows the inclusion of initialization commands from other
files. For example, I place all of my aliases in
~/.mail_aliases
so that I can make my
~/.neomuttrc
readable and keep my aliases private.
If the filename begins with a tilde (“~”), it will be expanded to the path of your home directory.
If the filename is relative and the command source is executed from the context of a configuration file, then the filename is interpreted relative to the directory of that configuration file. If the command is executed outside of a configuration file, e.g. from the prompt, then the filename is interpreted relative to the current working directory (see cd on how to change the current working directory at runtime).
A hook remembers the configuration file it was defined in and sets the context to that file when executing its commands. As a result a source command inside a hook is executed in the context of the configuration file the hook was defined in. Thus relative filenames are interpreted relative to the configuration file the hook is defined in.
If the filename ends with a vertical bar (“|”), then
filename is considered to be an executable program
from which to read input (e.g.
source ~/bin/myscript|
).
Usage:
unhook
{
*
|
hook-type
}
This command permits you to flush hooks you have previously defined.
You can either remove all hooks by giving the “*”
character as an argument, or you can remove all hooks of a specific
type by saying something like
unhook send-hook
.
Format strings are a general concept you'll find in several locations through the NeoMutt configuration, especially in the $index_format, $pager_format, $status_format, and other related variables. These can be very straightforward, and it's quite possible you already know how to use them.
The most basic format string element is a percent symbol followed by
another character. For example, %s
represents
a message's Subject: header in the
$index_format variable. The
“expandos” available are documented with each format
variable, but there are general modifiers available with all
formatting expandos, too. Those are our concern here.
Some of the modifiers are borrowed right out of C (though you might
know them from Perl, Python, shell, or another language). These are
the [-]m.n
modifiers, as in
%-12.12s
. As with such programming languages,
these modifiers allow you to specify the minimum and maximum size of
the resulting string, as well as its justification. If the
“-” sign follows the percent, the string will be
left-justified instead of right-justified. If there's a number
immediately following that, it's the minimum amount of space the
formatted string will occupy – if it's naturally smaller than that,
it will be padded out with spaces. If a decimal point and another
number follow, that's the maximum space allowable – the string will
not be permitted to exceed that width, no matter its natural size.
Each of these three elements is optional, so that all these are legal
format strings: %-12s
, %4c
,
%.15F
and %-12.15L
.
NeoMutt adds some other modifiers to format strings. If you use an
equals symbol (=
) as a numeric prefix (like the
minus above), it will force the string to be centered within its
minimum space range. For example, %=14y
will
reserve 14 characters for the %y expansion – that's the set of
message keywords (formerly X-Label). If the expansion results in
a string less than 14 characters, it will be centered in
a 14-character space. If the X-Label for a message were
“test”, that expansion would look like
“ test ”.
There are two very little-known modifiers that affect the way that an expando is replaced. If there is an underline (“_”) character between any format modifiers (as above) and the expando letter, it will expands in all lower case. And if you use a colon (“:”), it will replace all decimal points with underlines.
Depending on the format string variable, some of its sequences can be used to optionally print a string if their value is nonzero. For example, you may only want to see the number of flagged messages if such messages exist, since zero is not particularly meaningful. To optionally print a string based upon one of the above sequences, the following construct is used:
%<sequence_char?optional_string>
where sequence_char is an expando, and optional_string is the string you would like printed if sequence_char is nonzero. optional_string may contain other sequences as well as normal text, but you may not nest optional strings.
Here is an example illustrating how to optionally print the number of
new messages (%n
) in a mailbox in
$status_format:
%<n?%n new messages>
You can also switch between two strings using the following construct:
%<sequence_char?if_string&else_string>
If the value of sequence_char is non-zero, if_string will be expanded, otherwise else_string will be expanded.
The conditional sequences can also be nested by using the %< and > operators. The %? notation can still be used but requires quoting. For example:
%<x?true&false> %<x?%<y?%<z?xyz&xy>&x>&none>
For more examples, see Section 28, “Nested If Feature”
Any format string ending in a vertical bar (“|”) will be expanded and piped through the first word in the string, using spaces as separator. The string returned will be used for display. If the returned string ends in %, it will be passed through the formatter a second time. This allows the filter to generate a replacement format string including % expandos.
All % expandos in a format string are expanded before the script is called so that:
will make NeoMutt expand %r
, %f
and %L
before calling the script. The example also
shows that arguments can be quoted: the script will receive the
expanded string between the single quotes as the only argument.
A practical example is the mutt_xtitle
script
installed in the samples
subdirectory of the
NeoMutt documentation: it can be used as filter for
$status_format to set the
current terminal's title, if supported.
In most format strings, NeoMutt supports different types of padding using special %-expandos:
%|X
When this occurs, NeoMutt will fill the rest of the line with
the character X
. For example, filling the
rest of the line with dashes is done by setting:
set status_format = "%v on %h: %B: %<n?%n&no> new messages %|-"
%>X
Since the previous expando stops at the end of line, there must
be a way to fill the gap between two items via the
%>X
expando: it puts as many characters
X
in between two items so that the rest of
the line will be right-justified. For example, to not put the
version string and hostname the above example on the left but
on the right and fill the gap with spaces, one might use (note
the space after %>
):
set status_format = "%B: %<n?%n&no> new messages %> (%v on %h)"
%*X
Normal right-justification will print everything to the left of
the %>
, displaying padding and whatever
lies to the right only if there's room. By contrast,
“soft-fill” gives priority to the right-hand side,
guaranteeing space to display it and showing padding only if
there's still room. If necessary, soft-fill will eat text
leftwards to make room for rightward text. For example, to
right-justify the subject making sure as much as possible of it
fits on screen, one might use (note two spaces after
%*
: the second ensures there's a space
between the truncated right-hand side and the subject):
set index_format="%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-15.15L (%<l?%4l&%4c>)%* %s"
This feature allows the format of dates in the index to vary based on how recent the message is. This is especially useful in combination with the nested-if feature.
For example, using
%<[y?%<[d?%[%H:%M]&%[%m/%d]>&%[%y.%m]>
for the date in the $index_format
will produce
a display like:
1 + 14.12 Grace Hall ( 13) Gulliver's Travels 2 + 10/02 Callum Harrison ( 48) Huckleberry Finn 3 12:17 Rhys Lee ( 42) The Lord Of The Rings
Various format strings contain expandos that display the size of
messages in bytes. This includes
%s
in $attach_format,
%l
in $compose_format,
%s
in $folder_format,
%c
and %cr
in $index_format,
and %l and %L in $status_format.
There are four configuration variables that can be used to customize
how the numbers are displayed.
$size_show_bytes will display the number of bytes when the size is < 1 kilobyte. When unset, kilobytes will be displayed instead.
$size_show_mb will display the number of megabytes when the size is >= 1 megabyte. When unset, kilobytes will be displayed instead (which could be a large number).
$size_show_fractions, will display numbers with a single decimal place for values from 0 to 10 kilobytes, and 1 to 10 megabytes.
$size_units_on_left will display the unit (“K” or “M”) to the left of the number, instead of the right if unset.
These variables also affect size display in a few other places, such as progress indicators and attachment delimiters in the pager.
Usage:
mailto_allow
{
*
|
header-field
... }unmailto_allow
{
*
|
header-field
... }
As a security measure, NeoMutt will only add user-approved header
fields from a mailto:
URL. This is necessary since
NeoMutt will handle certain header fields, such as
Attach:
, in a special way. The
mailto_allow
and unmailto_allow
commands allow the user to modify the list of approved headers.
NeoMutt initializes the default list to contain only the
Subject
and Body
header fields,
which are the only requirement specified by the
mailto:
specification in RFC2368, and the
Cc
, In-Reply-To
,
References
headers to aid with replies to mailing
lists.
Table of Contents
A “character set” is basically a mapping between bytes and glyphs and implies a certain character encoding scheme. For example, for the ISO 8859 family of character sets, an encoding of 8bit per character is used. For the Unicode character set, different character encodings may be used, UTF-8 being the most popular. In UTF-8, a character is represented using a variable number of bytes ranging from 1 to 4.
Since NeoMutt is a command-line tool run from a shell, and delegates
certain tasks to external tools (such as an editor for
composing/editing messages), all of these tools need to agree on
a character set and encoding. There exists no way to reliably deduce
the character set a plain text file has. Interoperability is gained by
the use of well-defined environment variables. The full set can be
printed by issuing locale
on the command line.
Upon startup, NeoMutt determines the character set on its own using
routines that inspect locale-specific environment variables. Therefore,
it is generally not necessary to set the $charset
variable in NeoMutt. It may even be counter-productive as NeoMutt uses
system and library functions that derive the character set themselves
and on which NeoMutt has no influence. It's safest to let NeoMutt work
out the locale setup itself.
If you happen to work with several character sets on a regular basis, it's highly advisable to use Unicode and an UTF-8 locale. Unicode can represent nearly all characters in a message at the same time. When not using a Unicode locale, it may happen that you receive messages with characters not representable in your locale. When displaying such a message, or replying to or forwarding it, information may get lost possibly rendering the message unusable (not only for you but also for the recipient, this breakage is not reversible as lost information cannot be guessed).
A Unicode locale makes all conversions superfluous which eliminates the risk of conversion errors. It also eliminates potentially wrong expectations about the character set between NeoMutt and external programs.
The terminal emulator used also must be properly configured for the current locale. Terminal emulators usually do not derive the locale from environment variables, they need to be configured separately. If the terminal is incorrectly configured, NeoMutt may display random and unexpected characters (question marks, octal codes, or just random glyphs), format strings may not work as expected, you may not be abled to enter non-ascii characters, and possible more. Data is always represented using bytes and so a correct setup is very important as to the machine, all character sets “look” the same.
Warning: A mismatch between what system and library functions think the
locale is and what NeoMutt was told what the locale is may make it
behave badly with non-ascii input: it will fail at seemingly random
places. This warning is to be taken seriously since not only local mail
handling may suffer: sent messages may carry wrong character set
information the receiver has too deal with. The
need to set $charset
directly in most cases points
at terminal and environment variable setup problems, not NeoMutt
problems.
A list of officially assigned and known character sets can be found at
IANA,
a list of locally supported locales can be obtained by running
locale -a
.
All string patterns in NeoMutt including those in more complex patterns must be specified using regular expressions (regex) in the “POSIX extended” syntax (which is more or less the syntax used by egrep and GNU awk). For your convenience, we have included below a brief description of this syntax.
The search is case sensitive if the regular expression contains at least one upper case letter, and case insensitive otherwise.
“\” must be quoted if used for a regular expression in an initialization command: “\\”.
A regular expression is a pattern that describes a set of strings. Regular expressions are constructed analogously to arithmetic expressions, by using various operators to combine smaller expressions.
The regular expression can be enclosed/delimited by either " or ' which is useful if the regular expression includes a white-space character. See Syntax of Initialization Files for more information on " and ' delimiter processing. To match a literal " or ' you must preface it with \ (backslash).
The fundamental building blocks are the regular expressions that match a single character. Most characters, including all letters and digits, are regular expressions that match themselves. Any metacharacter with special meaning may be quoted by preceding it with a backslash.
The following matches a literal dot “.” in an address:
Example 4.1. Matching a literal dot
# no quotes alternates only\\.dot@example\\.org # single quotes lists 'only\.dot@example\.org' # Double quotes subscribe "only\\.dot@example\\.org"
The period “.” matches any single character. The caret “^” and the dollar sign “$” are metacharacters that respectively match the empty string at the beginning and end of a line.
A list of characters enclosed by “[” and “]” matches any single character in that list; if the first character of the list is a caret “^” then it matches any character not in the list. For example, the regular expression [0123456789] matches any single digit. A range of ASCII characters may be specified by giving the first and last characters, separated by a hyphen “-”. Most metacharacters lose their special meaning inside lists. To include a literal “]” place it first in the list. Similarly, to include a literal “^” place it anywhere but first. Finally, to include a literal hyphen “-” place it last.
Certain named classes of characters are predefined. Character classes consist of “[:”, a keyword denoting the class, and “:]”. The following classes are defined by the POSIX standard in Table 4.1, “POSIX regular expression character classes”
Table 4.1. POSIX regular expression character classes
Character class | Description |
---|---|
[:alnum:] | Alphanumeric characters |
[:alpha:] | Alphabetic characters |
[:blank:] | Space or tab characters |
[:cntrl:] | Control characters |
[:digit:] | Numeric characters |
[:graph:] | Characters that are both printable and visible. (A space is printable, but not visible, while an “a” is both) |
[:lower:] | Lower-case alphabetic characters |
[:print:] | Printable characters (characters that are not control characters) |
[:punct:] | Punctuation characters (characters that are not letter, digits, control characters, or space characters) |
[:space:] | Space characters (such as space, tab and formfeed, to name a few) |
[:upper:] | Upper-case alphabetic characters |
[:xdigit:] | Characters that are hexadecimal digits |
A character class is only valid in a regular expression inside the brackets of a character list.
Note that the brackets in these class names are part of the symbolic names, and must be included in addition to the brackets delimiting the bracket list. For example, [[:digit:]] is equivalent to [0-9].
Two additional special sequences can appear in character lists. These apply to non-ASCII character sets, which can have single symbols (called collating elements) that are represented with more than one character, as well as several characters that are equivalent for collating or sorting purposes:
A collating symbol is a multi-character collating element enclosed in “[.” and “.]”. For example, if “ch” is a collating element, then [[.ch.]] is a regex that matches this collating element, while [ch] is a regex that matches either “c” or “h”.
An equivalence class is a locale-specific name for a list of characters that are equivalent. The name is enclosed in “[=” and “=]”. For example, the name “e” might be used to represent all of “e” with grave (“è”), “e” with acute (“é”) and “e”. In this case, [[=e=]] is a regex that matches any of: “e” with grave (“è”), “e” with acute (“é”) and “e”.
A regular expression matching a single character may be followed by one of several repetition operators described in Table 4.2, “Regular expression repetition operators”.
Table 4.2. Regular expression repetition operators
Operator | Description |
---|---|
? | The preceding item is optional and matched at most once |
* | The preceding item will be matched zero or more times |
+ | The preceding item will be matched one or more times |
{n} | The preceding item is matched exactly n times |
{n,} | The preceding item is matched n or more times |
{,m} | The preceding item is matched at most m times |
{n,m} | The preceding item is matched at least n times, but no more than m times |
Two regular expressions may be concatenated; the resulting regular expression matches any string formed by concatenating two substrings that respectively match the concatenated subexpressions.
Two regular expressions may be joined by the infix operator “|”; the resulting regular expression matches any string matching either subexpression.
Repetition takes precedence over concatenation, which in turn takes precedence over alternation. A whole subexpression may be enclosed in parentheses to override these precedence rules.
If you compile NeoMutt with the included regular expression engine, the following operators may also be used in regular expressions as described in Table 4.3, “GNU regular expression extensions”.
Table 4.3. GNU regular expression extensions
Expression | Description |
---|---|
\y | Matches the empty string at either the beginning or the end of a word |
\B | Matches the empty string within a word |
\< | Matches the empty string at the beginning of a word |
\> | Matches the empty string at the end of a word |
\w | Matches any word-constituent character (letter, digit, or underscore) |
\W | Matches any character that is not word-constituent |
\` | Matches the empty string at the beginning of a buffer (string) |
\' | Matches the empty string at the end of a buffer |
Please note however that these operators are not defined by POSIX, so they may or may not be available in stock libraries on various systems.
Many of NeoMutt's commands allow you to specify a pattern to match
(limit
, tag-pattern
,
delete-pattern
, etc.).
Table 4.4, “Pattern modifiers” shows several ways to select
messages while Table 4.5, “Alias pattern modifiers” shows ways of selecting aliases.
Table 4.4. Pattern modifiers
Pattern modifier | Notes | Description |
---|---|---|
~A | all messages | |
~b EXPR | d) | messages which contain EXPR in the message body |
=b STRING | If IMAP is enabled, like ~b but searches for STRING on the server, rather than downloading each message and searching it locally. | |
~B EXPR | d) | messages which contain EXPR in the whole message |
=B STRING | If IMAP is enabled, like ~B but searches for STRING on the server, rather than downloading each message and searching it locally. | |
~c EXPR | messages carbon-copied to EXPR | |
%c GROUP | messages carbon-copied to any member of GROUP | |
~C EXPR | messages either to:, cc: or bcc: EXPR | |
%C GROUP | messages either to:, cc: or bcc: to any member of GROUP | |
~d [MIN]-[MAX] | messages with “date-sent” in a Date range | |
~D | deleted messages | |
~e EXPR | messages which contains EXPR in the “Sender” field | |
%e GROUP | messages which contain a member of GROUP in the “Sender” field | |
~E | expired messages | |
~F | flagged messages | |
~f EXPR | messages originating from EXPR | |
%f GROUP | messages originating from any member of GROUP | |
~g | cryptographically signed messages | |
~G | cryptographically encrypted messages | |
~h EXPR | d) | messages which contain EXPR in the message header |
=h STRING | If IMAP is enabled, like ~h but searches for STRING on the server, rather than downloading each message and searching it locally; STRING must be of the form “header: substring”(see below). | |
~H EXPR | messages with a spam attribute matching EXPR | |
~i EXPR | messages which match EXPR in the “Message-ID” field | |
~I QUERY | messages whose “Message-ID” field is included in the results returned from an external search program, when the program is run with QUERY as its argument. This is explained in greater detail in the variable reference entry Section 3.98, “external_search_command”, | |
~k | messages which contain PGP key material | |
~K EXPR | messages blind carbon-copied to EXPR | |
~L EXPR | messages either originated or received by EXPR | |
%L GROUP | message either originated or received by any member of GROUP | |
~l | messages addressed to a known mailing list | |
~m [MIN]-[MAX] | c) | messages with numbers in the range MIN to MAX |
~m <[MAX] | c) | messages with numbers less than MAX |
~m >[MIN] | c) | messages with numbers greater than MIN |
~m [M] | c) | just message number M |
~m [MIN],[MAX] | c) | messages with offsets (from selected message) in the range MIN to MAX |
~M EXPR | d) | messages which contain a mime Content-Type matching EXPR |
~n [MIN]-[MAX] | a) | messages with a score in the range MIN to MAX |
~N | new messages | |
~O | old messages | |
~p | messages addressed to you (consults $from, alternates, and local account/hostname information) | |
~P | messages from you (consults $from, alternates, and local account/hostname information) | |
~Q | messages which have been replied to | |
~r [MIN]-[MAX] | messages with “date-received” in a Date range | |
~R | read messages | |
~s EXPR | messages having EXPR in the “Subject” field. | |
~S | superseded messages | |
~t EXPR | messages addressed to EXPR | |
~T | tagged messages | |
~u | messages addressed to a subscribed mailing list | |
~U | unread messages | |
~v | messages part of a collapsed thread. | |
~V | cryptographically verified messages | |
~w EXPR | newsgroups matching EXPR | |
~x EXPR | messages which contain EXPR in the “References” or “In-Reply-To” field | |
~X [MIN]-[MAX] | a), d) | messages with MIN to MAX attachments |
~y EXPR | messages which contain EXPR in their keywords | |
~Y EXPR | messages whose tags match EXPR | |
~z [MIN]-[MAX] | a), b) | messages with a size in the range MIN to MAX |
=/ STRING | IMAP custom server-side search for STRING. Currently only defined for Gmail. See: Gmail Patterns | |
~= | duplicated messages (see $duplicate_threads) | |
~# | broken threads (see $strict_threads) | |
~$ | unreferenced messages (requires threaded view) | |
~(PATTERN) | messages in threads containing messages matching PATTERN, e.g. all threads containing messages from you: ~(~P) | |
~<(PATTERN) | messages whose immediate parent matches PATTERN, e.g. replies to your messages: ~<(~P) | |
~>(PATTERN) | messages having an immediate child matching PATTERN, e.g. messages you replied to: ~>(~P) |
Table 4.5. Alias pattern modifiers
Pattern modifier | Notes | Description |
---|---|---|
~c EXPR | aliases which contain EXPR in the alias comment | |
~f EXPR | aliases which contain EXPR in the alias name (From part of alias) | |
~t EXPR | aliases which contain EXPR in the alias address (To part of alias) |
Where EXPR is a regular expression, and GROUP is an address group.
a) The forms “<[MAX]”, “>[MIN]”, “[MIN]-” and “-[MAX]” are allowed, too.
b) The suffixes “K” and “M” are allowed to specify kilobyte and megabyte respectively.
c) The message number ranges (introduced by ~m
)
are even more general and powerful than the other types of ranges.
Read on and see Section 3.1.1, “Message Ranges” below.
d) These patterns read each message in, and can therefore be much slower. Over IMAP this will entail downloading each message. They can not be used for message scoring, and it is recommended to avoid using them for index coloring.
Special attention has to be paid when using regular expressions inside of patterns. Specifically, NeoMutt's parser for these patterns will strip one level of backslash (“\”), which is normally used for quoting. If it is your intention to use a backslash in the regular expression, you will need to use two backslashes instead (“\\”).
Example 4.2. Using \s
and matching a literal dot in patterns
# no quotes save-hook ~h\ list-id:\\\\s*<only\\\\.dot> '=archive' save-hook ~hlist-id:\\\\s*<only\\\\.dot-here> '=archive' # single quotes save-hook '~h list-id:\\s<only\\.dot>' '=archive' save-hook ~h'list-id:\\s*<only\\.dot-here>' '=archive' # Double quotes save-hook "~h list-id:\\\\s<only\\\\.dot>" '=archive' save-hook ~h"list-id:\\\\s*<only\\\\.dot>" '=archive'
You can force NeoMutt to treat
EXPR as a simple substring instead of a regular
expression by using = instead of ~ in the pattern name. For example,
=b *.*
will find all messages that contain the
literal string “*.*”. Simple string matches are less
powerful than regular expressions but can be considerably faster.
For IMAP folders, string matches =b
,
=B
, and =h
will be performed on
the server instead of by fetching every message. IMAP treats
=h
specially: it must be of the form
“header: substring” and will not partially match header
names. The substring part may be omitted if you simply wish to find
messages containing a particular header without regard to its value.
Patterns matching lists of addresses (notably c, C, p, P and t) match if there is at least one match in the whole list. If you want to make sure that all elements of that list match, you need to prefix your pattern with “^”. This example matches all mails which only has recipients from Germany.
You can restrict address pattern matching to aliases that you have defined with the "@" modifier. This example matches messages whose recipients are all from Germany, and who are known to your alias list.
To match any defined alias, use a regular expression that matches any string. This example matches messages whose senders are known aliases.
If a message number range (from now on: MNR) contains a comma
(,
), it is a relative MNR.
That means the numbers denote offsets from the
highlighted message. For example:
Table 4.6. Relative Message Number Ranges
Pattern | Explanation |
---|---|
~m -2,2
| Previous 2, highlighted and next 2 emails |
~m 0,1
| Highlighted and next email |
In addition to numbers, either side of the range can also contain
one of the special characters (shortcuts) .^$
.
The meaning is:
Table 4.7. Message Number Shortcuts
Shortcut | Explanation | Example | Meaning |
---|---|---|---|
. | Current / Highlighted | ~m -3,. | Previous 3 emails plus the highlighted one |
$ | Last | ~m .,$ | Highlighted email and all the later ones |
^ | First | ~m ^,1 | Highlighted, next and all preceding ones |
Lastly, you can also leave either side of the range blank, to make
it extend as far as possible. For example, ~m ,1
has the same meaning as the last example in
Table 4.7, “Message Number Shortcuts”.
Otherwise, if a MNR doesn't contain a comma, the meaning is similar to other ranges, except that the shortcuts are still available. Examples:
NeoMutt supports two versions of so called “simple searches”. These are issued if the query entered for searching, limiting and similar operations does not seem to contain a valid pattern modifier (i.e. it does not contain one of these characters: “~”, “=” or “%”). If the query is supposed to contain one of these special characters, they must be escaped by prepending a backslash (“\”).
The first type is by checking whether the query string equals
a keyword case-insensitively from
Table 4.9, “Simple search keywords”: If that is the case,
NeoMutt will use the shown pattern modifier instead. If a keyword
would conflict with your search keyword, you need to turn it into
a regular expression to avoid matching the keyword table. For
example, if you want to find all messages matching
“flag” (using
$simple_search) but don't want
to match flagged messages, simply search for
“[f]lag
”.
Table 4.9. Simple search keywords
Keyword | Pattern modifier |
---|---|
all | ~A |
. | ~A |
^ | ~A |
del | ~D |
flag | ~F |
new | ~N |
old | ~O |
repl | ~Q |
read | ~R |
tag | ~T |
unread | ~U |
The second type of simple search is to build a complex search pattern using $simple_search as a template. NeoMutt will insert your query properly quoted and search for the composed complex query.
Logical AND is performed by specifying more than one criterion. For example:
~t work ~f smith
would select messages which contain the word “work” in the list of recipients and that have the word “smith” in the “From” header field.
NeoMutt also recognizes the following operators to create more complex search patterns:
! – logical NOT operator
| – logical OR operator
() – logical grouping operator
Here is an example illustrating a complex search pattern. This pattern will select all messages which do not contain “work” in the “To” or “Cc” field and which are from “smith”.
Here is an example using white space in the regular expression (note the “'” and “"” delimiters). For this to match, the mail's subject must match the “^Junk +From +Me$” and it must be from either “Jim +Somebody” or “Ed +SomeoneElse”:
'~s "^Junk +From +Me$" ~f ("Jim +Somebody"|"Ed +SomeoneElse")'
If a regular expression contains parenthesis, or a vertical bar
("|"), you must enclose the expression in
double or single quotes since those characters are also used to
separate different parts of NeoMutt's pattern language. For
example: ~f "user@(home\.org|work\.com)"
Without
the quotes, the parenthesis wouldn't end. This would be separated
to two OR'd patterns: ~f user@(home\.org and
work\.com). They are never what you want.
NeoMutt supports two types of dates, absolute and relative.
Dates must be in DD/MM/YY format (month and year are optional, defaulting to the current month and year) or YYYYMMDD. An example of a valid range of dates is:
Limit to messages matching: ~d 20/1/95-31/10 Limit to messages matching: ~d 19950120-19951031
If you omit the minimum (first) date, and just specify “-DD/MM/YY” or “-YYYYMMDD”, all messages before the given date will be selected. If you omit the maximum(second) date, and specify “DD/MM/YY-”, all messages after the given date will be selected. If you specify a single date with no dash (“-”), only messages sent on the given date will be selected.
You can add error margins to absolute dates. An error margin is a sign (+ or -), followed by a digit, followed by one of the units in Table 4.10, “Date units”. As a special case, you can replace the sign by a “*” character, which is equivalent to giving identical plus and minus error margins.
Example: To select any messages two weeks around January 15, 2001, you'd use the following pattern:
Limit to messages matching: ~d 15/1/2001*2w
This type of date is relative to the current date, and may be specified as:
> offset for messages older than offset units
< offset for messages newer than offset units
= offset for messages exactly offset units old
offset is specified as a positive number with one of the units from Table 4.11, “Relative date units”.
Example: to select messages less than 1 month old, you would use
Limit to messages matching: ~d <1m
All dates used when searching are relative to the
local time zone, so unless you change the
setting of your $index_format
to include a %[...]
format, these are
not the dates shown in the main index.
=/ "search terms"
invokes server-side search,
passing along the search terms provided. Search results are
constrained by IMAP to be within the current folder. At present this
only supports Gmail's search API IMAP extension. The search language
is entirely up to the mail provider and changes at their discretion.
Using ~/
will silently fail.
For up-to-date information about searching, see: Gmail's Support Page. You will need to (once) use a web-browser to visit Settings/Labels and enable "Show in IMAP" for "All Mail". When searching, visit that folder in NeoMutt to most closely match Gmail search semantics.
Table 4.12. Gmail Example Patterns
Pattern | Matches |
---|---|
=/ "list:foo.example.org has:attachment is:important"
| the foo.example.org mailing-list per Gmail's definitions, and has an attachment, and has been marked as important |
=/ "{has:purple-star has:yellow-star} older_than:2m"
| is older than two months and has either a purple-star or a yellow-star |
There are times that it's useful to ask NeoMutt to "remember" which message you're currently looking at, while you move elsewhere in your mailbox. You can do this with the “mark-message” operator, which is bound to the “~” key by default. Press this key to enter an identifier for the marked message. When you want to return to this message, press “'” and the name that you previously entered.
(Message marking is really just a shortcut for defining a macro that returns you to the current message by searching for its Message-ID. You can choose a different prefix by setting the $mark_macro_prefix variable.)
Sometimes it is desirable to perform an operation on a group of
messages all at once rather than one at a time. An example might be to
save messages to a mailing list to a separate folder, or to delete all
messages with a given subject. To tag all messages matching a pattern,
use the <tag-pattern>
function, which is bound
to “shift-T” by default. Patterns are completable in the
editor menu. Invoke the <complete>
function
(by default bound to “Tab”) after typing “~”
to get a selectable list. Or you can select individual messages by hand
using the <tag-message>
function, which is
bound to “t” by default.
See patterns for NeoMutt's pattern
matching syntax.
Once you have tagged the desired messages, you can use the “tag-prefix” operator, which is the “;” (semicolon) key by default. When the “tag-prefix” operator is used, the next operation will be applied to all tagged messages if that operation can be used in that manner. If the $auto_tag variable is set, the next operation applies to the tagged messages automatically, without requiring the “tag-prefix”.
In macros or
push commands, you can
use the <tag-prefix-cond>
operator. If there
are no tagged messages, NeoMutt will “eat” the rest of the
macro to abort its execution. NeoMutt will stop “eating”
the macro when it encounters the <end-cond>
operator; after this operator the rest of the macro will be executed as
normal.
A hook is a concept found in many other programs which allows you to execute arbitrary commands before performing some operation. For example, you may wish to tailor your configuration based upon which mailbox you are reading, or to whom you are sending mail. In the NeoMutt world, a hook consists of a regular expression or pattern along with a configuration option/command. See:
for specific details on each type of hook available. Also see Message Composition Flow for an overview of the composition process.
If a hook changes configuration settings, these changes remain effective until the end of the current NeoMutt session. As this is generally not desired, a “default” hook needs to be added before all other hooks of that type to restore configuration defaults.
Example 4.7. Specifying a “default” hook
send-hook . 'unmy_hdr From:' send-hook ~C'^b@b\\.b$' my_hdr from: c@c.c
In Example 4.7, “Specifying a “default” hook”, by default the value of
$from and
$real_name is not overridden. When
sending messages either To: or Cc: to <b@b.b>
,
the From: header is changed to <c@c.c>
.
Hooks that act upon messages (message-hook, reply-hook, send-hook, send2-hook, save-hook, fcc-hook, index-format-hook) are evaluated in a slightly different manner. For the other types of hooks, a regular expression is sufficient. But in dealing with messages a finer grain of control is needed for matching since for different purposes you want to match different criteria.
NeoMutt allows the use of the search pattern language for matching messages in hook commands. This works in exactly the same way as it would when limiting or searching the mailbox, except that you are restricted to those operators which match information NeoMutt extracts from the header of the message (i.e., from, to, cc, date, subject, etc.).
For example, if you wanted to set your return address based upon sending mail to a specific address, you could do something like:
send-hook '~t ^user@work\\.com$' 'my_hdr From: John Smith <user@host>'
which would execute the given command when sending mail to user@work.com.
However, it is not required that you write the pattern to match using the full searching language. You can still specify a simple regular expression like the other hooks, in which case NeoMutt will translate your pattern into the full language, using the translation specified by the $default_hook variable. The pattern is translated at the time the hook is declared, so the value of $default_hook that is in effect at that time will be used.
Hooks that match against mailboxes (folder-hook, mbox-hook) apply both regular expression syntax as well as mailbox shortcut expansion on the regex parameter. There is some overlap between these, so special attention should be paid to the first character of the regex.
# Here, ^ will expand to "the current mailbox" not "beginning of string": folder-hook ^/home/user/Mail/bar "set sort=threads" # If you want ^ to be interpreted as "beginning of string", one workaround # is to enclose the regex in parenthesis: folder-hook (^/home/user/Mail/bar) "set sort=threads" # This will expand to the default save folder for the alias "imap.example.com", which # is probably not what you want: folder-hook @imap\\.example\\.com "set sort=threads" # A workaround is to use parenthesis or a backslash: folder-hook (@imap\\.example\\.com) "set sort=threads" folder-hook '\@imap\.example\.com' "set sort=threads"
Keep in mind that mailbox shortcut expansion on the regex parameter takes place when the hook is initially parsed, not when the hook is matching against a mailbox. When NeoMutt starts up and is reading the .neomuttrc, some mailbox shortcuts may not be usable. For example, the "current mailbox" shortcut, ^, will expand to an empty string because no mailbox has been opened yet. NeoMutt will issue an error for this case or if the mailbox shortcut results in an empty regex.
You can alter the environment that NeoMutt passes on to its child processes using the “setenv” and “unsetenv” commands. You can also query current environment values by adding a “?” character.
These follow NeoMutt-style syntax, not shell-style!
setenv TERM vt100 setenv ORGANIZATION "The NeoMutt Development Team" unsetenv DISPLAY setenv LESS?
Running setenv with no parameters will show a list of all the environment variables.
NeoMutt supports connecting to external directory databases such as LDAP, ph/qi, bbdb, or NIS through a wrapper script which connects to NeoMutt using a simple interface. Using the $query_command variable, you specify the wrapper command to use. For example:
set query_command = "mutt_ldap_query.pl %s"
The wrapper script should accept the query on the command-line. It should return a one line message, then each matching response on a single line, each line containing a tab separated address then name then some other optional information. On error, or if there are no matching addresses, return a non-zero exit code and a one line error message.
An example multiple response output:
Searching database ... 70 entries ... 5 matching: ji@papaya.com Jeremy Irons Emmy, Oscar, Tony jc@damson.com James Cagney Oscar mr@ilama.com Meg Ryan mjf@kumquat.com Michael J Fox ma@yew.com Murray Abraham Oscar
There are two mechanisms for accessing the query function of NeoMutt.
One is to do a query from the index menu using the
<query>
function (default: Q). This will
prompt for a query, then bring up the query menu which will list the
matching responses. From the query menu, you can select addresses to
create aliases, or to mail. You can tag multiple addresses to mail,
start a new query, or have a new query appended to the current
responses.
The other mechanism for accessing the query function is for address
completion, similar to the alias completion. In any prompt for address
entry, you can use the <complete-query>
function (default: ^T) to run a query based on the current address you
have typed. Like aliases, NeoMutt will look for what you have typed
back to the last space or comma. If there is a single response for that
query, NeoMutt will expand the address in place. If there are multiple
responses, NeoMutt will activate the query menu. At the query menu, you
can select one or more addresses to be added to the prompt.
The query menu is affected by $sort_alias, thus overruling the order of entries as generated by $query_command.
NeoMutt supports reading and writing of four different local mailbox formats: mbox, MMDF, MH and Maildir. The mailbox type is auto detected, so there is no need to use a flag for different mailbox types. When creating new mailboxes, NeoMutt uses the default specified with the $mbox_type variable. A short description of the formats follows.
mbox. This is a widely used mailbox format for UNIX. All messages are stored in a single file. Each message has a line of the form:
From me@ox.ac.uk Fri, 11 Apr 1997 11:44:56 PST
to denote the start of a new message (this is often referred to as the “From_” line). The mbox format requires mailbox locking, is prone to mailbox corruption with concurrently writing clients or misinterpreted From_ lines. Depending on the environment, new mail detection can be unreliable. Mbox folders are fast to open and easy to archive.
MMDF. This is a variant of the mbox format. Each message is surrounded by lines containing “^A^A^A^A” (four times control-A's). The same problems as for mbox apply (also with finding the right message separator as four control-A's may appear in message bodies).
MH. A radical departure from
mbox and MMDF, a mailbox
consists of a directory and each message is stored in a separate file.
The filename indicates the message number (however, this is may not
correspond to the message number NeoMutt displays). Deleted messages
are renamed with a comma (“,”) prepended to the filename.
NeoMutt detects this type of mailbox by looking for either
.mh_sequences
or .xmhcache
files
(needed to distinguish normal directories from MH mailboxes). MH is
more robust with concurrent clients writing the mailbox, but still may
suffer from lost flags; message corruption is less likely to occur than
with mbox/mmdf. It's usually slower to open compared to mbox/mmdf since
many small files have to be read (NeoMutt provides
Section 8.1, “Header Caching” to greatly speed this process up).
Depending on the environment, MH is not very disk-space efficient.
Maildir. The newest of the mailbox formats, used by the Qmail MTA (a replacement for sendmail). Similar to MH, except that it adds three subdirectories of the mailbox: tmp, new and cur. Filenames for the messages are chosen in such a way they are unique, even when two programs are writing the mailbox over NFS, which means that no file locking is needed and corruption is very unlikely. Maildir maybe slower to open without caching in NeoMutt, it too is not very disk-space efficient depending on the environment. Since no additional files are used for metadata (which is embedded in the message filenames) and Maildir is locking-free, it's easy to sync across different machines using file-level synchronization tools.
There are a number of built in shortcuts which refer to specific mailboxes. These shortcuts can be used anywhere you are prompted for a file or mailbox path or in path-related configuration variables. Note that these only work at the beginning of a string.
Table 4.13. Mailbox shortcuts
Shortcut | Refers to... |
---|---|
! | your $spool_file (incoming) mailbox |
> | your $mbox file |
< | your $record file |
^ | the current mailbox |
- or !! | the file you've last visited |
~ | your home directory |
= or + | your $folder directory |
@alias | to the default save folder as determined by the address of the alias |
For example, to store a copy of outgoing messages in the folder they were composed in, a folder-hook can be used to set $record:
folder-hook . 'set record=^'
Note: the current mailbox shortcut,
“^
”, has no value in some cases. No
mailbox is opened when NeoMutt is invoked to send an email from the
command-line. In interactive mode, NeoMutt reads the muttrc before
opening the mailbox, so immediate expansion won't work as expected
either. This can be an issue when trying to directly assign to $record, but also affects the fcc-hook mailbox, which is expanded
immediately too. The folder-hook example above works because the
command is executed later, when the folder-hook fires.
NeoMutt has a few configuration options that make dealing with large
amounts of mail easier. The first thing you must do is to let NeoMutt
know what addresses you consider to be mailing lists (technically this
does not have to be a mailing list, but that is what it is most often
used for), and what lists you are subscribed to. This is accomplished
through the use of the
lists and
subscribe commands in
your .neomuttrc
. Alternatively or additionally, you
can set $auto_subscribe to
automatically subscribe addresses found in a List-Post
header.
Now that NeoMutt knows what your mailing lists are, it can do several things, the first of which is the ability to show the name of a list through which you received a message (i.e., of a subscribed list) in the index menu display. This is useful to distinguish between personal and list mail in the same mailbox. In the $index_format variable, the expando “%L” will print the string “To <list>” when “list” appears in the “To” field, and “Cc <list>” when it appears in the “Cc” field (otherwise it prints the name of the author).
Often times the “To” and “Cc” fields in
mailing list messages tend to get quite large. Most people do not
bother to remove the author of the message they reply to from the list,
resulting in two or more copies being sent to that person. The
<list-reply>
function, which by default is
bound to “L” in the index menu and
pager, helps reduce the clutter by only replying
to the known mailing list addresses instead of all recipients (except
as specified by Mail-Followup-To
, see below).
NeoMutt also supports the Mail-Followup-To
header.
When you send a message to a list of recipients which includes one or
several known mailing lists, and if the
$followup_to option is set, NeoMutt
will generate a Mail-Followup-To header. If any of the recipients are
subscribed mailing lists, this header will contain all the recipients
to whom you send this message, but not your address. This indicates
that group-replies or list-replies (also known as
“followups”) to this message should only be sent to the
original recipients of the message, and not separately to you - you'll
receive your copy through one of the mailing lists you are subscribed
to. If none of the recipients are subscribed mailing lists, the header
will also contain your address, ensuring you receive a copy of replies.
Conversely, when group-replying or list-replying to a message which has
a Mail-Followup-To
header, NeoMutt will respect this
header if the
$honor_followup_to
configuration variable is set. Using
list-reply will in this case also
make sure that the reply goes to the mailing list, even if it's not
specified in the list of recipients in the
Mail-Followup-To
.
When header editing is enabled, you can create
a Mail-Followup-To
header manually. NeoMutt will
only auto-generate this header if it doesn't exist when you send the
message.
The other method some mailing list admins use is to generate a “Reply-To” field which points back to the mailing list address rather than the author of the message. This can create problems when trying to reply directly to the author in private, since most mail clients will automatically reply to the address given in the “Reply-To” field. NeoMutt uses the $reply_to variable to help decide which address to use. If set to ask-yes or ask-no, you will be prompted as to whether or not you would like to use the address given in the “Reply-To” field, or reply directly to the address given in the “From” field. When set to yes, the “Reply-To” field will be used when present.
You can change or delete the “X-Label:” field within NeoMutt using the “edit-label” command, bound to the “y” key by default. This works for tagged messages, too. While in the edit-label function, pressing the <complete> binding (TAB, by default) will perform completion against all labels currently in use.
Lastly, NeoMutt has the ability to sort the mailbox into threads. A thread is a group of messages which all relate to the same subject. This is usually organized into a tree-like structure where a message and all of its replies are represented graphically. If you've ever used a threaded news client, this is the same concept. It makes dealing with large volume mailing lists easier because you can easily delete uninteresting threads and quickly find topics of value.
Working within the confines of a console or terminal window, it is often useful to be able to modify certain information elements in a non-destructive way – to change how they display, without changing the stored value of the information itself. This is especially so of message subjects, which may often be polluted with extraneous metadata that either is reproduced elsewhere, or is of secondary interest.
subjectrx
regex
replacement
unsubjectrx
{
*
|
regex
}
subjectrx
specifies a regular expression
which, if detected in a message subject, causes
the subject to be replaced with the “replacement” value.
The replacement is subject to substitutions in the same way as for the
spam command: %L
for the
text to the left of the match, %R
for text to the
right of the match, and %1
for the first subgroup in
the match (etc). If you simply want to erase the match, set it to
“%L%R”. Any number of subjectrx
commands may coexist.
Note this well: the “replacement” value replaces the entire subject, not just the match!
unsubjectrx
removes a given subjectrx from the
substitution list. If *
is used as the argument, all
substitutions will be removed.
Example 4.8. Subject Munging
# Erase [rt #12345] tags from Request Tracker (RT) e-mails subjectrx '\[rt #[0-9]+\] *' '%L%R' # Servicedesk is another RT that sends more complex subjects. # Keep the ticket number. subjectrx '\[servicedesk #([0-9]+)\] ([^.]+)\.([^.]+) - (new|open|pending|update) - ' '%L[#%1] %R' # Strip out annoying [listname] prefixes in subjects subjectrx '\[[^]]*\]:? *' '%L%R'
NeoMutt supports setups with multiple folders, allowing all of them to be monitored for new mail (see Section 16, “Monitoring Incoming Mail” for details).
For Mbox and Mmdf folders, new mail is detected by comparing access
and/or modification times of files: NeoMutt assumes a folder has new
mail if it wasn't accessed after it was last modified. Utilities like
biff
or frm
or any other
program which accesses the mailbox might cause NeoMutt to never
detect new mail for that mailbox if they do not properly reset the
access time. Other possible causes of NeoMutt not detecting new mail
in these folders are backup tools (updating access times) or
filesystems mounted without access time update support (for Linux
systems, see the relatime
option).
Contrary to older NeoMutt releases, it now maintains the new mail status of a folder by properly resetting the access time if the folder contains at least one message which is neither read, nor deleted, nor marked as old.
In cases where new mail detection for Mbox or Mmdf folders appears to be unreliable, the $check_mbox_size option can be used to make NeoMutt track and consult file sizes for new mail detection instead which won't work for size-neutral changes.
New mail for Maildir is assumed if there is one message in the
new/
subdirectory which is not marked deleted (see
$maildir_trash). For MH folders,
a mailbox is considered having new mail if there's at least one
message in the “unseen” sequence as specified by
$mh_seq_unseen. Optionally,
$new_mail_command can be
configured to execute an external program every time new mail is
detected in the current inbox.
NeoMutt does not poll POP3 folders for new mail, it only periodically checks the currently opened folder (if it's a POP3 folder).
For IMAP, by default NeoMutt uses recent message counts provided by the server to detect new mail. If the $imap_idle option is set, it'll use the IMAP IDLE extension if advertised by the server.
The $mail_check_recent option changes whether NeoMutt will notify you of new mail in an already visited mailbox. When set (the default) it will only notify you of new mail received since the last time you opened the mailbox. When unset, NeoMutt will notify you of any new mail in the mailbox.
When in the index menu and being idle (also see $timeout), NeoMutt periodically checks for new mail in all folders which have been configured via the mailboxes command. The interval depends on the folder type: for local/IMAP folders it consults $mail_check and $pop_check_interval for POP folders.
Outside the index menu the directory browser supports checking for
new mail using the <check-new>
function
which is unbound by default. Pressing TAB will bring up a menu
showing the files specified by the mailboxes
command, and indicate which contain new messages. NeoMutt will
automatically enter this mode when invoked from the command line with
the -y
option, or from the index/pager via the
<browse-mailboxes>
function.
For the pager, index and directory browser menus, NeoMutt contains
the <mailbox-list>
function (bound to
“.” by default) which will print a list of folders with
new mail in the command line at the bottom of the screen.
For the index, by default NeoMutt displays the number of mailboxes with new mail in the status bar, please refer to the $status_format variable for details.
When changing folders, NeoMutt fills the prompt with the first folder
from the mailboxes list containing new mail (if any), pressing
<Space>
will cycle through folders with new
mail. The (by default unbound) function
<next-unread-mailbox>
in the index can be
used to immediately open the next folder with unread mail (if any).
When the Inotify mechanism for monitoring of files is supported (Linux only) and not disabled at compilation time, NeoMutt immediately notifies about new mail for all folders configured via the mailboxes command. Dependent on mailbox format also added old mails are tracked (not for Maildir).
No configuration variables are available. Trace output is given when
debugging is enabled via command line option
-d3
. The lower level 2 only shows errors, the
higher level 5 all including raw Inotify events.
Getting events about new mail is limited to the capabilities of the underlying mechanism. inotify only reports local changes, i. e. new mail notification works for mails delivered by an agent on the same machine as NeoMutt, but not when delivered remotely on a network file system as nfs. also the monitoring handles might fail in rare conditions, so you better don't completely rely on this feature.
When using Maildir, you don't have to manually specify all your mailboxes. You can use this command instead:
mailboxes `find ~/.mail/ -type d -name cur | sed -e 's:/cur/*$::' -e 's/ /\\ /g' | sort | tr '\n' ' '`
If $mail_check_stats is set, NeoMutt will periodically calculate the unread, flagged, and total message counts for each mailbox watched by the mailboxes command. This calculation takes place at the same time as new mail polling, but is controlled by a separate timer: $mail_check_stats_interval.
The sidebar can display these message counts. See $sidebar_format.
NeoMutt has the ability to dynamically restructure threads that are broken either by misconfigured software or bad behavior from some correspondents. This allows to clean your mailboxes from these annoyances which make it hard to follow a discussion.
Some mailers tend to “forget” to correctly set the
“In-Reply-To:” and “References:” headers
when replying to a message. This results in broken discussions
because NeoMutt has not enough information to guess the correct
threading. You can fix this by tagging a number of replies, then
moving to the parent message and using the
<link-threads>
function (bound to & by default).
The replies will then be connected to this parent message.
On mailing lists, some people are in the bad habit of starting a new
discussion by hitting “reply” to any message from the
list and changing the subject to a totally unrelated one. You can fix
such threads by using the <break-thread>
function (bound by default to #), which will turn the subthread
starting from the current message into a whole different thread.
RFC1894 defines a set of MIME content types for relaying information about the status of electronic mail messages. These can be thought of as “return receipts.”
To support DSN, there are two variables. $dsn_notify is used to request receipts for different results (such as failed message, message delivered, etc.). $dsn_return requests how much of your message should be returned with the receipt (headers or full message).
When using $sendmail for mail delivery, you need to use either Berkeley sendmail 8.8.x (or greater) a MTA supporting DSN command line options compatible to Sendmail: The -N and -R options can be used by the mail client to make requests as to what type of status messages should be returned. Please consider your MTA documentation whether DSN is supported.
For SMTP delivery using $smtp_url, it depends on the capabilities announced by the server whether NeoMutt will attempt to request DSN or not.
If a message contains URLs, it is efficient to get a menu with all the URLs and start a WWW browser on one of them. This functionality is provided by the external urlview program which can be retrieved at ftp://ftp.mutt.org/mutt/contrib/ and the configuration commands:
macro index \cb |urlview\n macro pager \cb |urlview\n
Usage:
echo
message
You can print messages to the message window using the "echo" command. This might be useful after a macro finishes executing. After printing the message, echo will pause for the number of seconds specified by $sleep_time.
echo "Sourcing muttrc file" unset confirm_append macro index ,a "<save-message>=archive<enter><enter-command>echo 'Saved to archive'<enter>"
This is a brief overview of the steps NeoMutt takes during message composition. It also shows the order and timing of hook execution.
Reply envelope settings. $reverse_name processing. To, Cc, Subject, References header defaults.
my_hdr processing for To, Cc, Bcc, Subject headers.
Prompts for To, Cc, Bcc, Subject headers. See $ask_cc, $ask_bcc, $fast_reply.
From header setting. Note: this is so send-hooks below can match ~P, but From is re-set further below in case a send-hook changes the value.
From header setting.
my_hdr processing for From, Reply-To, Message-ID and user-defined headers. The To, Cc, Bcc, Subject, and Return-Path headers are ignored at this stage.
Message body and signature generation.
$real_name part of From header setting.
$editor invocation for the message.
Cryptographic settings.
fcc-hook. Fcc setting.
Compose menu. Note: send2-hook is evaluated each time the headers are changed.
Message encryption and signing. Key selection.
Fcc saving if $fcc_before_send is set. (Note the variable documentation for caveats of Fcc'ing before sending.)
Message sending.
Fcc saving if $fcc_before_send is unset (the default). The Fcc used to be saved before sending the message. It is now by default saved afterwards, but if the saving fails, the user is prompted.
This section documents various features that fit nowhere else.
NeoMutt normalizes all e-mail addresses to the simplest form possible. If an address contains a real_name, the form Joe User <joe@example.com> is used and the pure e-mail address without angle brackets otherwise, i.e. just joe@example.com.
This normalization affects all headers NeoMutt generates including aliases.
The folder NeoMutt opens at startup is determined as follows: the
folder specified in the $MAIL
environment
variable if present. Otherwise, the value of
$MAILDIR
is taken into account. If that isn't
present either, NeoMutt takes the user's mailbox in the mailspool
as determined at compile-time (which may also reside in the home
directory). The $spool_file
setting overrides this selection. Highest priority has the
mailbox given with the -f
command line option.
Table of Contents
Quite a bit of effort has been made to make NeoMutt the premier text-mode
MIME MUA. Every effort has been made to provide the functionality that
the discerning MIME user requires, and the conformance to the standards
wherever possible. When configuring NeoMutt for MIME, there are two extra
types of configuration files which NeoMutt uses. One is the
mime.types
file, which contains the mapping of file
extensions to IANA MIME types. The other is the
mailcap
file, which specifies the external commands to
use for handling specific MIME types.
MIME is short for “Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension” and describes mechanisms to internationalize and structure mail messages. Before the introduction of MIME, messages had a single text part and were limited to us-ascii header and content. With MIME, messages can have attachments (and even attachments which itself have attachments and thus form a tree structure), nearly arbitrary characters can be used for sender names, recipients and subjects.
Besides the handling of non-ascii characters in message headers, to
NeoMutt the most important aspect of MIME are so-called MIME types.
These are constructed using a major and
minor type separated by a forward slash. These
specify details about the content that follows. Based upon these,
NeoMutt decides how to handle this part. The most popular major type
is “text
” with minor types for
plain text, HTML and various other formats. Major types also exist
for images, audio, video and of course general application data (e.g.
to separate cryptographically signed data with a signature, send
office documents, and in general arbitrary binary data). There's also
the multipart
major type which represents the root
of a subtree of MIME parts. A list of supported MIME types can be
found in Table 5.1, “Supported MIME types”.
MIME also defines a set of encoding schemes for transporting MIME
content over the network: 7bit
,
8bit
, quoted-printable
,
base64
and binary
. There're
some rules when to choose what for encoding headers and/or body (if
needed), and NeoMutt will in general make a good choice.
NeoMutt does most of MIME encoding/decoding behind the scenes to form messages conforming to MIME on the sending side. On reception, it can be flexibly configured as to how what MIME structure is displayed (and if it's displayed): these decisions are based on the content's MIME type. There are three areas/menus in dealing with MIME: the pager (while viewing a message), the attachment menu and the compose menu.
When you select a message from the index and view it in the pager,
NeoMutt decodes as much of a message as possible to a text
representation. NeoMutt internally supports a number of MIME types,
including the text/plain
type, the
message/rfc822
(mail messages) type and some
multipart
types. In addition, it recognizes
a variety of PGP MIME and S/MIME types, including PGP/MIME and
application/pgp
, and
application/pkcs7-mime
.
NeoMutt will denote attachments with a couple lines describing them. These lines are of the form:
[-- Attachment #1: Description --] [-- Type: text/plain, Encoding: 7bit, Size: 10000 --]
Where the Description is the description or filename given for the attachment, and the Encoding is one of the already mentioned content encodings.
If NeoMutt cannot deal with a MIME type, it will display a message like:
[-- image/gif is unsupported (use 'v' to view this part) --]
The default binding for <view-attachments>
is “v”, which displays the attachment menu for
a message. The attachment menu displays a list of the attachments in
a message. From the attachment menu, you can save, print, pipe,
delete, and view attachments. You can apply these operations to
a group of attachments at once, by tagging the attachments and by
using the <tag-prefix>
operator. You can
also reply to the current message from this menu, and only the
current attachment (or the attachments tagged) will be quoted in your
reply. You can view attachments as text, or view them using the
mailcap viewer definition (the mailcap mechanism is explained later
in detail).
Finally, you can apply the usual message-related functions (like
<resend-message>
,
and the
<reply>
and
<forward>
functions) to attachments of type
message/rfc822
.
See table Table 9.7, “Default Attachment Menu Bindings” for all available functions.
There are four(!) ways of viewing attachments, so the functions deserve some extra explanation.
<view-mailcap>
(default keybinding: m)
This will use the first matching mailcap entry.
If no matching mailcap entries are found, it will abort with an error message.
<view-attach>
(default keybinding: <Enter>)
NeoMutt will display internally supported MIME types (see Section 1.2, “Viewing MIME Messages in the Pager”) in the pager. This will respect
auto_view settings, to determine
whether to use a copiousoutput
mailcap entry or
just directly display the attachment.
Other MIME types will use the first matching mailcap entry.
If no matching mailcap entries are found, the attachment will be displayed in the pager as raw text.
<view-pager>
NeoMutt will use the first matching
copiousoutput
mailcap entry to display the
attachment in the pager (regardless of auto_view settings).
If no matching mailcap entries are found, the attachment will be displayed in the pager as raw text.
<view-text>
(default keybinding: T)
The attachment will always be displayed in the pager as raw text.
The compose menu is the menu you see before you send a message. It allows you to edit the recipient list, the subject, and other aspects of your message. It also contains a list of the attachments of your message, including the main body. From this menu, you can print, copy, filter, pipe, edit, compose, review, and rename an attachment or a list of tagged attachments. You can also modifying the attachment information, notably the type, encoding and description.
Attachments appear as follows by default:
- 1 [text/plain, 7bit, 1K] /tmp/neomutt-euler-8082-0 <no description> 2 [applica/x-gunzip, base64, 422K] ~/src/neomutt-0.85.tar.gz <no description>
The “-” denotes that NeoMutt will delete the file after
sending (or postponing, or canceling) the message. It can be toggled
with the <toggle-unlink>
command (default:
u). The next field is the MIME content-type, and can be changed with
the <edit-type>
command (default: ^T). The
next field is the encoding for the attachment, which allows a binary
message to be encoded for transmission on 7bit links. It can be
changed with the <edit-encoding>
command
(default: ^E). The next field is the size of the attachment, rounded
to kilobytes or megabytes. The next field is the filename, which can
be changed with the <rename-file>
command
(default: R). The final field is the description of the attachment,
and can be changed with the
<edit-description>
command (default: d). See
$attach_format for a full list
of available expandos to format this display to your needs.
To get most out of MIME, it's important that a MIME part's content type
matches the content as closely as possible so that the recipient's
client can automatically select the right viewer for the content.
However, there's no reliable way for NeoMutt to know how to detect every
possible file type. Instead, it uses a simple plain text mapping file
that specifies what file extension corresponds to what MIME type. This
file is called mime.types
.
When you add an attachment to your mail message, NeoMutt searches the
system mime.types
file at
/etc/mime.types
,
$SYSCONFDIR/mime.types
or
$PKGDATADIR/mime.types
and then your personal
mime.types
file at
$HOME/.mime.types
.
Where $HOME
is your home directory. The
$PKGDATADIR
and the $SYSCONFDIR
directories depend on where NeoMutt is installed: the former is the
default for shared data, the latter for system configuration files.
Each line starts with the full MIME type, followed by a space and space-separated list of file extensions. For example you could use:
Example 5.1. mime.types
application/postscript ps eps application/pgp pgp audio/x-aiff aif aifc aiff
A sample mime.types
file comes with the NeoMutt
distribution, and should contain most of the MIME types you are likely
to use.
If NeoMutt can not determine the MIME type by the extension of the file
you attach, it will run the command specified in
$mime_type_query_command.
If that command is not specified, NeoMutt will look at the file. If the
file is free of binary information, NeoMutt will assume that the file
is plain text, and mark it as text/plain
. If the
file contains binary information, then NeoMutt will mark it as
application/octet-stream
. You can change the MIME
type that NeoMutt assigns to an attachment by using the
<edit-type>
command from the compose menu
(default: ^T), see Table 5.1, “Supported MIME types” for
supported major types. NeoMutt recognizes all of these if the
appropriate entry is found in the mime.types
file.
Non-recognized mime types should only be used if the recipient of the
message is likely to be expecting such attachments.
Table 5.1. Supported MIME types
MIME major type | Standard | Description |
---|---|---|
application | yes | General application data |
audio | yes | Audio data |
image | yes | Image data |
message | yes | Mail messages, message status information |
model | yes | VRML and other modeling data |
multipart | yes | Container for other MIME parts |
text | yes | Text data |
video | yes | Video data |
chemical | no | Mostly molecular data |
MIME types are not arbitrary, they need to be assigned by IANA.
NeoMutt supports RFC1524 MIME Configuration, in particular the Unix specific format specified in Appendix A of RFC1524. This file format is commonly referred to as the “mailcap” format. Many MIME compliant programs utilize the mailcap format, allowing you to specify handling for all MIME types in one place for all programs. Programs known to use this format include Firefox, lynx and metamail.
In order to handle various MIME types that NeoMutt doesn't have built-in support for, it parses a series of external configuration files to find an external handler. The default search string for these files is a colon delimited list containing the following files:
$HOME/.mailcap
$PKGDATADIR/mailcap
$SYSCONFDIR/mailcap
/etc/mailcap
/usr/etc/mailcap
/usr/local/etc/mailcap
where $HOME
is your home directory. The
$PKGDATADIR
and the $SYSCONFDIR
directories depend on where NeoMutt is installed: the former is the
default for shared data, the latter for system configuration files.
The default search path can be obtained by running the following command:
neomutt -nF /dev/null -Q mailcap_path
In particular, the metamail distribution will install a mailcap file,
usually as /usr/local/etc/mailcap
, which contains
some baseline entries.
A mailcap file consists of a series of lines which are comments, blank, or definitions.
A comment line consists of a # character followed by anything you want.
A blank line is blank.
A definition line consists of a content type, a view command, and any number of optional fields. Each field of a definition line is divided by a semicolon “;” character.
The content type is specified in the MIME standard
“type/subtype” notation. For example,
text/plain
, text/html
,
image/gif
, etc. In addition, the mailcap format
includes two formats for wildcards, one using the special
“*” subtype, the other is the implicit wild, where you
only include the major type. For example, image/*
,
or video
will match all image types and video
types, respectively.
The view command is a Unix command for viewing the type specified.
There are two different types of commands supported. The default is
to send the body of the MIME message to the command on stdin. You can
change this behavior by using %s
as a parameter to
your view command. This will cause NeoMutt to save the body of the
MIME message to a temporary file, and then call the view command with
the %s
replaced by the name of the temporary file.
In both cases, NeoMutt will turn over the terminal to the view
program until the program quits, at which time NeoMutt will remove
the temporary file if it exists. This means that mailcap does
not work out of the box with programs which
detach themselves from the terminal right after starting, like
open
on Mac OS X. In order to nevertheless use
these programs with mailcap, you probably need custom shell scripts.
So, in the simplest form, you can send
a text/plain
message to the external pager more on
standard input:
text/plain; more
Or, you could send the message as a file:
text/plain; more %s
Perhaps you would like to use lynx to interactively view
a text/html
message:
text/html; lynx %s
In this case, lynx does not support viewing a file from standard
input, so you must use the %s
syntax.
Some older versions of lynx contain a bug where they will
check the mailcap file for a viewer for
text/html
. They will find the line which calls
lynx, and run it. This causes lynx to continuously spawn itself
to view the object.
On the other hand, maybe you don't want to use lynx interactively,
you just want to have it convert the text/html
to
text/plain
, then you can use:
text/html; lynx -dump %s | more
Perhaps you wish to use lynx to view text/html
files, and a pager on all other text formats, then you would use the
following:
text/html; lynx %s text/*; more
The interpretation of shell meta-characters embedded in MIME
parameters can lead to security problems in general. NeoMutt tries to
quote parameters in expansion of %s
syntaxes
properly, and avoids risky characters by substituting them, see the
$mailcap_sanitize variable.
Although NeoMutt's procedures to invoke programs with mailcap seem to be safe, there are other applications parsing mailcap, maybe taking less care of it. Therefore you should pay attention to the following rules:
Keep the %-expandos away from shell quoting. Don't quote them with single or double quotes. NeoMutt does this for you, the right way, as should any other program which interprets mailcap. Don't put them into backtick expansions. Be highly careful with eval statements, and avoid them if possible at all. Trying to fix broken behavior with quotes introduces new leaks – there is no alternative to correct quoting in the first place.
If you have to use the %-expandos' values in context where you need
quoting or backtick expansions, put that value into a shell variable
and reference the shell variable where necessary, as in the following
example (using $charset
inside the backtick
expansion is safe, since it is not itself subject to any further
expansion):
text/test-mailcap-bug; cat %s; copiousoutput; test=charset=%{charset} \ && test "`echo $charset | tr '[A-Z]' '[a-z]'`" != iso-8859-1
In addition to the required content-type and view command fields, you can add semi-colon “;” separated fields to set flags and other options. NeoMutt recognizes the following optional fields:
This flag tells NeoMutt that the command passes possibly
large amounts of text on standard output. This causes NeoMutt
to invoke a pager (either the internal pager or the external
pager defined by the pager variable) on the output of the
view command. Without this flag, NeoMutt assumes that the
command is interactive. One could use this to replace the
pipe to more
in the
lynx -dump
example in the Basic section:
text/html; lynx -dump %s ; copiousoutput
This will cause lynx to format the
text/html
output as
text/plain
and NeoMutt will use your
standard pager to display the results.
NeoMutt will set the COLUMNS
environment
variable to the width of the pager. Some programs make use of
this environment variable automatically. Others provide
a command line argument that can use this to set the output
width:
text/html; lynx -dump -width ${COLUMNS:-80} %s; copiousoutput
Note that when using the built-in pager, only entries with this flag will be considered a handler for a MIME type – all other entries will be ignored.
NeoMutt uses this flag when viewing attachments with auto_view, in order to decide whether it should honor the setting of the $wait_key variable or not. When an attachment is viewed using an interactive program, and the corresponding mailcap entry has a needsterminal flag, NeoMutt will use $wait_key and the exit status of the program to decide if it will ask you to press a key after the external program has exited. In all other situations it will not prompt you for a key.
This flag specifies the command to use to create a new attachment of a specific MIME type. NeoMutt supports this from the compose menu.
This flag specifies the command to use to create a new attachment of a specific MIME type. This command differs from the compose command in that NeoMutt will expect standard MIME headers on the data. This can be used to specify parameters, filename, description, etc. for a new attachment. NeoMutt supports this from the compose menu.
This flag specifies the command to use to print a specific MIME type. NeoMutt supports this from the attachment and compose menus.
This flag specifies the command to use to edit a specific MIME type. NeoMutt supports this from the compose menu, and also uses it to compose new attachments. NeoMutt will default to the defined $editor for text attachments.
This field specifies the format for the file denoted by
%s
in the command fields. Certain programs
will require a certain file extension, for instance, to
correctly view a file. For instance, lynx will only interpret
a file as text/html
if the file ends in
.html
. So, you would specify lynx as
a text/html
viewer with a line in the
mailcap file like:
text/html; lynx %s; nametemplate=%s.html
This field specifies a command to run to test whether this mailcap entry should be used. The command is defined with the command expansion rules defined in the next section. If the command returns 0, then the test passed, and NeoMutt uses this entry. If the command returns non-zero, then the test failed, and NeoMutt continues searching for the right entry. Note that the content-type must match before NeoMutt performs the test. For example:
text/html; firefox -remote 'openURL(%s)' ; test=RunningX text/html; lynx %s
In this example, NeoMutt will run the program
RunningX
which will return 0 if the
X Window manager is running, and non-zero if it isn't. If
RunningX
returns 0, then NeoMutt will run
firefox to display the text/html
object.
If RunningX doesn't return 0, then NeoMutt will go on to the
next entry and use lynx to display the
text/html
object.
x-neomutt-keep
tells NeoMutt to
not delete the temporary file after the
program has been run.
Using it allows you to control the lifespan of the temporary file. Without this option, the file will be deleted after $timeout seconds.
text/html; firefox %s & x-neomutt-keep
x-neomutt-nowrap
tells the NeoMutt pager
to ignore the $wrap parameter and
to assume the output from the mailcap command to already be
correctly wrapped.
text/html; /usr/local/bin/w3m -s -T text/html -o display_link_number=1 %s; nametemplate=%s.html; copiousoutput; x-neomutt-nowrap;
When searching for an entry in the mailcap file, NeoMutt will
search for the most useful entry for its purpose. For instance, if
you are attempting to print an image/gif
, and
you have the following entries in your mailcap file, NeoMutt will
search for an entry with the print command:
image/*; xv %s image/gif; ; print=anytopnm %s | pnmtops | lpr; \ nametemplate=%s.gif
NeoMutt will skip the image/*
entry and use the
image/gif
entry with the print command.
In addition, you can use this with
auto_view to
denote two commands for viewing an attachment, one to be viewed
automatically, the other to be viewed interactively from the
attachment menu using the <view-mailcap>
function (bound to “m” by default). In addition, you
can then use the test feature to determine which viewer to use
interactively depending on your environment.
text/html; firefox -remote 'openURL(%s)' ; test=RunningX text/html; lynx %s; nametemplate=%s.html text/html; lynx -dump %s; nametemplate=%s.html; copiousoutput
For auto_view,
NeoMutt will choose the third entry because of the
copiousoutput
tag. For interactive viewing,
NeoMutt will run the program RunningX
to
determine if it should use the first entry. If the program returns
non-zero, NeoMutt will use the second entry for interactive
viewing. The last entry is for inline display in the pager and the
<view-attach>
function in the attachment
menu.
Entries with the copiousoutput
tag should always
be specified as the last one per type. For non-interactive use, the
last entry will then actually be the first matching one with the
tag set. For non-interactive use, only
copiousoutput
-tagged entries are considered. For
interactive use, NeoMutt ignores this tag and treats all entries
equally. Therefore, if not specified last, all following entries
without this tag would never be considered for
<view-attach>
because the
copiousoutput
before them matched already.
The various commands defined in the mailcap files are passed to the
/bin/sh
shell using the
system(3)
function. Before the command is passed
to /bin/sh -c
, it is parsed to expand various
special parameters with information from NeoMutt. The keywords
NeoMutt expands are:
As seen in the basic mailcap section, this variable is expanded to a filename specified by the calling program. This file contains the body of the message to view/print/edit or where the composing program should place the results of composition. In addition, the use of this keyword causes NeoMutt to not pass the body of the message to the view/print/edit program on stdin.
NeoMutt will expand %t
to the text
representation of the content type of the message in the same
form as the first parameter of the mailcap definition line,
i.e. text/html
or
image/gif
.
NeoMutt will expand this to the value of the specified parameter from the Content-Type: line of the mail message. For instance, if your mail message contains:
Content-Type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
then NeoMutt will expand %{charset}
to
“iso-8859-1”. The default metamail mailcap file
uses this feature to test the charset to spawn an xterm using
the right charset to view the message.
This will be replaced by a literal %
.
NeoMutt does not currently support the %F
and
%n
keywords specified in RFC1524. The main
purpose of these parameters is for multipart messages, which is
handled internally by NeoMutt.
This mailcap file is fairly simple and standard:
# I'm always running X :) video/*; xanim %s > /dev/null image/*; xv %s > /dev/null # I'm always running firefox (if my computer had more memory, maybe) text/html; firefox -remote 'openURL(%s)'
These mailcap files shows how to control the lifespan of the temporary file.
# The `display` program shows an image and doesn't return until the user quits. # Display an image, but wait for the user to quit the display program. # When the user quits control will return to NeoMutt. image/png; display %s; # Display an image and return to NeoMutt immediately. image/png; display %s &; # The file will be automatically deleted after $timeout seconds.
# Some graphical programs return immediately if they're already running. # We'll add an ampersand (&), just in case they're not. # View the contents of a 'tar' file. # The file will be automatically deleted after $timeout seconds. application/x-tar; file-roller %s &; # View the contents of a 'tar' file. # The file will not be deleted. application/x-tar; file-roller %s &; x-neomutt-keep
# Some programs watch any files they have open. # If NeoMutt deleted the file, the program would close prematurely. # Use a custom script to manage the file's lifespan. application/pdf; my-pdf-script.sh %s; x-neomutt-keep
This mailcap file shows quite a number of examples:
# Use xanim to view all videos Xanim produces a header on startup, # send that to /dev/null so I don't see it video/*; xanim %s > /dev/null # Send html to a running firefox by remote text/html; firefox -remote 'openURL(%s)'; test=RunningFirefox # If I'm not running firefox but I am running X, start firefox on the # object text/html; firefox %s; test=RunningX # Else use lynx to view it as text text/html; lynx %s # This version would convert the text/html to text/plain text/html; lynx -dump %s; copiousoutput # I use enscript to print text in two columns to a page text/*; more %s; print=enscript -2Gr %s # Firefox adds a flag to tell itself to view jpegs internally image/jpeg; xv %s; x-mozilla-flags=internal # Use xv to view images if I'm running X # In addition, this uses the \ to extend the line and set my editor # for images image/*; xv %s; test=RunningX; edit=xpaint %s # Convert images to text using the netpbm tools image/*; (anytopnm %s | pnmscale -xysize 80 46 | ppmtopgm | pgmtopbm | \ pbmtoascii -1x2) 2>&1 ; copiousoutput # Send excel spreadsheets to my NT box application/ms-excel; open.pl %s
Usage:
auto_view
mime-type
[
/mime-subtype
] [
mime-type
[
/mime-subtype
]
...]unauto_view
{ * | [
mime-type
[
/mime-subtype
]
...]}
In addition to explicitly telling NeoMutt to view an attachment with the MIME viewer defined in the mailcap file from the attachments menu, NeoMutt has support for automatically viewing MIME attachments while in the pager.
For this to work, you must define a viewer in the mailcap file which
uses the copiousoutput
option to denote that it is
non-interactive. Usually, you also use the entry to convert the
attachment to a text representation which you can view in the pager.
You then use the auto_view configuration command to list the content-types that you wish to view automatically. For instance, if you set it to:
auto_view text/html application/x-gunzip \ application/postscript image/gif application/x-tar-gz
...NeoMutt would try to find corresponding entries for rendering attachments of these types as text. A corresponding mailcap could look like:
text/html; lynx -dump %s; copiousoutput; nametemplate=%s.html image/*; anytopnm %s | pnmscale -xsize 80 -ysize 50 | ppmtopgm | \ pgmtopbm | pbmtoascii ; copiousoutput application/x-gunzip; gzcat; copiousoutput application/x-tar-gz; gunzip -c %s | tar -tf - ; copiousoutput application/postscript; ps2ascii %s; copiousoutput
unauto_view can be used to remove previous entries from the auto_view list. This can be used with message-hook to autoview messages based on size, etc. “unauto_view *” will remove all previous entries.
A multipart/alternative
email has several
parts that represent the same content in different formats, such as
text/plain
and text/html
. This
kind of email is heavily used by many modern mail user agents to send
HTML messages which contain an alternative plain text representation.
You can read and write multipart/alternative
emails
in NeoMutt.
NeoMutt has some heuristics for determining which attachment of
a multipart/alternative
type to display:
First, NeoMutt will check the alternative_order list to determine if one of the available types is preferred. It consists of a number of MIME types in order, including support for implicit and explicit wildcards. For example:
alternative_order text/enriched text/plain text application/postscript image/*
Next, NeoMutt will check if any of the types have a defined auto_view, and use that.
Failing that, NeoMutt will look for any text type.
As a last attempt, NeoMutt will look for any type it knows how to handle.
To remove a MIME type from the alternative_order list, use the unalternative_order command.
Noemutt includes some primitive ability to compose multipart/alternative emails:
In the Compose menu, attach the two (or more) alternatives as
usual. For example, attach "invitation.html" and then "invitation.txt".
(You can reorder them using the <move-up>
(-)
and <move-down>
(+) bindings, and edit the
descriptions).
Tag the attachments that are alternatives, and press the
<group-alternatives>
(&) binding to group
them together. After this, the separate parts will be displayed in a tree
structure. Attachments can still be edited separately and reordered within
the group, but must be ungrouped using the <ungroup-attachment>
(#) binding for more advanced editing before tagging and grouping together again
as described above.
Send the email as usual.
If all the attachments have been grouped and form a single
multipart/alternative
, part then this message will be sent
as a multipart/alternative
email, otherwise it will be sent
as a multipart/mixed
email.
Be aware that when sending a multipart/alternative
email,
you have to manually prepare the alternative parts and attach them. However,
you can use Neomutt's macro to perform all the operations needed, such that
you can compose a plain text email as usual and turn that into a
multipart/alternative
email in one single command, with
one part being text/plain
and the other
text/html
. An example macro which adds an HTML
part to the main body of an email and sends it could be the following:
macro compose Y "<first-entry><enter-command>set wait_key=no<enter>\ <pipe-entry>pandoc -o /tmp/neomutt-alternative.html<enter>\ <attach-file>/tmp/neomutt-alternative.html<enter>\ <toggle-unlink><toggle-disposition>\ <tag-entry><first-entry><tag-entry><group-alternatives>\ <enter-command>set wait_key=yes<enter><send-message>" \ "send the message as 'multipart/alternative'"
Neomutt includes supports for reading and writing multipart/multilingual
emails. A multipart/multilingual
email is like a
multipart/alternative
email, except that it comes with parts of
different versions of languages instead of appearances. Its format is described by
RFC8255.
Neomutt uses the $preferred_languages
variable to determine which
languages to display when displaying a multipart/multilingual
email.
You can have several preferred languages, separated by ,
set preferred_languages="fr,en,de"
Neomutt will try to match these strings again the multilingual header in the received
emails "by prefix", e.g., en
will match both en
and en_US
.
If $preferred_languages
is not set, it default to None, and the
first part of the received multipart/multilingual
email will be
displayed.
The procedures of composing a multipart/multilingual
email is similar
to those in Composing Multipart/Alternative.
You have to prepare every part manually or using some scripts, and then tag and group them
together into a multipart/multilingual
bundle before sending it:
Prepare parts of the multilingual emails.
Attach them as attachments.
Tag them with <tag-entry>
Edit the Content-Language
header of every attachment with command
<edit-language>
(default to Ctrl-L
). This
is important, otherwise the recipient of this email will not know the corresponding
languages. You can set arbitrary string as Content-Language
, but it
is recommended to set it as some common prefixes such as "en", "zh" and "fr".
Group all the tag messages together by <group-multilingual>
(default to ^
).
Send the email as usual.
As in Composing Multipart/Alternative, you can also use Neomutt's macro and some external scripts to combine this procedure into one.
After grouping the separate parts will be displayed in a tree
structure. Attachments can still be edited separately and reordered within
the group, but must be ungrouped using the <ungroup-attachment>
(#) binding for more advanced editing before tagging and grouping together again
as described above.
Neomutt doesn't include any special support for reading multipart/related
emails, but it is possible to write a multipart/related
email.
A multipart/related
attachment is intended for compound objects
consisting of several inter-related body parts which are linked together using the
Content-ID
header. Its format is described by
RFC2387.
The procedure for composing a multipart/related
email is similar
to that in Composing Multipart/Alternative.
You have to prepare every part manually or using some scripts, and then tag and group them
together into a multipart/related
bundle before sending it:
Prepare parts of the related email.
Attach them as attachments.
Tag them with <tag-entry>
One part can reference another using its Content-ID
header.
For example, an HTML part that includes an embedded image needs to contain:
<img src="cid:content-id">
where an
attached image has a Content-ID
header of content-id
.
The Content-ID
of an attachment can be set using
<edit-content-id>
(default key Alt-i
).
<edit-content-id>
sets a random ID which can then be
changed if desired. Permitted characters for Content-ID
are:
-.0-9@A-Z_a-z
.
If the multipart/related
group is intended to be inline,
members of the group should also have their Content-Disposition
header set to inline
which can be toggled using
<toggle-disposition>
(default key Ctrl-D
).
It can also be desirable to give referenced files in the group a
filename
even when the Content-Disposition
is
set to be inline
. To do this use <rename-attachment>
(default key Ctrl-O
).
Group all the tagged messages together with <group-related>
(default key %
).
Top level attachments (excluding multipart
ones) in the group
are automatically given a random Content-ID
if they do not
already have one.
Send the email as usual.
Some care needs to be taken with the construction of a multipart/related
email to ensure it is correctly displayed by the receiving mail client.
A typical email with a multipart/alternative
part
containing a text/plain
part and a text/html
part with an embedded image, along with a separate attachment might end up like this:
I 1 <no description> [multipart/related, 7bit, 0K] I 2 ├─><no description> [multipart/alternative, 7bit, 0K] - I 3 │ ├─>/tmp/neomutt-hostname-XXXX-XXXXXX-XXXXXXXXXX [text/plain, 7bit, us-ascii, 0.1K] - I 4 │ └─>/tmp/neomutt-alternative.html [text/html, 8bit, utf-8, 0.6K] I 5 └─>image.png [image/png, base64, 19K] A 6 attachment.pdf [application/pdf, quoted, 7.1K]
In the above email /tmp/neomutt-alternative.html
would reference
image.png
using <img src="cid:content-id">
and image.png
has been given an explicit name of
image.png
using <rename-attachment>
(regardless of its initial filename). <group-related>
has set its Content-ID
header to a random value.
If you ever lose track of attachments in your mailboxes, NeoMutt's attachment-counting and -searching support might be for you. You can make your message index display the number of qualifying attachments in each message, or search for messages by attachment count. You also can configure what kinds of attachments qualify for this feature with the attachments and unattachments commands.
In order to provide this information, NeoMutt needs to fully MIME-parse all messages affected first. This can slow down operation especially for remote mail folders such as IMAP because all messages have to be downloaded first regardless whether the user really wants to view them or not though using Section 8.2, “Body Caching” usually means to download the message just once.
By default, NeoMutt will not search inside
multipart/alternative
containers. This can be changed
via the $count_alternatives
configuration variable.
The syntax is:
attachments
{ + | - }
disposition
mime-type
[
mime-type
...]unattachments
{ + | - }
disposition
mime-type
[
mime-type
...]attachments
?
unattachments
*
disposition is the attachment's
Content-Disposition type – either inline
or
attachment
. You can abbreviate this to
I
or A
.
Disposition is prefixed by either a “+” symbol or a “-” symbol. If it's a “+”, you're saying that you want to allow this disposition and MIME type to qualify. If it's a “-”, you're saying that this disposition and MIME type is an exception to previous “+” rules. There are examples below of how this is useful.
mime-type is the MIME type of the attachment you
want the command to affect. A MIME type is always of the format
major/minor
, where major
describes the broad category of document you're looking at, and
minor
describes the specific type within that
category. The major part of mime-type must be literal text (or the
special token “*
”), but the minor
part may be a regular expression. (Therefore,
“*/.*
” matches any MIME type.)
The MIME types you give to the attachments directive are a kind of pattern. When you use the attachments directive, the patterns you specify are added to a list. When you use unattachments, the pattern is removed from the list. The patterns are not expanded and matched to specific MIME types at this time – they're just text in a list. They're only matched when actually evaluating a message.
Note that the first MIME part is treated slightly differently: It is
almost always the message text. Thus, it is not counted as an
attachment if its disposition is inline
and it is
not a multipart/*
or message/*
MIME-type.
Some examples might help to illustrate. The examples that are not commented out define the default configuration of the lists.
Example 5.2. Attachment counting
# Removing a pattern from a list removes that pattern literally. It # does not remove any type matching the pattern. # # attachments +A */.* # attachments +A image/jpeg # unattachments +A */.* # # This leaves "attached" image/jpeg files on the allowed attachments # list. It does not remove all items, as you might expect, because the # second */.* is not a matching expression at this time. # # Remember: "unattachments" only undoes what "attachments" has done! # It does not trigger any matching on actual messages. # # Qualify any MIME part with an "attachment" disposition, EXCEPT for # text/vcard, text/x-vcard, application/pgp.*, application/pkcs7-.* and # application/x-pkcs7-.* parts. (PGP and S/MIME parts are already known # to NeoMutt, and can be searched for with ~g, ~G, and ~k.) # # I've added pkcs7/x-pkcs7 to this, since it functions (for S/MIME) # analogously to PGP signature attachments. S/MIME isn't supported # in a stock NeoMutt build, but we can still treat it specially here. # attachments +A */.* attachments -A text/vcard text/x-vcard attachments -A application/pgp.* attachments -A application/pkcs7-.* application/x-pkcs7-.* # Discount all MIME parts with an "inline" disposition, unless they're # text/plain. (Why inline a text/plain part unless it's external to the # message flow?) attachments +I text/plain # These two lines make NeoMutt qualify MIME containers. (So, for example, # a message/rfc822 forward will count as an attachment.) The first # line is unnecessary if you already have "attach-allow */.*", of # course. These are off by default! The MIME elements contained # within a message/* or multipart/* are still examined, even if the # containers themselves don't qualify. # Recursion into multipart/alternatives containers is controlled by the # $count_alternatives setting. #attachments +A message/.* multipart/.* #attachments +I message/.* multipart/.* ## You probably don't really care to know about deleted attachments. attachments -A message/external-body attachments -I message/external-body
Entering the command “attachments ?” as a command will list your current settings in neomuttrc format, so that it can be pasted elsewhere.
Entering the command “unattachments *” as a command will Clear all attachment settings.
Usage:
mime_lookup
mime-type
[
/mime-subtype
] [
mime-type
[
/mime-subtype
]
...]unmime_lookup
{ * | [
mime-type
[
/mime-subtype
]
...]}
NeoMutt's mime_lookup list specifies a list of MIME
types that should not be treated according to
their mailcap entry. This option is designed to deal with binary types
such as application/octet-stream
. When an
attachment's MIME type is listed in mime_lookup,
then the extension of the filename will be compared to the list of
extensions in the mime.types
file. The MIME type
associated with this extension will then be used to process the
attachment according to the rules in the mailcap file and according to
any other configuration options (such as auto_view)
specified. Common usage would be:
mime_lookup application/octet-stream application/X-Lotus-Manuscript
In addition, the unmime_lookup
command may be used
to disable this feature for any particular MIME type if it had been
set, for example, in a global .neomuttrc
.
Table of Contents
NeoMutt supports several of optional features which can be enabled or disabled at compile-time by giving the configure script certain arguments. These are listed in the “Optional features” section of the configure --help output.
Which features are enabled or disabled can later be determined from
the output of neomutt -v
. If a compile option
starts with “+” it is enabled and disabled if prefixed
with “-”. For example, if NeoMutt was compiled using
GnuTLS for encrypted communication instead of OpenSSL,
neomutt -v
would contain:
-openssl +gnutls
NeoMutt optionally supports the IMAP, POP3 and SMTP protocols which
require to access servers using URLs. The canonical syntax for
specifying URLs in NeoMutt is (an item enclosed in
[]
means it is optional and may be omitted):
proto[s]://[username[:password]@]server[:port][/path]
proto is the communication protocol:
imap
for IMAP, pop
for POP3 and
smtp
for SMTP. If “s” for
“secure communication” is appended, NeoMutt will attempt
to establish an encrypted communication using SSL or TLS.
Since all protocols supported by NeoMutt support/require
authentication, login credentials may be specified in the URL. This
has the advantage that multiple IMAP, POP3 or SMTP servers may be
specified (which isn't possible using, for example,
$imap_user). The username may contain
the “@” symbol being used by many mail systems as part
of the login name. The special characters “/”
(%2F
), “:” (%3A
)
and “%” (%25
) have to be URL-encoded
in usernames using the %
-notation.
A password can be given, too but is not recommended if the URL is specified in a configuration file on disk.
If no port number is given, NeoMutt will use the system's default for
the given protocol (usually consulting
/etc/services
).
The optional path is only relevant for IMAP and ignored elsewhere.
If NeoMutt is compiled with IMAP, POP3 and/or SMTP support, it can also be compiled with support for SSL or TLS using either OpenSSL or GnuTLS (by running the configure script with the --ssl=... option for OpenSSL or --gnutls=... for GnuTLS). NeoMutt can then attempt to encrypt communication with remote servers if these protocols are suffixed with “s” for “secure communication”.
When non-secure URL protocols imap://
,
pop://
, and smtp://
are
used, the initial connection to the server will be unencrypted.
STARTTLS
can be used to negotiate an encrypted
connection after the initial unencrypted connection and exchange.
Two configuration variables control NeoMutt's behavior with
STARTTLS
. $ssl_starttls will initiate
STARTTLS
if the server advertises support for
it. $ssl_force_tls will
always try to initiate it, whether the server advertises support
or not.
NeoMutt highly recommends setting $ssl_force_tls unless you need to
connect to an unencrypted server. It's possible for an attacker
to spoof interactions during the initial connection and hide
support for STARTTLS
. The only way to prevent
these attacks is by forcing STARTTLS
with the
$ssl_force_tls configuration
variable.
When connecting through a $tunnel and $tunnel_is_secure is set(the default), NeoMutt will assume the connection to the server through the pipe is already secured. NeoMutt will ignore $ssl_starttls and $ssl_force_tls, behaving as if TLS has already been negotiated.
When $tunnel_is_secure is
unset, NeoMutt will respect the values of $ssl_starttls and $ssl_force_tls. It is
highly recommended to set $ssl_force_tls in this case, to
force STARTTLS
negotiation. Note that doing so
will prevent connection to an IMAP server configured for
preauthentication(PREAUTH
). If you use this
configuration, it is recommended to use a secure tunnel.
NeoMutt has POP3 support and has the ability to work with mailboxes located on a remote POP3 server and fetch mail for local browsing.
Remote POP3 servers can be accessed using URLs with the
pop
protocol for unencrypted and
pops
for encrypted communication, see
Section 1.2, “URL Syntax” for details.
Polling for new mail is more expensive over POP3 than locally. For this reason the frequency at which NeoMutt will check for mail remotely can be controlled by the $pop_check_interval variable, which defaults to every 60 seconds.
POP is read-only which doesn't allow for some features like editing messages or changing flags. However, using Section 8.1, “Header Caching” and Section 8.2, “Body Caching” NeoMutt simulates the new/old/read flags as well as flagged and replied. NeoMutt applies some logic on top of remote messages but cannot change them so that modifications of flags are lost when messages are downloaded from the POP server (either by NeoMutt or other tools).
Another way to access your POP3 mail is the
<fetch-mail>
function (default: G). It allows
to connect to $pop_host, fetch all your
new mail and place it in the local
$spool_file. After this point, NeoMutt
runs exactly as if the mail had always been local.
If you only need to fetch all messages to a local mailbox you should
consider using a specialized program, such as
fetchmail(1)
, getmail(1)
or
similar.
NeoMutt has IMAP support and has the ability to work with folders located on a remote IMAP server.
You can access the remote inbox by selecting the folder by its URL (see
Section 1.2, “URL Syntax” for details) using the
imap
or imaps
protocol.
Alternatively, a pine-compatible notation is also supported, i.e.
{[username@]imapserver[:port][/ssl]}path/to/folder
Note that not all servers use “/” as the hierarchy separator. NeoMutt should correctly notice which separator is being used by the server and convert paths accordingly.
The IMAP protocol has a subscription feature where the server manages a list of of subscribed folders. To add or remove a folder to the list of subscribed folders use the commands:
subscribe-to
imap-folder-uri
unsubscribe-from
imap-folder-uri
imap-folder-uri must be an IMAP URI, from which the server and the folder is derived, e.g.
subscribe-to imaps://mail.example.org/inbox
Instead of the above commands you can also use the
<subscribe>
and
<unsubscribe>
functions of the browser
(default keys s
and u
) to
subscribe to or unsubscribe from a folder while browsing the folders on
the IMAP server. The browser can be instructed to only display the
folders you are subscribed to with the
<toggle-subscribed>
functions. See also the
$imap_list_subscribed
variable.
Because the list of subscribed folders is managed by the IMAP server, NeoMutt can also ask the server for that list. If $imap_check_subscribed is set, NeoMutt will do that and add those folders to its mailboxes list just as if you had used the mailboxes command on each of them, so that these folders get checked periodically for new mail.
Polling for new mail on an IMAP server can cause noticeable delays. So, you'll want to carefully tune the $mail_check and $timeout variables. Reasonable values are:
set mail_check=90 set timeout=15
with relatively good results even over slow modem lines.
Note that if you are using mbox as the mail store on UW servers prior to v12.250, the server has been reported to disconnect a client if another client selects the same folder.
As of version 1.2, NeoMutt supports browsing mailboxes on an IMAP server. This is mostly the same as the local file browser, with the following differences:
In lieu of file permissions, NeoMutt displays the string “IMAP”, possibly followed by the symbol “+”, indicating that the entry contains both messages and subfolders. On Cyrus-like servers folders will often contain both messages and subfolders. A mailbox name with a trailing delimiter (usually “/” or “.”) indicates subfolders.
For the case where an entry can contain both messages and
subfolders, the selection key (bound to enter
by default) will choose to descend into the subfolder view. If
you wish to view the messages in that folder, you must use
view-file
instead (bound to
space
by default).
You can create, delete and rename mailboxes with the
<create-mailbox>
,
<delete-mailbox>
, and
<rename-mailbox>
commands (default
bindings: C
, d
and
r
, respectively). You may also
<subscribe>
and
<unsubscribe>
to mailboxes (normally
these are bound to s
and u
,
respectively).
NeoMutt supports four authentication methods with IMAP servers: SASL, GSSAPI, CRAM-MD5, and LOGIN. There is also support for the pseudo-protocol ANONYMOUS, which allows you to log in to a public IMAP server without having an account. To use ANONYMOUS, simply make your username blank or “anonymous”.
SASL is a special super-authenticator, which selects among several protocols (including GSSAPI, CRAM-MD5, ANONYMOUS, and DIGEST-MD5) the most secure method available on your host and the server. Using some of these methods (including DIGEST-MD5 and possibly GSSAPI), your entire session will be encrypted and invisible to those teeming network snoops. It is the best option if you have it. To use it, you must have the Cyrus SASL library installed on your system and compile NeoMutt with the --with-sasl flag.
NeoMutt will try whichever methods are compiled in and available on the server, in the following order: SASL, ANONYMOUS, GSSAPI, CRAM-MD5, LOGIN.
There are a few variables which control authentication:
$imap_user – controls the
username under which you request authentication on the IMAP
server, for all authenticators. This is overridden by an explicit
username in the mailbox path (i.e. by using a mailbox name of the
form {user@host}
).
$imap_pass – a password which you may preset, used by all authentication methods where a password is needed.
$imap_authenticators – a colon-delimited list of IMAP authentication methods to try, in the order you wish to try them. If specified, this overrides NeoMutt's default (attempt everything, in the order listed above).
Besides supporting traditional mail delivery through a sendmail-compatible program, NeoMutt supports delivery through SMTP.
If the configuration variable $smtp_url is set, NeoMutt will contact the given SMTP server to deliver messages; if it is unset, NeoMutt will use the program specified by $sendmail.
For details on the URL syntax, please see Section 1.2, “URL Syntax”.
The built-in SMTP support supports encryption (the
smtps
protocol using SSL or TLS) as well as SMTP
authentication using SASL. The authentication mechanisms for SASL are
specified in
$smtp_authenticators
defaulting to an empty list which makes NeoMutt try all available
methods from most-secure to least-secure.
Preliminary OAUTH support for IMAP, POP, and SMTP is provided via external scripts.
At least for Gmail, you can use the oauth2.py
script
from Google's gmail-oauth2-tools:
https://github.com/google/gmail-oauth2-tools/blob/master/python/oauth2.py
You'll need to get your own oauth client credentials for Gmail here: https://console.developers.google.com/apis/credentials
Then, you'd use oauth2.py
with
--generate_oauth2_token
to get a refresh token, and
configure NeoMutt with:
set imap_authenticators="oauthbearer" set imap_oauth_refresh_command="/path/to/oauth2.py --quiet --user=[email_address]\ --client_id=[client_id] --client_secret=[client_secret]\ --refresh_token=[refresh_token]"
For Office365, you can use the mutt_oauth2.py
script
written by Alexander Perlis:
https://github.com/neomutt/neomutt/blob/main/contrib/oauth2/mutt_oauth2.py
You'll need to get your own oauth client credentials by following the script instructions: https://github.com/neomutt/neomutt/blob/main/contrib/oauth2/mutt_oauth2.py.README
set imap_authenticators="xoauth2" set imap_oauth_refresh_command="/path/to/mutt_oauth2.py /path/to/token"
Substitute pop or smtp for imap in the above examples to configure for those. Please note that xoauth2 support has not yet been implemented for pop.
Usage:
account-hook
regex
command
If you happen to have accounts on multiple IMAP, POP and/or SMTP servers, you may find managing all the authentication settings inconvenient and error-prone. The account-hook command may help. This hook works like folder-hook but is invoked whenever NeoMutt needs to access a remote mailbox (including inside the folder browser), not just when you open the mailbox. This includes (for example) polling for new mail, storing Fcc messages and saving messages to a folder. As a consequence, account-hook should only be used to set connection-related settings such as passwords or tunnel commands but not settings such as sender address or name (because in general it should be considered unpredictable which account-hook was last used).
Some examples:
account-hook . 'unset imap_user; unset imap_pass; unset tunnel' account-hook imap://host1/ 'set imap_user=me1 imap_pass=foo' account-hook imap://host2/ 'set tunnel="ssh host2 /usr/local/libexec/imapd"' account-hook smtp://user@host3/ 'set tunnel="ssh host3 /usr/local/libexec/smtpd"'
To manage multiple accounts with, for example, different values of $record or sender addresses, folder-hook has to be be used together with the mailboxes command.
Example 6.2. Managing multiple accounts
mailboxes imap://user@host1/INBOX folder-hook imap://user@host1/ 'set folder=imap://host1/ ; set record=+INBOX/Sent' mailboxes imap://user@host2/INBOX folder-hook imap://user@host2/ 'set folder=imap://host2/ ; set record=+INBOX/Sent'
In example Example 6.2, “Managing multiple accounts” the folders are defined using mailboxes so NeoMutt polls them for new mail. Each folder-hook triggers when one mailbox below each IMAP account is opened and sets $folder to the account's root folder. Next, it sets $record to the INBOX/Sent folder below the newly set $folder. Please notice that the value the “+” mailbox shortcut refers to depends on the current value of $folder and therefore has to be set separately per account. Setting other values like $from or $signature is analogous to setting $record.
NeoMutt contains two types of local caching: (1) the so-called “header caching” and (2) the so-called “body caching” which are both described in this section.
Header caching is optional as it depends on external libraries, body caching is always enabled if NeoMutt is compiled with POP and/or IMAP support as these use it (body caching requires no external library).
NeoMutt provides optional support for caching message headers for the following types of folders: IMAP, POP, Maildir and MH. Header caching greatly speeds up opening large folders because for remote folders, headers usually only need to be downloaded once. For Maildir and MH, reading the headers from a single file is much faster than looking at possibly thousands of single files (since Maildir and MH use one file per message.)
Header caching can be enabled by configuring one of the database backends. One of bdb, gdbm, kyotocabinet, lmdb, qdbm, rocksdb, tdb, tokyocabinet.
If enabled, $header_cache can be used to either point to a file or a directory. If set to point to a file, one database file for all folders will be used (which may result in lower performance), but one file per folder if it points to a directory.
Additionally, $header_cache_backend can be set to specify which backend to use. The list of available backends can be specified at configure time with a set of --with-<backend> options. Currently, the following backends are supported: bdb, gdbm, kyotocabinet, lmdb, qdbm, rocksdb, tdb, tokyocabinet.
Take a look at the benchmark script provided in the following repository: contrib-hcache-benchmark. There you can find a way of finding the storage backend for your needs.
Both cache methods can be combined using the same directory for storage (and for IMAP/POP even provide meaningful file names) which simplifies manual maintenance tasks.
In addition to caching message headers only, NeoMutt can also cache whole message bodies. This results in faster display of messages for POP and IMAP folders because messages usually have to be downloaded only once.
For configuration, the variable $message_cache_dir must point to a directory. There, NeoMutt will create a hierarchy of subdirectories named like the account and mailbox path the cache is for.
For using both, header and body caching, $header_cache and $message_cache_dir can be safely set to the same value.
In a header or body cache directory, NeoMutt creates a directory
hierarchy named like: proto:user@hostname
where
proto
is either “pop” or
“imap.” Within there, for each folder, NeoMutt stores
messages in single files and header caches in files with the
“.hcache” extension. All files can be removed as needed
if the consumed disk space becomes an issue as NeoMutt will silently
fetch missing items again. Pathnames are always stored in UTF-8
encoding.
For Maildir and MH, the header cache files are named after the MD5 checksum of the path.
NeoMutt does not (yet) support maintenance features for header cache database files so that files have to be removed in case they grow too big. It depends on the database library used for header caching whether disk space freed by removing messages is re-used.
For body caches, NeoMutt can keep the local cache in sync with the remote mailbox if the $message_cache_clean variable is set. Cleaning means to remove messages from the cache which are no longer present in the mailbox which only happens when other mail clients or instances of NeoMutt using a different body cache location delete messages (NeoMutt itself removes deleted messages from the cache when syncing a mailbox). As cleaning can take a noticeable amount of time, it should not be set in general but only occasionally.
You may also have compiled NeoMutt to co-operate with Mixmaster, an anonymous remailer. Mixmaster permits you to send your messages anonymously using a chain of remailers. Mixmaster support in NeoMutt is for mixmaster version 2.04 or later.
To use it, you'll have to obey certain restrictions. Most important,
you cannot use the Cc
and Bcc
headers. To tell NeoMutt to use mixmaster, you have to select
a remailer chain, using the mix function on the compose menu.
The chain selection screen is divided into two parts. In the (larger) upper part, you get a list of remailers you may use. In the lower part, you see the currently selected chain of remailers.
You can navigate in the chain using the
<chain-prev>
and
<chain-next>
functions, which are by default
bound to the left and right arrows and to the h
and
l
keys (think vi keyboard bindings). To insert
a remailer at the current chain position, use the
<insert>
function. To append a remailer behind
the current chain position, use <select-entry>
or <append>
. You can also delete entries from
the chain, using the corresponding function. Finally, to abandon your
changes, leave the menu, or <accept>
them
pressing (by default) the Return
key.
Note that different remailers do have different capabilities, indicated in the %c entry of the remailer menu lines (see $mix_entry_format). Most important is the “middleman” capability, indicated by a capital “M”: This means that the remailer in question cannot be used as the final element of a chain, but will only forward messages to other mixmaster remailers. For details on the other capabilities, please have a look at the mixmaster documentation.
NeoMutt provides dedicated config variables to specify credentials
for network servers. These include imap_user
,
imap_pass
, smtp_user
,
smtp_pass
, etc. There are a few downsides to this
approach. For one thing, their use encourages storing usernames and
passwords in plain text inside a NeoMutt config file. People have
come up with solutions to this, including using gpg-encrypted files
and populating my_
variables via external scripts
through source "/path/to/script|"
.
However, once the variables are set, the secrets can be inspected
with the set
command.
Also, because these config variables are not account-specific, they
have been the cause of a proliferation of ways to mimic per-account
setups using a combination of convoluted hooks and macros to modify
them on folder change or on a keypress.
The goal of this feature is to get rid of most _user
and _pass
variables. To do so, we provide a way of
specifying an external command that NeoMutt will call to populate
account credentials for network servers such as IMAP, POP, or SMTP.
The external command is called with a number of arguments indicating
the known properties of the account such as the account type and
hostname; the external command provides NeoMutt with a list of
additional properties such as username and password.
The variable account_command
configures an
external program to be used to gather account credentials.
set account_command = "/path/to/my/script.sh"
The program specified will be called by NeoMutt with a number of key-value command line arguments.
--hostname val
: the network host name of the
service
--username val
: the username for the account.
This might be specified in the URL itself, e.g.,
set folder="imaps://me@example.com@example.com"
or
with a dedicated existing variable, e.g.
set imap_user=me@example.com
.
--type val
: the type of the account, one of
imap
, pop
,
smtp
, nntp
, with an optional
trailing s
if SSL/TLS is required.
The program specified will have to respond by printing to stdout a
number of key: value
lines. NeoMutt currently
recognizes the following keys.
login
username
password
Because password can contain any characters, including spaces, we
expect lines to match the regex ^([[:alpha:]]+): (.*)$
exactly.
This feature allows specifying regexes to color attachment headers
just like the mail body would. The headers are the parts colored by
the attachment
color. Coloring them is useful to
highlight the results of GPGME's signature checks or simply the
mimetype or size of the attachment. Only the part matched by the
regex is colored.
The attach_headers
color should be used just like
the body
color.
color attach_headers foreground background pattern
# Example NeoMutt config file for the attach-headers-color feature. # Color if the attachment is autoviewed color attach_headers brightgreen default "Autoview" # Color only the brackets around the headers color attach_headers brightyellow default "^\\[--" color attach_headers brightyellow default "--]$" # Color the mime type and the size color attach_headers green default "Type: [a-z]+/[a-z0-9\-]+" color attach_headers green default "Size: [0-9\.]+[KM]" # Color GPGME signature checks color attach_headers brightgreen default "Good signature from.*" color attach_headers brightred default "Bad signature from.*" color attach_headers brightred default "BAD signature from.*" color attach_headers brightred default "Note: This key has expired!" color attach_headers brightmagenta default "Problem signature from.*" color attach_headers brightmagenta default "WARNING: This key is not certified with a trusted signature!" color attach_headers brightmagenta default " There is no indication that the signature belongs to the owner." color attach_headers brightmagenta default "can't handle these multiple signatures" color attach_headers brightmagenta default "signature verification suppressed" color attach_headers brightmagenta default "invalid node with packet of type" # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
This feature allows enabling message security in modes that don't enable it by default. Those include batch mode, sending a postponed message, and resending a message.
This allows using NeoMutt as a driver for git-send-email(1), to send patches in signed and/or encrypted mail.
To send an email from a file, enabling cryptographic
operations as when sending interactively, simply use the
-C
flag.
$ neomutt -C -H - < /mail/to/be/sent
# Example NeoMutt config file for the cli-crypto feature. set pgp_default_key = "1111111111111111111111111111111111111111" # Sign all mail set crypt_autosign = yes # Encrypt mail if all recipients have valid public keys set crypt_opportunistic_encrypt = yes # Sign/encrypt protected headers (Subject) set crypt_protected_headers_write = yes # Self encrypt mail set crypt_self_encrypt = yes # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
# Example .gitconfig config file for the cli-crypto feature.
[sendemail]
sendmailcmd = neomutt -C -H - && true
The compose-to-sender feature adds a new command to start composing a new email to the sender of the current message. This is not a reply, but a new, separate, message.
It works on tagged messages too, sending one email to all of the senders of the tagged messages.
compose-to-sender adds the following function to NeoMutt. By default, it is not bound to a key.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the compose-to-sender feature. # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # FUNCTIONS – shown with an example mapping # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Compose a new email (not a reply) to the sender bind index,pager @ compose-to-sender # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
The Compressed Folder feature allows NeoMutt to read mailbox files that are compressed. But it isn't limited to compressed files. It works well with encrypted files, too. In fact, if you can create a program/script to convert to and from your format, then NeoMutt can read it.
The feature adds three hooks to NeoMutt:
open-hook
, close-hook
and
append-hook
. They define commands to: uncompress
a file; compress a file; append messages to an already compressed
file.
There are some examples of both compressed and encrypted files, later. For now, the documentation will just concentrate on compressed files.
open-hook
regex
"shell-command"
close-hook
regex
"shell-command"
append-hook
regex
"shell-command"
The shell-command must contain two placeholders for filenames:
%f
and %t
. These represent
“from” and “to” filenames. These
placeholders should be placed inside single-quotes to prevent
unintended shell expansions.
If you need the exact string “%f” or “%t” in your command, simply double up the “%” character, e.g. “%%f” or “%%t”.
Table 6.2. Not all Hooks are Required
Open | Close | Append | Effect | Useful if |
---|---|---|---|---|
Open | — | — | Folder is readonly | The folder is just a backup |
Open | Close | — | Folder is read/write, but the entire folder must be written if anything is changed | Your compression format doesn't support appending |
Open | Close | Append | Folder is read/write and emails can be efficiently added to the end | Your compression format supports appending |
Open | — | Append | Folder is readonly, but can be appended to | You want to store emails, but never change them |
The command:
should return a non-zero exit status on failure
should not delete any files
open-hook regex "shell-command"
If NeoMutt is unable to open a file, it then looks for
open-hook
that matches the filename.
If your compression program doesn't have a well-defined extension,
then you can use .
as the regex.
close-hook regex "shell-command"
When NeoMutt has finished with a compressed mail folder, it will
look for a matching close-hook
to recompress the
file. This hook is
optional.
If the folder has not been modified, the
close-hook
will not be called.
Example 6.4. Example of
close-hook
close-hook '\.gz$' "gzip --stdout '%t' > '%f'"
NeoMutt has finished with a folder,
“example.gz”, that it opened with
open-hook
The folder has been modified
NeoMutt has a close-hook
whose regex
matches the filename: \.gz$
NeoMutt uses the command gzip -c
to create
a new compressed file
The close-hook
can also include extra
options, e.g. compression level: --best
append-hook regex "shell-command"
When NeoMutt wants to append an email to a compressed mail folder,
it will look for a matching append-hook
. This
hook is optional.
Using the append-hook
will save time, but
NeoMutt won't be able to determine the type of the mail folder
inside the compressed file.
NeoMutt will assume the type to be that of the
$mbox_type
variable. NeoMutt also uses this type
for temporary files.
NeoMutt will only use the append-hook
for
existing files. The close-hook
will be used for
empty, or missing files.
If your command writes to stdout, it is vital that you use
>>
in the “append-hook”. If
not, data will be lost.
Example 6.5. Example of
append-hook
append-hook '\.gz$' "gzip --stdout '%t' >> '%f'"
NeoMutt wants to append an email to a folder,
“example.gz”, that it opened with
open-hook
NeoMutt has an append-hook
whose regex
matches the filename: \.gz$
NeoMutt knows the mailbox type from the
$mbox
variable
NeoMutt uses the command gzip -c
to append
to an existing compressed file
The append-hook
can also include extra
options, e.g. compression level: --best
NeoMutt assumes that an empty file is not compressed. In this situation, unset $save_empty, so that the compressed file will be removed if you delete all of the messages.
Encrypted files are decrypted into temporary files which are stored in the $tmp_dir directory. This could be a security risk.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the compress feature. # This feature adds three hooks to NeoMutt which allow it to # work with compressed, or encrypted, mailboxes. # The hooks are of the form: # open-hook regex "shell-command" # close-hook regex "shell-command" # append-hook regex "shell-command" # The 'append-hook' is optional. # Handler for gzip compressed mailboxes open-hook '\.gz$' "gzip --stdout --decompress '%f' > '%t'" close-hook '\.gz$' "gzip --stdout '%t' > '%f'" append-hook '\.gz$' "gzip --stdout '%t' >> '%f'" # Handler for bzip2 compressed mailboxes open-hook '\.bz2$' "bzip2 --stdout --decompress '%f' > '%t'" close-hook '\.bz2$' "bzip2 --stdout '%t' > '%f'" append-hook '\.bz2$' "bzip2 --stdout '%t' >> '%f'" # Handler for xz compressed mailboxes open-hook '\.xz$' "xz --stdout --decompress '%f' > '%t'" close-hook '\.xz$' "xz --stdout '%t' > '%f'" append-hook '\.xz$' "xz --stdout '%t' >> '%f'" # Handler for pgp encrypted mailboxes # PGP does not support appending to an encrypted file open-hook '\.pgp$' "pgp -f < '%f' > '%t'" close-hook '\.pgp$' "pgp -fe YourPgpUserIdOrKeyId < '%t' > '%f'" # Handler for gpg encrypted mailboxes # gpg does not support appending to an encrypted file open-hook '\.gpg$' "gpg --decrypt < '%f' > '%t'" close-hook '\.gpg$' "gpg --encrypt --recipient YourGpgUserIdOrKeyId < '%t' > '%f'" # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
The “Conditional Dates” feature allows you to construct $index_format expressions based on the age of the email.
NeoMutt's default $index_format
displays email
dates in the form: abbreviated-month day-of-month –
“Jan 14”.
The format is configurable but only per-mailbox. This feature allows you to configure the display depending on the age of the email.
Table 6.3. Potential Formatting Scheme
Email Sent | Format | Example |
---|---|---|
Today | %H:%M | 13:23 |
This Month | %a %d | Thu 17 |
This Year | %b %d | Dec 10 |
Older than 1 Year | %m/%y | 06/14 |
For an explanation of the date formatting strings, see
strftime(3).
By carefully picking your formats, the dates can remain unambiguous and compact.
NeoMutt's conditional format strings have the form: (whitespace introduced for clarity)
%< TEST ? TRUE & FALSE >
The examples below use the test “%[” – the date of the message in the local timezone. They will also work with “%(” – the local time that the message arrived.
The date tests are of the form:
%<[nX? TRUE & FALSE >
“n” is an optional count (defaults to 1 if missing)
“X” is the time period
Table 6.5. Example Date Tests
Test | Meaning |
---|---|
%[y | This year |
%[1y | This year |
%[6m | In the last 6 months |
%[w | This week |
%[d | Today |
%[4H | In the last 4 hours |
We start with a one-condition test.
Table 6.6. Example 1
Test | Date Range | Format String | Example |
---|---|---|---|
%[1m | This month | %[%b %d] | Dec 10 |
Older | %[%Y-%m-%d] | 2015-04-23 |
The $index_format string would contain:
%<[1m?%[%b %d]&%[%Y-%m-%d]>
Reparsed a little, for clarity, you can see the test condition and the two format strings.
%<[1m? & > %[%b %d] %[%Y-%m-%d]
This example contains three test conditions and four date formats.
Table 6.7. Example 2
Test | Date Range | Format String | Example |
---|---|---|---|
%[d | Today | %[%H:%M ] | 12:34 |
%[m | This month | %[%a %d] | Thu 12 |
%[y | This year | %[%b %d] | Dec 10 |
Older | %[%m/%y ] | 06/15 |
The $index_format string would contain:
%<[y?%<[m?%<[d?%[%H:%M ]&%[%a %d]>&%[%b %d]>&%[%m/%y ]>
Reparsed a little, for clarity, you can see the test conditions and the four format strings.
%<[y? &%[%m/%y ]> Older %<[m? &%[%b %d]> This year %<[d? &%[%a %d]> This month %[%H:%M ] Today
This a another view of the same example, with some whitespace for clarity.
%<[y? %<[m? %<[d? AAA & BBB > & CCC > & DDD >
AAA = %[%H:%M ] BBB = %[%a %d] CCC = %[%b %d] DDD = %[%m/%y ]
The “Conditional Dates” feature doesn't have any config of its own. It modifies the behavior of the format strings.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the cond-date feature. # # The default index_format is: # '%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-15.15L (%<l?%4l&%4c>) %s' # # We replace the date field '%{%b %d}', giving: set index_format='%4C %Z %<[y?%<[m?%<[d?%[%H:%M ]&%[%a %d]>&%[%b %d]>&%[%m/%y ]> %-15.15L (%<l?%4l&%4c>) %s' # Test Date Range Format String Example # -------------------------------------------- # %[d Today %[%H:%M ] 12:34 # %[m This month %[%a %d] Thu 12 # %[y This year %[%b %d] Dec 10 # — Older %[%m/%y ] 06/15 # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
strftime(3)
Date parsing doesn't quite do what you expect. “1w”
doesn't mean the “in the last 7 days”, but
“this week”. This doesn't match the
normal NeoMutt behavior: for example ~d>1w
means emails dated in the last 7 days.
Once you encrypt an email to someone you cannot read it. This is good for security, but bad for record-keeping. If you wanted to keep a copy of an encrypted email you could set $fcc_clear.
A better option is to enable $smime_self_encrypt, then set $smime_default_key to your personal S/MIME key id.
set smime_self_encrypt = yes set smime_default_key = bb345e23.0
Or, if you use PGP, $pgp_self_encrypt, then set $pgp_default_key to your personal PGP key id.
set pgp_self_encrypt = yes set pgp_default_key = A4AF18C5582473BD35A1E9CE78BB3D480042198E
If you have different key for signing, then you can set $pgp_sign_as or $smime_sign_as respectively.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the encrypt-to-self feature. # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # VARIABLES – shown with their default values # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Save a copy of outgoing email, encrypted to yourself set pgp_self_encrypt = "yes" set pgp_default_key = "PGP-KEY" # set pgp_sign_as = "PGP-SIGNING-KEY" # Save a copy of outgoing email, encrypted to yourself set smime_self_encrypt = "yes" set smime_default_key = "SMIME-KEY" # set smime_sign_as = "SMIME-SIGNING-KEY" # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Since: NeoMutt 2016-03-07
open_memstream()
,
fmemopen()
from glibc
This feature can be enabled by running configure
with the option --fmemopen
The “fmemopen” feature speeds up some searches.
This feature changes a few places where NeoMutt creates temporary files. It replaces them with in-memory buffers. This should improve the performance when searching the header or body using the $thorough_search option.
There are no user-configurable parts.
This feature depends on open_memstream()
and
fmemopen()
. They are provided by glibc. Without
them, NeoMutt will simply create temporary files.
fmemopen(3)
The “forgotten-attachment” feature provides a new setting for NeoMutt that alerts the user if the message body contains a certain keyword but there are no attachments added. This is meant to ensure that the user does not forget to attach a file after promising to do so in the mail. The attachment keyword will not be scanned in text matched by $quote_regex.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the forgotten-attachment feature. # The 'forgotten-attachment' feature provides a new setting for NeoMutt that # alerts the user if the message body contains a certain regular expression but there are # no attachments added. This is meant to ensure that the user does not forget # to attach a file after promising to do so in the mail. # Ask if the user wishes to abort sending if $abort_noattach_regex is found in the # body, but no attachments have been added # It can be set to: # "yes" : always abort # "ask-yes" : ask whether to abort # "no" : send the mail set abort_noattach = no # Search for the following regular expression in the body of the email # English: attach, attached, attachment, attachments set abort_noattach_regex = "\\<attach(|ed|ments?)\\>" # Nederlands: # set abort_noattach_regex = "\\<(bijvoegen|bijgevoegd|bijlage|bijlagen)\\>" # Deutsch: # set abort_noattach_regex = "\\<(anhängen|angehängt|anhang|anhänge|hängt an)\\>" # Français: # set abort_noattach_regex = "\\<(attaché|attachés|attache|attachons|joint|jointe|joints|jointes|joins|joignons)\\>" # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
These hooks are called when global events take place in NeoMutt.
Run a command...
timeout-hook – periodically
startup-hook – when NeoMutt starts up, before opening the first mailbox
shutdown-hook – NeoMutt shuts down, before closing the last mailbox
The commands are NeoMutt commands. If you want to run an external shell command, you need to run them like this:
startup-hook 'echo `action.sh ARGS`'
The single quotes prevent the
backticks from being expanded. The echo
command
prevents an empty command error.
Since: NeoMutt 2016-08-08
This feature implements a new hook that is called periodically when
NeoMutt checks for new mail. This hook is called every
$timeout
seconds.
Since: NeoMutt 2016-11-25
This feature implements a new hook that is called when NeoMutt first starts up, but before opening the first mailbox. This is most likely to be useful to users of notmuch.
Since: NeoMutt 2016-11-25
This feature implements a hook that is called when NeoMutt shuts down, but before closing the last mailbox. This is most likely to be useful to users of notmuch.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the global hooks feature. # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # COMMANDS – shown with an example argument # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # After $timeout seconds of inactivity, run this NeoMutt command timeout-hook 'exec sync-mailbox' # When NeoMutt first loads, run this NeoMutt command startup-hook 'exec sync-mailbox' # When NeoMutt quits, run this NeoMutt command shutdown-hook 'exec sync-mailbox' # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
The Header Cache Compression Feature can be used for speeding up the loading of large mailboxes. Also the space used on disk can be shrunk by about 50% - depending on the compression method being used.
The implementation sits on top of the header caching functions. So the header cache compression can be used together with all available database backends.
Table 6.10. Header Cache Compression Variables
Name | Type | Default |
---|---|---|
header_cache_compress_method | string | (empty) |
header_cache_compress_level | number | 1 |
The header_cache_compress_method
can be
(empty) - which means, that no header cache
compression should be used. But when set to lz4,
zlib or zstd - then the
compression is turned on.
The header_cache_compress_level
defines the
compression level, which should be used together with the selected
header_cache_compress_method
. Here is an overview
of the possible settings:
# Example NeoMutt config file for the header cache compression feature. # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # VARIABLES – shown with their default values # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- set header_cache_compress_level = 1 set header_cache_compress_method = "" # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
The “ifdef” feature introduces three new commands to NeoMutt and allows you to share one config file between versions of NeoMutt that may have different features compiled in.
ifdef symbol "config-command [args...]" # If a symbol is defined ifndef symbol "config-command [args...]" # If a symbol is not defined finish # Finish reading the current file
Table 6.12. ifdef Symbols
Example Symbol | Description |
---|---|
sidebar_format
| Config variable |
status-color ,
imap
| Compiled-in feature |
pgp-menu ,
group-related | Function |
index-format-hook ,
tag-transforms | Command |
my_var
| My variable |
lmdb ,
tokyocabinet | Store (database) |
HOME ,
COLUMNS | Environment variable |
A list of compile-time symbols can be seen in the output of the command
neomutt -v
(in the “Compile options” section).
finish
is particularly useful when combined with
ifndef
. e.g.
# Sidebar config file
ifndef sidebar finish
ifdef
symbol
"config-command [args...]"
ifndef
symbol
"config-command [args...]"
finish
# Example NeoMutt config file for the ifdef feature. # This feature introduces three useful commands which allow you to share # one config file between versions of NeoMutt that may have different # features compiled in. # ifdef symbol "config-command [args...]" # ifndef symbol "config-command [args...]" # finish # The 'ifdef' command tests whether NeoMutt understands the name of # a variable, environment variable, function, command or compile-time symbol. # If it does, then it executes a config command. # The 'ifndef' command tests whether a symbol does NOT exist. # The 'finish' command tells NeoMutt to stop reading current config file. # If the 'trash' variable exists, set it. ifdef trash 'set trash=~/Mail/trash' # If the 'PS1' environment variable exists, source config file. ifdef PS1 'source .neomutt/interactive.rc' # If the 'tag-pattern' function exists, bind a key to it. ifdef tag-pattern 'bind index <F6> tag-pattern' # If the 'imap-fetch-mail' command exists, read my IMAP config. ifdef imap-fetch-mail 'source ~/.neomutt/imap.rc' # If the compile-time symbol 'sidebar' does not exist, then # stop reading the current config file. ifndef sidebar finish # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
The “index-color” feature allows you to specify colors for individual parts of the email index. e.g. Subject, Author, Flags.
First choose which part of the index you'd like to color. Then, if needed, pick a pattern to match.
Note: The pattern does not have to refer to the object you wish to color. e.g.
color index_author red default "~sneomutt"
The author appears red when the subject (~s) contains “neomutt”.
All the colors default to default
, i.e. unset.
The index objects can be themed using the color
command and an optional pattern. A missing pattern is equivalent to
a match-all .*
pattern.
color index-object foreground background [pattern]
Table 6.13. Index Colors
Object | Highlights |
---|---|
index | Entire index line |
index_author | Author name, %A %a %F %L %n |
index_collapsed | Number of messages in a collapsed thread, %M |
index_date | Date field |
index_flags | Message flags, %S %Z |
index_label | Message label, %y %Y |
index_number | Message number, %C |
index_size | Message size, %c %cr %l |
index_subject | Subject, %s |
index_tag | Nessage tags, %G |
index_tags | Transformed message tags, %g %J |
# Example NeoMutt config file for the index-color feature. # Entire index line color index white black '.*' # Author name, %A %a %F %L %n # Give the author column a dark grey background color index_author default color234 '.*' # Highlight a particular from (~f) color index_author brightyellow color234 '~fRay Charles' # Message flags, %S %Z # Highlight the flags for flagged (~F) emails color index_flags default red '~F' # Subject, %s # Look for a particular subject (~s) color index_subject brightcyan default '~s\(closes #[0-9]+\)' # Number of messages in a collapsed thread, %M color index_collapsed default brightblue # Date field color index_date green default # Message label, %y %Y color index_label default brightgreen # Message number, %C color index_number red default # Message size, %c %cr %l color index_size cyan default # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
The “initials” feature adds an expando (%I) for an author's initials.
The index panel displays a list of emails. Its layout is controlled by the $index_format variable. Using this expando saves space in the index panel. This can be useful if you are regularly working with a small set of people.
This feature has no config of its own. It adds an expando which can be used in the $index_format variable.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the initials feature. # The 'initials' feature has no config of its own. # It adds an expando for an author's initials, # which can be used in the 'index_format' variable. # The default 'index_format' is: set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-15.15L (%<l?%4l&%4c>) %s' # Where %L represents the author/recipient # This might look like: # 1 + Nov 17 David Bowie Changesbowie ( 689) # 2 ! Nov 17 Stevie Nicks Rumours ( 555) # 3 + Nov 16 Jimi Hendrix Voodoo Child ( 263) # 4 + Nov 16 Debbie Harry Parallel Lines ( 540) # Using the %I expando: set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %I (%<l?%4l&%4c>) %s' # This might look like: # 1 + Nov 17 DB Changesbowie ( 689) # 2 ! Nov 17 SN Rumours ( 555) # 3 + Nov 16 JH Voodoo Child ( 263) # 4 + Nov 16 DH Parallel Lines ( 540) # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Since: NeoMutt 2016-10-02
To check if NeoMutt supports Kyoto Cabinet, look for
“kyoto” in the NeoMutt version.
“+hcache” in the compile options
“hcache backend: kyotocabinet” in the NeoMutt version
This feature adds support for using Kyoto Cabinet, the successor to Tokyo Cabinet, as a storage backend for NeoMutt's header cache (hcache). It is enabled at configure time with the --with-kyotocabinet=<path> switch.
This feature adds a new way of using the
Limit Command. The
<limit-current-thread>
function restricts
the view to just the current thread. Setting the limit (the
l
key) to “all” will restore the full
email list.
Limit-current-thread adds the following function to NeoMutt. By default, it is not bound to a key.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the limit-current-thread feature. # Limit view to current thread bind index <esc>L limit-current-thread # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
This feature adds support for using LMDB as a storage backend for NeoMutt's header cache (hcache). It is enabled at configure time with the --with-lmdb=<path> switch.
It is not recommended to store the lmdb database on a shared drive.
This feature allows the user to save outgoing emails in multiple folders.
Folders should be listed separated by commas, but no spaces.
The “fcc” field of an email can be set in two ways:
The <edit-fcc> command in the compose menu (default key: “f”)
Creating a fcc-hook
in your
.neomuttrc
NeoMutt's format strings can contain embedded if-then-else conditions. They are of the form:
%?VAR?TRUE&FALSE?
If the variable “VAR” has a value greater than zero, print the “TRUE” string, otherwise print the “FALSE” string.
e.g. %?S?Size: %S&Empty?
Which can be read as:
if (%S > 0) { print "Size: %S" } else { print "Empty" }
These conditions are useful, but in NeoMutt they cannot be nested
within one another. This feature uses the notation
%<VAR?TRUE&FALSE>
and allows them to be
nested.
The %<...>
notation was used to format the
current local time. but that's not really very useful since NeoMutt
has no means of refreshing the screen periodically.
A simple nested condition might be: (Some whitespace has been introduced for clarity)
%<x? %<y? XY & X > & %<y? Y & NONE > > Conditions %<y? XY & X > x>0 XY x>0,y>0 X x>0,y=0
%<x? %<y? XY & X > & %<y? Y & NONE > > Conditions %<y? Y & NONE > x=0 Y x=0,y>0 NONE x=0,y=0
Equivalent to:
if (x > 0) {
if (y > 0) {
print 'XY'
} else {
print 'X'
}
} else {
if (y > 0) {
print 'Y'
} else {
print 'NONE'
}
}
Examples:
set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-25.25n %s%> %<M?%M Msgs &%<l?%l Lines&%c Bytes>>'
if a thread is folded display the number of messages (%M)
else if we know how many lines in the message display lines in message (%l)
else display the size of the message in bytes (%c)
set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-25.25n %<M?[%M] %s&%s%* %<l?%l&%c>>'
if a thread is folded display the number of messages (%M) and the subject (%s)
else if we know how many lines are in the message display subject (%s) and the lines in message (%l)
else display the subject (%s) and the size of the message in bytes (%c)
If you wish to use angle brackets < >
in
a nested condition, then it's necessary to escape them, e.g.
set index_format='%<M?\<%M\>&%s>'
The “nested-if” feature doesn't have any config of its own. It modifies the behavior of the format strings.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the nested-if feature. # This feature uses the format: '%<VAR?TRUE&FALSE>' for conditional # format strings that can be nested. # Example 1 # if a thread is folded # display the number of messages (%M) # else if we know how many lines in the message # display lines in message (%l) # else display the size of the message in bytes (%c) set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-25.25n %s%> %<M?%M Msgs &%<l?%l Lines&%c Bytes>>' # Example 2 # if a thread is folded # display the number of messages (%M) # display the subject (%s) # else if we know how many lines in the message # display lines in message (%l) # else # display the size of the message in bytes (%c) set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-25.25n %<M?[%M] %s&%s%* %<l?%l&%c>>' # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
This feature enables the new_mail_command setting, which can be used to execute a custom script (e.g. a notification handler) upon receiving a new mail.
The command string can contain expandos, such as
%n
for the number of new messages. For a complete
list, see: $status_format.
When the notification is sent, the folder of the new mail is no longer known. This is a limitation of NeoMutt. The `%f` expando will show the open folder.
When using Maildir local mailboxes, you must set $check_new config variable for this feature to work.
For example in Linux you can use (most distributions already provide notify-send):
set new_mail_command="notify-send --icon='/home/santiago/Pictures/neomutt.png' \ 'New Email' '%n new messages, %u unread.' &"
And in OS X you will need to install a command line interface for Notification Center, for example terminal-notifier:
set new_mail_command="terminal-notifier -title '%v' -subtitle 'New Mail' \ -message '%n new messages, %u unread.' -activate 'com.apple.Terminal'"
# Example NeoMutt config file for the new-mail feature. # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # VARIABLES – shown with their default values # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Set the command you want NeoMutt to execute upon the receipt of a new email set new_mail_command = "" # Linux example: # set new_mail_command="notify-send --icon='/home/santiago/Pictures/neomutt.png' \ # 'New Email in %f' '%n new messages, %u unread.' &" # OS X example: # set new_mail_command="terminal-notifier -title '%v' -subtitle 'New Mail in %f' \ # -message '%n new messages, %u unread.' -activate 'com.apple.Terminal'" # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Reading news via NNTP
NeoMutt can read from a news server using NNTP.
The default news server can be obtained from the
$NNTPSERVER
environment variable or from the
/etc/nntpserver
file. Like in other news readers,
information about the subscribed newsgroups is saved in the file
specified by the $newsrc variable. You
can open a newsgroup with the function
<change-newsgroup>
When browsing the list of newsgroups on the server the function
<subscribe>
can be used to tell NeoMutt the
groups of interest to you. This list is stored in the
$newsrc file, so NeoMutt remembers it
across invocations (see also
$save_unsubscribed). With the
<unsubscribe>
function a group can be deleted
from that list. You can also specify the list of interesting groups
with the mailboxes command in your
config file.
When checking for new messages, NeoMutt only polls the subscribed newsgroups.
The variable $news_cache_dir can be used to point to a directory. NeoMutt will create a hierarchy of subdirectories named like the account and newsgroup the cache is for. The hierarchy is also used to store header cache if NeoMutt was compiled with header cache support.
Table 6.16. NNTP Variables
Name | Type | Default |
---|---|---|
ask_followup_to | boolean | no |
ask_x_comment_to | boolean | no |
catchup_newsgroup | quad | ask-yes |
followup_to_poster | quad | ask-yes |
group_index_format | string | %4C %M%N %5s %-45.45f %d |
inews | string | (empty) |
newsgroups_charset | string | utf-8 |
newsrc | string | ~/.newsrc |
news_cache_dir | string | ~/.neomutt |
news_server | string | (empty) |
nntp_authenticators | string | (empty) |
nntp_context | number | 1000 |
nntp_listgroup | boolean | yes |
nntp_load_description | boolean | yes |
nntp_pass | string | (empty) |
nntp_poll | number | 60 |
nntp_user | string | (empty) |
post_moderated | quad | ask-yes |
save_unsubscribed | boolean | no |
show_new_news | boolean | yes |
show_only_unread | boolean | no |
x_comment_to | boolean | no |
NNTP adds the following functions to NeoMutt. By default, none of them are bound to keys.
Table 6.17. NNTP Functions
Menus | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
browser,index | <catchup> | mark all articles in newsgroup as read |
index,pager | <change-newsgroup> | open a different newsgroup |
compose | <edit-followup-to> | edit the Followup-To field |
compose | <edit-newsgroups> | edit the newsgroups list |
compose | <edit-x-comment-to> | edit the X-Comment-To field |
attach,index,pager | <followup-message> | followup to newsgroup |
index,pager | <post-message> | post message to newsgroup |
browser | <reload-active> | load list of all newsgroups from NNTP server |
browser | <subscribe> | subscribe to current mbox (IMAP/NNTP only) |
browser | <subscribe-pattern> | subscribe to newsgroups matching a pattern |
browser | <uncatchup> | mark all articles in newsgroup as unread |
browser | <unsubscribe> | unsubscribe from current mbox (IMAP/NNTP only) |
browser | <unsubscribe-pattern> | unsubscribe from newsgroups matching a pattern |
index,pager | <change-newsgroup-readonly> | open a different newsgroup in read only mode |
attach,index,pager | <forward-to-group> | forward to newsgroup |
index | <get-children> | get all children of the current message |
index | <get-parent> | get parent of the current message |
index | <reconstruct-thread> | reconstruct thread containing current message |
index | <get-message> | get message with Message-Id |
# Example NeoMutt config file for the nntp feature. # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # VARIABLES – shown with their default values # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- set ask_followup_to = no set ask_x_comment_to = no set catchup_newsgroup = ask-yes set followup_to_poster = ask-yes set group_index_format = '%4C %M%N %5s %-45.45f %d' set inews = '' set newsgroups_charset = utf-8 set newsrc = '~/.newsrc' set news_cache_dir = '~/.neomutt' set news_server = '' set nntp_authenticators = '' set nntp_context = 1000 set nntp_listgroup = yes set nntp_load_description = yes set nntp_pass = '' set nntp_poll = 60 set nntp_user = '' set post_moderated = ask-yes set save_unsubscribed = no set show_new_news = yes set show_only_unread = no set x_comment_to = no # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # FUNCTIONS – shown with an example mapping # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # mark all articles in newsgroup as read bind browser,index y catchup # open a different newsgroup bind index,pager i change-newsgroup # edit the Followup-To field bind compose o edit-followup-to # edit the newsgroups list bind compose N edit-newsgroups # edit the X-Comment-To field bind compose x edit-x-comment-to # followup to newsgroup bind attach,index,pager F followup-message # post message to newsgroup bind index,pager P post-message # load list of all newsgroups from NNTP server bind browser g reload-active # subscribe to current mbox (IMAP/NNTP only) bind browser s subscribe # subscribe to newsgroups matching a pattern bind browser S subscribe-pattern # mark all articles in newsgroup as unread bind browser Y uncatchup # unsubscribe from current mbox (IMAP/NNTP only) bind browser u unsubscribe # unsubscribe from newsgroups matching a pattern bind browser U unsubscribe-pattern # open a different newsgroup in read only mode bind index,pager \ei change-newsgroup-readonly # forward to newsgroup bind attach,index,pager \eF forward-to-group # get all children of the current message # bind index ??? get-children # get parent of the current message bind index \eG get-parent # reconstruct thread containing current message # bind index ??? reconstruct-thread # get message with Message-Id bind index \CG get-message # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Some backends allow to index and tag mail without storing the tags within the mail envelope. Two backends are currently implementing this feature. Notmuch handles them natively and IMAP stores them in custom IMAP keywords.
Notmuch adds the following functions to NeoMutt. By default, none of them are bound to keys.
Table 6.19. Notmuch/IMAP Functions
Menus | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
index,pager | <modify-labels> | add, remove, or toggle tags: IMAP: edit the tags list Notmuch: [+]<tag> to add, -<tag> to remove, !<tag> to toggle(notmuch) tags. Note: Tab completion of tag names is available |
index,pager | <modify-labels-then-hide> | add, remove, or toggle tags IMAP: edit the tags list Notmuch: [+]<tag> to add, -<tag> to remove, !<tag> to toggle labels and then hide or unhide the message by changing the "quasi-deleted" to match if it would be shown when requerying. Normal redisplay rules apply here, so the user must call <sync-mailbox> for the changes to be displayed. Note: Tab completion of tag names is available. |
tag-transforms
tag
transformed-string
{
tag
transformed-string
...}tag-formats
tag
format-string
{
tag
format-string
...}
Adds the objects, below, to index-color feature. The objects can take an optional pattern.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the custom tags feature. # VARIABLES – shown with their default values # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # This variable specifies private notmuch tags which should not be printed # on screen (index, pager). set hidden_tags = "unread,draft,flagged,passed,replied,attachment,signed,encrypted" # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # FUNCTIONS – shown with an example mapping # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # modify (notmuch/imap) tags bind index,pager \` modify-labels # modify (notmuch/imap) tag non-interactively. macro index,pager tt "<modify-labels>!todo\n" "Toggle the 'todo' tag" # modify labels and then hide message # bind index,pager ??? modify-labels-then-hide # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # COMMANDS – shown with an example # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Replace some tags with icons # tag-transforms tag transformed-string { tag transformed-string ...} # tag-transforms "inbox" "i" \ # "unread" "u" \ # "replied" "↻ " \ # "sent" "➥ " \ # "todo" "T" \ # "deleted" "DEL" \ # "invites" "CAL" # The formats must start with 'G' and the entire sequence is case sensitive. # tag-formats tag format-string { tag format-string ...} # tag-formats "inbox" "GI" \ # "unread" "GU" \ # "replied" "GR" \ # "sent" "GS" \ # "todo" "Gt" \ # "deleted" "GD" \ # "invites" "Gi" # Now instead of using '%g' or '%J' in your $index_format, which lists all tags # in a non-deterministic order, you can something like the following which puts # a transformed tag name in a specific spot on the index line: # set index_format='%4C %S %[%y.%m.%d] %-18.18n %<GU?%GU& > %<GR?%GR& > %<GI?%GI& > %s' # The %G formatting sequence may display all tags including tags hidden by # hidden_tags. # # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # COLORS – some unpleasant examples are given # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # These symbols are added to the index-color feature: # an individual message tag, %G, uses tag name color index_tag red white "inbox" # the transformed message tags, %g color index_tags green default # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Since: NeoMutt 2016-03-17
Dependencies:
Notmuch libraries
Notmuch is an email fulltext indexing and tagging engine.
For more information, see: https://notmuchmail.org/
More examples: https://notmuchmail.org/mutttips/
notmuch://[<path>][?<item>=<name>[& ...]]
The <path> is an absolute path to the directory where the
notmuch database is found as returned by
“notmuch config get database.path” command. Note that
the <path> should NOT include .notmuch
directory name.
If the "<path>" is not defined then
$nm_default_url
or $folder
is
used, for example:
set nm_default_url = "notmuch:///home/foo/maildir" virtual-mailboxes "My INBOX" "notmuch://?query=tag:inbox"
query=<string>
See SEARCH SYNTAX in notmuch man page. Don't forget to use operators (“and”/“or”) in your queries.
Note that proper URL should not contain blank space and all “bad” chars should be encoded, for example
tag:AAA and tag:BBB
– encoding ->
tag:AAA%20and%20tag:BBB
but NeoMutt config file parser is smart enough to accept space in quoted strings. It means that you can use
notmuch:///foo?query=tag:AAA and tag:BBB
in your config files to keep things readable.
For more details about Xapian queries, see: https://xapian.org/docs/queryparser.html
limit=<number>
Restricts number of messages/threads in the result. The default limit is nm_db_limit.
Due to a limitation with libnotmuch
, unread and
flagged message count may be inaccurate with limit statements.
libnotmuch
cannot return a specific tag count
within the first X messages of a query.
type=<threads|messages>
Reads all matching messages or whole-threads. The default is 'messages' or nm_query_type.
Table 6.21. Notmuch Variables
Name | Type | Default | Note |
---|---|---|---|
nm_config_file | path | auto |
Configuration file for the notmuch database. Either a path,
auto for detecting a config. file, or
empty for no configuration file. Only useful for notmuch
0.32+.
|
nm_config_profile | string | (empty) | Configuration profile for the notmuch database. Only useful for notmuch 0.32+. |
nm_db_limit | number | 0 | |
nm_default_url | string | (empty) |
Must use format: notmuch://<absolute path>
|
nm_exclude_tags | string | (empty) | |
nm_flagged_tag | string | flagged | |
nm_open_timeout | number | 5 | |
nm_query_type | string | messages | |
nm_query_window_current_position | number | 0 | Position of current search window |
nm_query_window_current_search | string | (empty) | Current search parameters |
nm_query_window_duration | number | 0 |
Duration between start and end dates for windowed notmuch query.
This corresponds to a bounded notmuch date: query.
See notmuch-search-terms manual page for more info.
Value of 0 disables windowed queries unless
nm_query_window_enable=yes
|
nm_query_window_enable | boolean | no |
Enables windowed notmuch queries for
nm_query_window_duration = 0
|
nm_query_window_or_terms | string | (empty) |
Additional notmuch search terms to always include in the
window even if they're outside the date range. This turns the
window from date:... to
date:... or (additional search terms.)
For example, to always include flagged, unread emails, set to
tag:flagged and tag:unread
|
nm_query_window_timebase | string | week |
Time base for windowed notmuch queries.
Must be one of: hour , day ,
week , month , or
year
|
nm_record | boolean | no | |
nm_record_tags | string | (empty) | |
nm_unread_tag | string | unread | |
virtual_spool_file | boolean | no | Unnecessary since $spool_file supports mailbox descriptions. |
More variables about tags configuration can be found in Custom backend Tags Feature
Notmuch adds the following functions to NeoMutt. By default, none of them are bound to keys.
Table 6.22. Notmuch Functions
Menus | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
index,pager | <change-vfolder> | switch to another virtual folder, a new folder maybe be specified by vfolder description (see virtual-mailboxes) or URL. the default is next vfolder with unread messages |
index,pager | <entire-thread> | read entire thread of the current message |
index,pager | <sidebar-toggle-virtual> | toggle between mailboxes and virtual mailboxes |
index,pager | <vfolder-from-query> | generate virtual folder from notmuch search query. Note: TAB completion of 'tag:' names is available. |
index,pager | <vfolder-from-query-readonly> |
The same as <vfolder-from-query> ; however, the mailbox
will be read-only.
|
index | <vfolder-window-forward> | generate virtual folder by moving the query's time window forward |
index | <vfolder-window-backward> | generate virtual folder by moving the query's time window backward |
index | <vfolder-window-reset> | generate virtual folder by moving the query's time window to the present |
More functions about tags can be found in Custom backend Tags Feature
virtual-mailboxes
description
notmuch-URL
{
description
notmuch-URL
...}unvirtual-mailboxes
{
*
|
mailbox
... }
virtual-mailboxes
is like the
mailboxes command, except that it
takes a description. The mailbox will be watched for new mail and
will appear in the sidebar.
unvirtual-mailboxes
is identical to the
unmailboxes
command.
More commands about tags can be found in Custom backend Tags Feature
# Example NeoMutt config file for the notmuch feature. # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # VARIABLES – shown with their default values # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # This variable specifies notmuch query limit. set nm_db_limit = 0 # This variable specifies the default Notmuch database in format: # notmuch://<absolute path> set nm_default_url = "" # The messages tagged with these tags are excluded and not loaded # from notmuch DB to NeoMutt unless specified explicitly. set nm_exclude_tags = "" # This option specifies timeout for Notmuch database. Default is 5 seconds. set nm_open_timeout = 5 # This variable specifies notmuch query type, supported types: 'threads' and # 'messages'. set nm_query_type = messages # When writing a message in the NeoMutt record (see $record in the NeoMutt docs), # also add it to the notmuch DB. Replies inherit the tags from the original email. set nm_record = no # Tags modifications to the messages stored in the NeoMutt record. # example: # set record = "~/sent-mails" # set nm_record = yes # set nm_record_tags = "-inbox,archive,me" set nm_record_tags = "" # This variable specifies the notmuch tag used for unread messages. set nm_unread_tag = unread # When set, NeoMutt will use the first virtual mailbox (see virtual-mailboxes) # as a spool_file. set virtual_spool_file = no # setup time window preferences # first setup the duration, and then the time unit of that duration # when set to 0 (the default) the search window feature is disabled # unless explicitly enabled with nm_query_window_enable. set nm_query_window_enable=yes set nm_query_window_duration=2 set nm_query_window_timebase="week" # or "hour", "day", "week", "month", "year" # Extend query window to always show mail matching these terms. set nm_query_window_or_terms="tag:unread and tag:flagged" # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # FUNCTIONS – shown with an example mapping # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # open a different virtual folder bind index,pager X change-vfolder # read entire thread of the current message bind index,pager + entire-thread # generate virtual folder from query bind index,pager \eX vfolder-from-query # generate virtual folder from query with time window bind index < vfolder-window-backward bind index > vfolder-window-forward # toggle between mailboxes and virtual mailboxes # bind index,pager ??? sidebar-toggle-virtual # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # COMMANDS – shown with an example # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # virtual-mailboxes description notmuch-URL { description notmuch-URL ...} # virtual-mailboxes "Climbing" "notmuch://?query=climbing" # unvirtual-mailboxes { * | mailbox ...} # # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Karel Zak, Chris Mason, Christoph Rissner, David Riebenbauer, David Sterba, David Wilson, Don Zickus, Eric Davis, Jan Synacek, Jeremiah C. Foster, Josh Poimboeuf, Kirill A. Shutemov, Luke Macken, Mantas Mikulėnas, Patrick Brisbin, Philippe Le Brouster, Raghavendra D Prabhu, Sami Farin, Stefan Assmann, Stefan Kuhn, Tim Stoakes, Vladimir Marek, Víctor Manuel Jáquez Leal, Richard Russon, Bernard 'Guyzmo' Pratz
The “Pager Read Delay” feature adds a new config variable to allow the pager to operate in a preview mode. A new message is not marked as read merely because the pager opened it, but only after the pager remains on the message for a given length of time.
The “Pager Read Delay” feature adds no new functions to NeoMutt. Existing pager functions for navigating to a different message now check whether to mark a message as read.
The “Pager Read Delay” feature adds one new config variable, $pager_read_delay, which is an integer for how many seconds the pager must remain on a given message before marking it as read. The variable defaults to 0 for the original behavior of marking a message as read the moment the pager visits it.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the pager-read-delay feature. # Stay at least 5 seconds on a message before the pager marks it as read set pager_read_delay = 5 # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
When $pager_index_lines is non-zero, the “N” status indicator from the “%Z” expando of $index_format does not actively reflect the current new/read status of the message.
The “progress” feature shows a visual progress bar on slow tasks, such as indexing a large folder over the net.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the progress feature. # The 'progress' feature provides clear visual feedback for # slow tasks, such as indexing a large folder over the net. # Set the color of the progress bar # White text on a red background color progress white red # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
The “quasi-delete” function marks an email that should be hidden from the index, but NOT deleted. The email will disappear from the index when <sync-mailbox> is called.
On its own, this feature isn't very useful. It forms a useful part of the notmuch plugin.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the quasi-delete feature. # The 'quasi-delete' function marks an email that should be hidden # from the index, but NOT deleted. bind index,pager Q quasi-delete # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Since: NeoMutt 2016-09-10
Dependencies: None
Adds a reply_with_xorig for NeoMutt configuration files. If enabled, allows to reply to an email using the email address in the first X-Original-To: header of a mail as the From: header of the answer.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the reply-with-xorig feature. # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # VARIABLES – shown with their default values # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Use X-Original-To header to reply when reverse is disabled or no alternate # is found. set reply_with_xorig = "yes" # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Pierre-Elliott Bécue
The “sensible browser” is a set of small changes to NeoMutt's mailbox browser which make the browser behave in a more predictable way.
The behavior is divided into two use cases: Fixed Order; Variable Order.
This is for users who like their mailboxes in a fixed order, e.g. alphabetical, or unsorted (in the order of the config file).
# Fixed order
set sort_browser="alpha"
set sort_browser="unsorted"
When you first start the browser, e.g. c?
your
current mailbox will be highlighted.
When you navigate to a parent mailbox (“..”) your old mailbox will be highlighted.
“..” will always be listed at the top, however the rest of the list is sorted.
This is for users who like their mailboxes sorted by a characteristic that changes, e.g. count of new mail, or the size of mailbox.
# Variable order
set sort_browser="reverse-count"
set sort_browser="reverse-size"
When you first start the browser, e.g. c?
the
highlight will be on the first mailbox, e.g. the one with the most
new mail.
When you navigate to a parent mailbox (“..”) your old mailbox will be highlighted.
“..” will always be listed at the top, however the rest of the list is sorted.
The Sidebar shows a list of all your mailboxes. The list can be turned on and off, it can be themed and the list style can be configured.
This part of the manual is a reference guide. If you want a simple introduction with examples see the Sidebar Howto. If you just want to get started, you could use the sample Sidebar neomuttrc.
Table 6.26. Sidebar Variables
Name | Type | Default |
---|---|---|
sidebar_component_depth | number | 0 |
sidebar_delim_chars | string | /. |
sidebar_divider_char | string | | |
sidebar_folder_indent | boolean | no |
sidebar_format | string | %D%* %n |
sidebar_indent_string | string | (two spaces) |
sidebar_new_mail_only | boolean | no |
sidebar_next_new_wrap | boolean | no |
sidebar_non_empty_mailbox_only | boolean | no |
sidebar_on_right | boolean | no |
sidebar_short_path | boolean | no |
sidebar_sort_method | enum | unsorted |
sidebar_visible | boolean | no |
sidebar_width | number | 20 |
For more details, and examples, about the
$sidebar_format
, see the
Sidebar Intro.
Sidebar adds the following functions to NeoMutt. By default, none of them are bound to keys.
Table 6.27. Sidebar Functions
Menus | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
index,pager | <sidebar-next> | Move the highlight to next mailbox |
index,pager | <sidebar-next-new> | Move the highlight to next mailbox with new mail |
index,pager | <sidebar-open> | Open highlighted mailbox |
index,pager | <sidebar-page-down> | Scroll the Sidebar down 1 page |
index,pager | <sidebar-page-up> | Scroll the Sidebar up 1 page |
index,pager | <sidebar-prev> | Move the highlight to previous mailbox |
index,pager | <sidebar-prev-new> | Move the highlight to previous mailbox with new mail |
index,pager | <sidebar-toggle-visible> | Make the Sidebar (in)visible |
sidebar_pin
mailbox
[
mailbox
...]sidebar_unpin
{
*
|
mailbox
... }
This command specifies mailboxes that will always be displayed in the sidebar, even if $sidebar_new_mail_only is set and the mailbox does not contain new mail.
The “sidebar_unpin” command is used to remove a mailbox from the list of always displayed mailboxes. Use “sidebar_unpin *” to remove all mailboxes.
Table 6.28. Sidebar Colors
Name | Default Color | Description |
---|---|---|
sidebar_background | default | The entire sidebar panel |
sidebar_divider | default | The dividing line between the Sidebar and the Index/Pager panels |
sidebar_flagged | default | Mailboxes containing flagged mail |
sidebar_highlight | underline | Cursor to select a mailbox |
sidebar_indicator | neomutt indicator | The mailbox open in the Index panel |
sidebar_new | default | Mailboxes containing new mail |
sidebar_ordinary | default | Mailboxes that have no new/flagged mails, etc. |
sidebar_spool_file | default | Mailbox that receives incoming mail |
sidebar_unread | default | Mailboxes containing unread mail |
If the sidebar_indicator
color isn't set, then the
default NeoMutt indicator color will be used (the color used in the
index panel).
Table 6.29. Sidebar Sort
Sort | Description |
---|---|
alpha | Alphabetically by path |
count | Total number of messages |
desc | Descriptive name of the mailbox |
flagged | Number of flagged messages |
name | Alphabetically by path |
new | Number of unread messages |
path | Alphabetically by path |
unread | Number of unread messages |
unsorted | Order of the mailboxes command |
# Example NeoMutt config file for the sidebar feature. # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # VARIABLES – shown with their default values # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Should the Sidebar be shown? set sidebar_visible = no # How wide should the Sidebar be in screen columns? # Note: Some characters, e.g. Chinese, take up two columns each. set sidebar_width = 20 # Should the mailbox paths be abbreviated? set sidebar_short_path = no # Number of top-level mailbox path subdirectories to truncate for display set sidebar_component_depth = 0 # When abbreviating mailbox path names, use any of these characters as path # separators. Only the part after the last separators will be shown. # For file folders '/' is good. For IMAP folders, often '.' is useful. set sidebar_delim_chars = '/.' # If the mailbox path is abbreviated, should it be indented? set sidebar_folder_indent = no # Indent mailbox paths with this string. set sidebar_indent_string = ' ' # Make the Sidebar only display mailboxes that contain new, or flagged, # mail. set sidebar_new_mail_only = no # Any mailboxes that are pinned will always be visible, even if the # sidebar_new_mail_only option is enabled. set sidebar_non_empty_mailbox_only = no # Only show mailboxes that contain some mail sidebar_pin '/home/user/mailbox1' sidebar_pin '/home/user/mailbox2' # When searching for mailboxes containing new mail, should the search wrap # around when it reaches the end of the list? set sidebar_next_new_wrap = no # Show the Sidebar on the right-hand side of the screen set sidebar_on_right = no # The character to use as the divider between the Sidebar and the other NeoMutt # panels. set sidebar_divider_char = '|' # Enable extended mailbox mode to calculate total, new, and flagged # message counts for each mailbox. set mail_check_stats # Display the Sidebar mailboxes using this format string. set sidebar_format = '%B%<F? [%F]>%* %<N?%N/>%S' # Sort the mailboxes in the Sidebar using this method: # count – total number of messages # flagged – number of flagged messages # unread – number of unread messages # path – mailbox path # unsorted – do not sort the mailboxes set sidebar_sort_method = 'unsorted' # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # FUNCTIONS – shown with an example mapping # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Move the highlight to the previous mailbox bind index,pager \Cp sidebar-prev # Move the highlight to the next mailbox bind index,pager \Cn sidebar-next # Open the highlighted mailbox bind index,pager \Co sidebar-open # Move the highlight to the previous page # This is useful if you have a LOT of mailboxes. bind index,pager <F3> sidebar-page-up # Move the highlight to the next page # This is useful if you have a LOT of mailboxes. bind index,pager <F4> sidebar-page-down # Move the highlight to the previous mailbox containing new, or flagged, # mail. bind index,pager <F5> sidebar-prev-new # Move the highlight to the next mailbox containing new, or flagged, mail. bind index,pager <F6> sidebar-next-new # Toggle the visibility of the Sidebar. bind index,pager B sidebar-toggle-visible # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # COLORS – some unpleasant examples are given # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Note: All color operations are of the form: # color OBJECT FOREGROUND BACKGROUND # Color of the current, open, mailbox # Note: This is a general NeoMutt option which colors all selected items. color indicator cyan black # Sidebar-specific color of the selected item color sidebar_indicator cyan black # Color of the highlighted, but not open, mailbox. color sidebar_highlight black color8 # Color of the entire Sidebar panel color sidebar_background default black # Color of the divider separating the Sidebar from NeoMutt panels color sidebar_divider color8 black # Color to give mailboxes containing flagged mail color sidebar_flagged red black # Color to give mailboxes containing new mail color sidebar_new green black # Color to give mailboxes containing no new/flagged mail, etc. color sidebar_ordinary color245 default # Color to give the spool_file mailbox color sidebar_spool_file color207 default # Color to give mailboxes containing no unread mail color sidebar_unread color136 default # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Since:
$skip_quoted_offset
in NeoMutt
2016-03-28, $toggle_quoted_show_levels
in
NeoMutt 2019-10-25, <skip-headers>
in NeoMutt 2021-02-05
Dependencies: None
When viewing an email, the
<skip-quoted>
function (by default
the S
key) will scroll past any email
headers or quoted text. Sometimes, a little context is
useful. By setting the
$skip_quoted_offset
variable, you can
select how much of the quoted text is left visible.
When using the <toggle-quoted>
function (by default the T
key), it can
be convenient to hide text that has been quoted multiple
times while still leaving quoted text that is relevant to
the unquoted reply intact. This can be done by setting the
$toggle_quoted_show_levels
variable.
Also, it can be handy to jump directly to the start of the
email body with the <skip-headers>
function (by default the H
key).
# Example NeoMutt config file for the skip-quoted feature. # The 'S' (skip-quoted) command scrolls the pager past the quoted text (usually # indented with '> '. Setting 'pager_skip_quoted_context leaves some lines # of quoted text on screen for context. # Show three quoted lines before the reply set pager_skip_quoted_context = 3 # The 'T' (toggle-quoted) command hides quoted text, but can # be limited to only hiding deeply-nested quotes. # Preserve the first level of quoted text set toggle_quoted_show_levels = 1 # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
The “status-color” feature allows you to theme different parts of the status bar (also when it's used by the index).
Unlike normal color commands, color status
can now
take up to 2 extra parameters (regex, num).
color
status
foreground
background
[
regex
[
num
]]
With zero parameters, NeoMutt will set the default color for the entire status bar.
With one parameter, NeoMutt will only color the parts matching the regex.
With two parameters, NeoMutt will only color the num'th sub-match of the regex.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the status-color feature. # The 'status-color' feature allows you to theme different parts of # the status bar (also when it's used by the index). # For the examples below, set some defaults set status_format='-%r-NeoMutt: %f [Msgs:%<M?%M/>%m%<n? New:%n>%<o? Old:%o>%<d? Del:%d>\ %<F? Flag:%F>%<t? Tag:%t>%<p? Post:%p>%<b? Inc:%b>%<l? %l>]---(%s/%S)-%>-(%P)---' set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-15.15L (%<l?%4l&%4c>) %s' set use_threads=yes set sort=last-date-received set sort_aux=date # 'status color' can take up to 2 extra parameters # color status foreground background [ regex [ num ]] # 0 extra parameters # Set the default color for the entire status line color status blue white # 1 extra parameter # Set the color for a matching pattern # color status foreground background regex # Highlight New, Deleted, or Flagged emails color status brightred white '(New|Del|Flag):[0-9]+' # Highlight mailbox ordering if it's different from the default # First, highlight anything (*/*) color status brightred default '\([^)]+/[^)]+\)' # Then override the color for one specific case color status default default '\(threads/last-date-received\)' # 2 extra parameters # Set the color for the nth submatch of a pattern # color status foreground background regex num # Highlight the contents of the []s but not the [] themselves color status red default '\[([^]]+)\]' 1 # The '1' refers to the first regex submatch, which is the inner # part in ()s # Highlight the mailbox color status brightwhite default 'NeoMutt: ([^ ]+)' 1 # Search for 'NeoMutt: ' but only highlight what comes after it # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
The “TLS-SNI” feature adds support for TLS virtual hosting. If your mail server doesn't support this everything will still work normally.
TLS supports sending the expected server hostname during the handshake, via the SNI extension. This can be used to select a server certificate to issue to the client, permitting virtual-hosting without requiring multiple IP addresses.
This has been tested against Exim 4.80, which optionally logs SNI and can perform vhosting.
To verify TLS SNI support by a server, you can use:
openssl s_client -host <imap server> -port <port> -tls1 -servername <imap server>
Since: NeoMutt 2016-09-10, NeoMutt 1.7.0
If IMAP is enabled, the trash folder will use it wisely
In NeoMutt, when you “delete” an email it is first marked deleted. The email isn't really gone until <sync-mailbox> is called. This happens when the user leaves the folder, or the function is called manually.
After <sync-mailbox>
has been called the
email is gone forever.
The $trash variable defines a folder in which to keep old emails. As before, first you mark emails for deletion. When <sync-mailbox> is called the emails are moved to the trash folder.
The $trash
path can be either a full directory, or
be relative to the $folder variable,
like the mailboxes
command.
Emails deleted from the trash folder are gone forever.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the 'trash' feature. # This feature defines a new 'trash' folder. # When mail is deleted it will be moved to this folder. # Folder in which to put deleted emails set trash='+Trash' set trash='/home/flatcap/Mail/Trash' # The default delete key 'd' will move an email to the 'trash' folder # Bind 'D' to REALLY delete an email bind index D purge-message # Note: Deleting emails from the 'trash' folder will REALLY delete them. # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
The “Use Threads” feature adds a new config variable to allow more precise control of how threads are displayed in the index. Whether threads are in use is now orthogonal from how messages are sorted.
The “Use Threads” feature adds no new functions
to NeoMutt. The existing functions
<sort-mailbox>
and
<sort-reverse>
are updated to
toggle the state of $use_threads
once it
has been set, while preserving backwards-compatible behavior
on $sort
if this feature is not used.
The “Use Threads” feature adds one new config
variable, $use_threads,
which is an enumeration of possible thread views. The
variable defaults to unset for the original behavior of
overloading $sort=threads to
enable sorting. It can be set to flat
(or no
) for an unthreaded view based on
$sort
, to threads
(or
yes
) for a threaded view where roots
appear above children, or to reverse
for
a threaded view where children appear above roots.
When sorting by threads, the value of $sort determines which thread floats
to the top. If $sort
does not contain
reverse-
, the latest thread goes to the
bottom for use_threads=threads
and to the
top for use_threads=reverse
; the
direction of float is swapped if $sort
also uses reverse-
. If
$sort
includes last-
,
the overall thread is sorted by its descendant at any depth
which would sort last in a flat view; otherwise, the overall
thread is sorted solely by the thread root. The
last-
prefix is ignored when
use_threads=flat
.
Within a single thread, the value of $sort_aux determines how siblings
are sorted. The same prefixes apply as for
$sort
, although it is less common to use
the last-
prefix.
The “Use Threads” feature also modifies the
existing config variable $status_format, adding the
%T
expando which shows the current
threading method.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the use-threads feature. # ------------------------------------------------------------ # Default configuration: flat view sorted by date # selecting threads with <sort-mailbox> changes $sort #set use_threads=unset sort=date sort_aux=date # Modern configuration: explicit flat view sorted by date # selecting threads with <sort-mailbox> changes $use_threads set use_threads=no sort=date sort_aux=date # Anne 12:01 cover letter for thread 1 # Anne 12:02 part 1 of thread 1 # Anne 12:03 part 2 of thread 1 # Anne 12:04 part 3 of thread 1 # Barbara 12:05 thread 2 # Claire 12:06 thread 3 # Diane 12:07 re: part 2 of thread 1 # Erica 12:08 re: thread 2 # ------------------------------------------------------------ # Legacy configuration: sorting threads by date started #set sort=threads sort_aux=date # Modern configuration for the same # Latest root message sorts last set use_threads=yes sort=date sort_aux=date # Anne 12:01 cover letter for thread 1 # Anne 12:02 |->part 1 of thread 1 # Anne 12:03 |->part 2 of thread 1 # Diane 12:07 | `->re: part 2 of thread 1 # Anne 12:04 `->part 3 of thread 1 # Barbara 12:05 thread 2 # Erica 12:08 `->re: thread 2 # Claire 12:06 thread 3 # ------------------------------------------------------------ # Legacy configuration: display threads upside-down #set sort=reverse-threads sort_aux=date # Modern configuration for the same # Latest root message sorts first set use_threads=reverse sort=date sort_aux=date # Claire 12:06 thread 3 # Erica 12:08 ,->re: thread 2 # Barbara 12:05 thread 2 # Anne 12:04 ,->part 3 of thread 1 # Diane 12:07 | ,->re: part 2 of thread 1 # Anne 12:03 |->part 2 of thread 1 # Anne 12:02 |->part 1 of thread 1 # Anne 12:01 cover letter for thread 1 # ------------------------------------------------------------ # Legacy configuration: recently active thread/subthread first #set sort=threads sort_aux=reverse-last-date # Modern configuration for the same # Note that subthreads are also rearranged set use_threads=threads sort=reverse-last-date sort_aux=reverse-last-date # Barbara 12:05 thread 2 # Erica 12:08 `->re: thread 2 # Anne 12:01 cover letter for thread 1 # Anne 12:03 |->part 2 of thread 1 # Diane 12:07 | `->re: part 2 of thread 1 # Anne 12:04 |->part 3 of thread 1 # Anne 12:02 `->part 1 of thread 1 # Claire 12:06 thread 3 # ------------------------------------------------------------ # Modern configuration: threads keep date order, recently active thread last # (not possible with legacy configuration) set use_threads=threads sort=last-date sort_aux=date # Claire 12:06 thread 3 # Anne 12:01 cover letter for thread 1 # Anne 12:02 |->part 1 of thread 1 # Anne 12:03 |->part 2 of thread 1 # Diane 12:07 | `->re: part 2 of thread 1 # Anne 12:04 `->part 3 of thread 1 # Barbara 12:05 thread 2 # Erica 12:08 `->re: thread 2 # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Even though use_threads
accepts the
values yes
and no
, it
does not behave like a boolean or quad-option variable. A
bare set use_threads
performs a query
rather than setting it to yes
, and the
variable is not usable with toggle
.
NeoMutt can be compiled with Autocrypt support by running
configure
with the
--autocrypt
flag. Autocrypt provides
easy to use, passive protection against data collection. Keys are
distributed via an Autocrypt:
header added to
emails. It does not protect against active
adversaries, and so should not be considered a substitute for
normal encryption via your keyring, using key signing and the web
of trust to verify identities. With an understanding of these
limitations, Autocrypt still provides an easy way to minimize
cleartext emails sent between common correspondents, without
having to explicitly exchange keys. More information can be found
at https://autocrypt.org/.
Autocrypt requires support for ECC cryptography, and NeoMutt by default will generate ECC keys. Therefore GnuPG 2.1 or greater is required. Additionally, NeoMutt's Autocrypt implementation uses GPGME and requires at least version 1.8.0.
Account and peer information is stored in a sqlite3 database, and
so NeoMutt must be configured with the --with-sqlite
flag when autocrypt is enabled.
It is highly recommended that NeoMutt be configured with
--idn2
(enabled by default)
so that Autocrypt can properly deal with international domain names.
While NeoMutt uses GPGME for Autocrypt, normal keyring operations
can still be performed via classic mode (i.e. with
$crypt_use_gpgme unset).
However, to avoid unnecessary prompts, it is recommended gpg not
be configured in loopback pinentry
mode, and
that $pgp_use_gpg_agent
remain set (the default).
To enable Autocrypt, set $autocrypt, and if desired change the
value of $autocrypt_dir in
your muttrc. The first time NeoMutt is run after that, you will be
prompted to create
$autocrypt_dir. NeoMutt will then
automatically create an sqlite3 database and GPG keyring in that
directory. Note since these files should be considered private,
NeoMutt will create this directory with mode
700
. If you create the directory manually,
you should do the same.
NeoMutt recommends keeping the $autocrypt_dir directory set
differently from your GnuPG keyring directory
(e.g. ~/.gnupg
). Keys are automatically
imported into the keyring from Autocrypt:
headers. Compared to standard “web of trust” keys,
Autocrypt keys are somewhat ephemeral, and the autocrypt
database is used to track when keys change or fall out of use.
Having these keys mixed in with your normal keyring will make it
more difficult to use features such as
$crypt_opportunistic_encrypt
and Autocrypt at the same time.
The $autocrypt_dir variable is not designed to be changed while NeoMutt is running. The database is created (if necessary) and connected to during startup. Changing the variable can result in a situation where NeoMutt is looking in one place for the database and a different place for the GPG keyring, resulting in strange behavior.
Once the directory, keyring, and database are created, NeoMutt will
ask whether you would like to create an account. In order to
use Autocrypt, each sending address needs an account. As a
convenience you can create an account during the first run. If
you would like to add additional accounts later, this can be
done via the <autocrypt-acct-menu>
function in the index, by default bound to A
.
Account creation will first ask you for an email address. Next, it will ask whether you want to create a new key or select an existing key. (Note key selection takes place from the $autocrypt_dir keyring, which will normally be empty during first run). Finally, it will ask whether this address should prefer encryption or not. Autocrypt 1.1 allows automatically enabling encryption if both sender and receiver have set “prefer encryption”. Otherwise, you will need to manually enable autocrypt encryption in the compose menu. For more details, see the compose menu section below.
After optionally creating an account, NeoMutt will prompt you to scan mailboxes for Autocrypt headers. This step occurs because header cached messages are not re-scanned for Autocrypt headers. Scanning during this step will temporarily disable the header cache while opening each mailbox. If you wish to do this manually later, you can simulate the same thing by unsetting $header_cache and opening a mailbox.
A final technical note: the first run process takes place between reading the muttrc and opening the initial mailbox. Some muttrc files will push macros to be run after opening the mailbox. To prevent this from interfering with the first run prompts, NeoMutt disables all macros during the first run.
When enabled, Autocrypt will add a line to the compose menu with
two fields: Autocrypt:
and
Recommendation:
.
The Autocrypt:
field shows whether the
message will be encrypted by Autocrypt when sent. It has two
values: Encrypt
and Off
.
Encrypt
can be enabled using the
<autocrypt-menu>
function, by default
bound to o
.
The Recommendation:
field shows the output of
the Autocrypt recommendation engine. This can have one of five
values:
Off
means the engine is disabled. This
can happen if the From address doesn't have an autocrypt
account, or if the account has been manually disabled.
No
means one or more recipients are
missing an autocrypt key, or the key found is unusable
(i.e. expired, revoked, disabled, invalid, or not usable for
encryption.)
Discouraged
means a key was found for
every recipient, but the engine is not confident the message
will be decryptable by the recipient. This can happen if
the key hasn't been used recently (compared to their last
seen email).
It can also happen if the key wasn't seen first-hand from
the sender. Autocrypt has a feature where recipient keys
can be included in group-encrypted emails. This allows you
to reply to a conversation where you don't have a key
first-hand from one of the other recipients. However, those
keys are not trusted as much as from first-hand emails, so
the engine warns you with a Discouraged
status.
Available
means a key was found for every
recipient, and the engine believes all keys are recent and
seen from the recipient first hand. However, either you or
one of the recipients chose not to specify “prefer
encryption”.
Yes
is the same as
Available
, with the addition that you and
all recipients have specified “prefer encryption”.
This value will automatically enable
encryption, unless you have manually switched it off or
enabled regular encryption or signing via the
<pgp-menu>
.
As mentioned above the <autocrypt-menu>
function, by default bound to o
, can be used
to change the Encrypt:
field value.
(e)ncrypt
will toggle encryption on.
(c)lear
will toggle encryption off. If
either of these are chosen, the field will remain in that state
despite what the Recommendation:
field shows.
Lastly, (a)utomatic
will set the value based
on the recommendation engine's output.
Autocrypt encryption defers to normal encryption or signing. Anything that enables normal encryption or signing will cause autocrypt encryption to turn off. The only exception is when replying to an autocrypt-encrypted email (i.e. an email decrypted from the $autocrypt_dir keyring). Then, if $autocrypt_reply is set, autocrypt mode will be forced on, overriding the settings $crypt_auto_sign, $crypt_auto_encrypt, $crypt_reply_encrypt, $crypt_reply_sign, $crypt_reply_sign_encrypted, and $crypt_opportunistic_encrypt.
When postponing a message, autocrypt will respect $postpone_encrypt, but will use the autocrypt account key to encrypt the message. Be sure to set $postpone_encrypt to ensure postponed messages marked for autocrypt encryption are encrypted.
The Autocrypt Account Menu is available from the index via
<autocrypt-acct-menu>
, by default bound
to A
. See Autocrypt Account Menu for the
list of functions and their default keybindings.
In this menu, you can create new accounts, delete accounts, toggle an account active/inactive, and toggle the “prefer encryption” flag for an account.
Deleting an account only removes the account from the database. The GPG key is kept, to ensure you still have the ability to read past encrypted emails.
The Autocrypt 1.1 “Setup Message” feature is not available yet, but will be added in the future.
NeoMutt by default partitions Autocrypt from normal keyring encryption/signing. It does this by using a separate GPG keyring (in $autocrypt_dir) and creating a new ECC key in that keyring for accounts. There are good reasons for doing this by default. It keeps random keys found inside email headers out of your normal keyring. ECC keys are compact and better suited for email headers. Autocrypt key selection is completely different from “web of trust” key selection, based on last-seen rules as opposed to trust and validity. It also allows NeoMutt to distinguish Autocrypt encrypted emails from regular encrypted emails, and set the mode appropriately when replying to each type of email.
Still, some users may want to use an existing key from their
normal keyring for Autocrypt too. There are two ways this can
be accomplished. The recommended way is to
set $autocrypt_dir to your
normal keyring directory (e.g. ~/.gnupg
).
During account creation, choosing “(s)elect existing GPG
key” will then list and allow selecting your existing key
for the new account.
An alternative is to copy your key over to the Autocrypt keyring, but there is a severe downside. NeoMutt first tries to decrypt messages using the Autocrypt keyring, and if that fails tries the normal keyring second. This means all encrypted emails to that key will be decrypted, and have signatures verified from, the Autocrypt keyring. Keys signatures and web of trust from your normal keyring will no longer show up in signatures when decrypting.
For that reason, if you want to use an existing key from your
normal keyring, it is recommended to just set $autocrypt_dir to
~/.gnupg
. This allows “web of
trust” to show an appropriate signature message for
verified messages. Autocrypt header keys will be imported into
your keyring, but if you don't want them mixed you should
strongly consider using a separate autocrypt key and keyring
instead.
Both methods have a couple additional caveats:
Replying to an Autocrypt decrypted message by default forces Autocrypt mode on. By sharing the same key, all replies will then start in Autocrypt mode, even if a message wasn't sent by one of your Autocrypt peers. $autocrypt_reply can be unset to allow manual control of the mode when replying.
When NeoMutt creates an account from a GPG key, it exports the public key, base64 encodes it, and stores that value in the sqlite3 database. The value is then used in the Autocrypt header added to outgoing emails. The ECC keys NeoMutt creates don't change, but if you use external keys that expire, when you resign to extend the expiration you will need to recreate the Autocrypt account using the account menu. Otherwise the Autocrypt header will contain the old expired exported keydata.
Table of Contents
First of all, NeoMutt contains no security holes included by intention but may contain unknown security holes. As a consequence, please run NeoMutt only with as few permissions as possible. Especially, do not run NeoMutt as the super user.
When configuring NeoMutt, there're some points to note about secure setups so please read this chapter carefully.
Although NeoMutt can be told the various passwords for accounts, please never store passwords in configuration files. Besides the fact that the system's operator can always read them, you could forget to mask it out when reporting a bug or asking for help via a mailing list. Even worse, your mail including your password could be archived by internet search engines, mail-to-news gateways etc. It may already be too late before you notice your mistake.
NeoMutt uses many temporary files for viewing messages, verifying digital signatures, etc. As long as being used, these files are visible by other users and maybe even readable in case of misconfiguration. Also, a different location for these files may be desired which can be changed via the $tmp_dir variable.
Since 2023-02-18 NeoMutt generates random Message-Id: headers, which do not leak any information beyond their randomness.
As NeoMutt be can be set up to be the mail client to handle
mailto:
style links in websites, there're security
considerations, too. Arbitrary header fields can be embedded in these
links which could override existing header fields or attach arbitrary
files using
the Attach: pseudoheader. This
may be problematic if the
$edit-headers variable is
unset, i.e. the user doesn't want to see header
fields while editing the message and doesn't pay enough attention to
the compose menu's listing of attachments.
For example, following a link like
mailto:joe@host?Attach=~/.gnupg/secring.gpg
will send out the user's private gnupg keyring to
joe@host
if the user doesn't follow the
information on screen carefully enough.
To prevent these issues, NeoMutt by default only accepts the
Subject
and Body
headers.
Allowed headers can be adjusted with the
mailto_allow
and
unmailto_allow
commands.
NeoMutt in many places has to rely on external applications or for convenience supports mechanisms involving external applications.
One of these is the mailcap
mechanism as defined by
RFC1524. Details about a secure use of the mailcap mechanisms is given
in Section 3.2, “Secure Use of Mailcap”.
Besides the mailcap mechanism, NeoMutt uses a number of other external utilities for operation, for example to provide crypto support, in backtick expansion in configuration files or format string filters. The same security considerations apply for these as for tools involved via mailcap.
Table of Contents
NeoMutt's performance when reading mailboxes can be improved in two ways:
For remote folders (IMAP and POP) as well as folders using one-file-per message storage (Maildir and MH), NeoMutt's performance can be greatly improved using header caching. using a single database per folder.
NeoMutt provides the $read_inc and $write_inc variables to specify at which rate to update progress counters. If these values are too low, NeoMutt may spend more time on updating the progress counter than it spends on actually reading/writing folders.
For example, when opening a maildir folder with a few thousand messages, the default value for $read_inc may be too low. It can be tuned on on a folder-basis using folder-hooks:
# use very high $read_inc to speed up reading hcache'd maildirs folder-hook . 'set read_inc=1000' # use lower value for reading slower remote IMAP folders folder-hook ^imap 'set read_inc=100' # use even lower value for reading even slower remote POP folders folder-hook ^pop 'set read_inc=1'
These settings work on a per-message basis. However, as messages may greatly differ in size and certain operations are much faster than others, even per-folder settings of the increment variables may not be desirable as they produce either too few or too much progress updates. Thus, NeoMutt allows to limit the number of progress updates per second it'll actually send to the terminal using the $time_inc variable.
Reading messages from remote folders such as IMAP an POP can be slow especially for large mailboxes since NeoMutt only caches a very limited number of recently viewed messages (usually 10) per session (so that it will be gone for the next session.)
To improve performance and permanently cache whole messages and headers, please refer to body caching and header caching for details.
Additionally, it may be worth trying some of NeoMutt's experimental features. $imap_qresync (which requires header caching) can provide a huge speed boost opening mailboxes if your IMAP server supports it. $imap_deflate enables compression, which can also noticeably reduce download time for large mailboxes and messages.
When searching mailboxes either via a search or a limit action, for some patterns NeoMutt distinguishes between regular expression and string searches. For regular expressions, patterns are prefixed with “~” and with “=” for string searches.
Even though a regular expression search is fast, it's several times slower than a pure string search which is noticeable especially on large folders. As a consequence, a string search should be used instead of a regular expression search if the user already knows enough about the search pattern.
For example, when limiting a large folder to all messages sent to or by
an author, it's much faster to search for the initial part of an e-mail
address via =Luser@
instead of
~Luser@
. This is especially true for searching
message bodies since a larger amount of input has to be searched.
As for regular expressions, a lower case string search pattern makes NeoMutt perform a case-insensitive search except for IMAP (because for IMAP NeoMutt performs server-side searches which don't support case-insensitivity).
Table of Contents
Running neomutt
with no arguments will make NeoMutt
attempt to read your spool mailbox. However, it is possible to read
other mailboxes and to send messages from the command line as well.
Table 9.1. Command line options
Option | Description |
---|---|
-- |
Special argument forces NeoMutt to stop option parsing and
treat remaining arguments as address es even
if they start with a dash
|
-A alias |
Print an expanded version of the given alias
to stdout and exit
|
-a file |
Attach one or more file s to a message (must
be the last option). Add any addresses after the
'--' argument, e.g.:
neomutt -a image.jpg -- address1 neomutt -a image.jpg *.png -- address1 address2 |
-B | Run in batch mode (do not start the ncurses UI) |
-b address | Specify a blind carbon copy (Bcc) recipient |
-C | Enable cryptographic operations in the cases in which they're disabled by default. Those include batch mode, sending a postponed message, and resending a message. |
-c address | Specify a carbon copy (Cc) recipient |
-D | Dump all config variables as 'name=value' pairs to stdout |
-D -O | Like -D, but show one-liner documentation |
-D -S | Like -D, but hide the value of sensitive variables |
-d level |
Log debugging output to a file (default is
"~/.neomuttdebug0 ").
The level can range from 1–5 and
affects verbosity (a value of 2 is recommended). Using this
option along with -l is useful
to log the early startup process (before reading any
configuration and hence
$debug_level and
$debug_file)
|
-E |
Edit
draft (-H) or
include (-i)
file during message composition
|
-e command |
Specify a command to be run after reading
the config files
|
-F config | Specify an alternative initialization file to read, see section Location of Initialization Files for a list of regular configuration files |
-f mailbox |
Specify a mailbox (as defined with
mailboxes command)
to load
|
-G | Start NeoMutt with a listing of subscribed newsgroups |
-g server |
Like -G, but start at
specified news server
|
-H draft |
Specify a draft file with header and body
for message composing
|
-h | Print this help message and exit |
-i include |
Specify an include file to be embedded in
the body of a message
|
-l file |
Specify a file for debugging output (default
"~/.neomuttdebug0 "). This
overrules $debug_file
setting and NeoMutt keeps up to five debug logs ({
file |
$debug_file |
~/.neomuttdebug }[0-4 ])
before override the oldest file
|
-m type |
Specify a default mailbox format type for
newly created folders. The type is either
MH, MMDF, Maildir or mbox (case-insensitive)
|
-n | Do not read the system-wide configuration file |
-p | Resume a prior postponed message, if any |
-Q variable |
Query a configuration variable and print its
value to stdout (after the config has been read and any
commands executed). Adding -O will display
one-liner documentation.
|
-R | Open mailbox in read-only mode |
-s subject |
Specify a subject (must be enclosed in
quotes if it has spaces)
|
-v | Print the NeoMutt version and compile-time definitions and exit |
-vv | Print the NeoMutt license and copyright information and exit |
-y | Start NeoMutt with a listing of all defined mailboxes |
-Z | Open the first mailbox with new message or exit immediately with exit code 1 if none is found in all defined mailboxes |
-z | Open the first or specified (-f) mailbox if it holds any message or exit immediately with exit code 1 otherwise |
To read messages in a mailbox or exit immediately
neomutt
[
-nz
] [
-F
config
] [
-m
type
] [
-f
mailbox
]
To compose a new message
neomutt
[
-Enx
] [
-F
config
] [
-b
address
] [
-c
address
] [
-H
draft
] [
-i
include
] [
-s
subject
] [
-a
file
[...]
--
] {
address
|
mailto_url
...}
NeoMutt also supports a “batch” mode to send prepared messages. Simply redirect input from the file you wish to send. For example,
neomutt -s "data set for run #2" professor@bigschool.edu < ~/run2.dat
will send a message to
<professor@bigschool.edu>
with a subject of
“data set for run #2”. In the body of the message will be
the contents of the file “~/run2.dat”.
An include file passed with -i
will be used as the
body of the message. When combined with -E
, the
include file will be directly edited during message composition. The
file will be modified regardless of whether the message is sent or
aborted.
A draft file passed with -H
will be used as the
initial header and body for the message. Multipart messages can be used
as a draft file. When combined with -E
, the draft
file will be updated to the final state of the message after
composition, regardless of whether the message is sent, aborted, or
even postponed. Note that if the message is sent encrypted or signed,
the draft file will be saved that way too.
All files passed with -a
file
will be attached as a MIME part to the message. To attach a single or
several files, use --
to separate files and
recipient addresses:
neomutt -a image.png -- some@one.org
or
neomutt -a *.png -- some@one.org
The -a
option must be last in the option list.
In addition to accepting a list of email addresses, NeoMutt also
accepts a URL with the mailto:
schema as specified
in RFC2368. This is useful when configuring a web browser to launch
NeoMutt when clicking on mailto links.
neomutt mailto:some@one.org?subject=test&cc=other@one.org
The following are the commands understood by NeoMutt:
account-hook
regex
command
alternates
[
-group
name
...]
regex
[
regex
...]
unalternates
[
-group
name
...] {
*
|
regex
... }
alternative_order
mime-type
[
/mime-subtype
] [
mime-type
[
/mime-subtype
]
...]
unalternative_order
{ * | [
mime-type
[
/mime-subtype
]
...]}
attachments
{ + | - }
disposition
mime-type
[
mime-type
...]
unattachments
{ + | - }
disposition
mime-type
[
mime-type
...]
attachments
?
unattachments
*
auto_view
mime-type
[
/mime-subtype
] [
mime-type
[
/mime-subtype
]
...]
unauto_view
{ * | [
mime-type
[
/mime-subtype
]
...]}
cd
directory
charset-hook
alias
charset
iconv-hook
charset
local-charset
crypt-hook
regex
keyid
exec
function
[
function
...]
fcc-save-hook
pattern
mailbox
fcc-hook
pattern
mailbox
save-hook
pattern
mailbox
folder-hook
regex
command
hdr_order
header
[
header
...]
unhdr_order
{
*
|
header
... }
index-format-hook
name
[!]pattern
format-string
lists
[
-group
name
]
regex
[
regex
...]
unlists
[
-group
name
...] {
*
|
regex
... }
subscribe
[
-group
name
...]
regex
[
regex
...]
unsubscribe
[
-group
name
...] {
*
|
regex
... }
mailboxes
mailbox
[
mailbox
...]
named-mailboxes
description
mailbox
[
description mailbox
...]
unmailboxes
{
*
|
mailbox
... }
mailto_allow
{
*
|
header-field
... }
unmailto_allow
{
*
|
header-field
... }
mbox-hook
[
-noregex
]
regex
mailbox
message-hook
pattern
command
mime_lookup
mime-type
[
/mime-subtype
] [
mime-type
[
/mime-subtype
]
...]
unmime_lookup
{ * | [
mime-type
[
/mime-subtype
]
...]}
open-hook
regex
"shell-command"
close-hook
regex
"shell-command"
append-hook
regex
"shell-command"
push
string
reply-hook
pattern
command
send-hook
pattern
command
send2-hook
pattern
command
sidebar_pin
mailbox
[
mailbox
...]
sidebar_unpin
{
*
|
mailbox
... }
source
filename
subjectrx
regex
replacement
unsubjectrx
{
*
|
regex
}
subscribe-to
imap-folder-uri
unsubscribe-from
imap-folder-uri
timeout-hook
command
startup-hook
command
shutdown-hook
command
unhook
{
*
|
hook-type
}
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, hitting backspace against an empty prompt aborts the prompt.
Type: string
Default: “007
”
Specifies the key that can be used to abort prompts. The format is the same as used in "bind" commands. The default is equivalent to "Ctrl-G". Note that the specified key should not be used in other bindings, as the abort operation has higher precedence and the binding will not have the desired effect.
Example:
set abort_key = "<Esc>"
Please note that when using <Esc> as the abort key, you may also want to set the environment variable ESCDELAY to a low value or even 0 which will reduce the time that ncurses waits to distinguish singular <Esc> key presses from the start of a terminal escape sequence. The default time is 1000 milliseconds and thus quite noticeable.
Type: quadoption
Default: no
If set to yes, when composing messages containing the regular expression specified by $abort_noattach_regex and no attachments are given, composition will be aborted. If set to no, composing messages as such will never be aborted.
Example:
set abort_noattach_regex = "\\<attach(|ed|ments?)\\>"
Type: regular expression
Default: “\<(attach|attached|attachments?)\>
”
Specifies a regular expression to match against the body of the message, to determine if an attachment was mentioned but mistakenly forgotten. If it matches, $abort_noattach will be consulted to determine if message sending will be aborted.
Like other regular expressions in NeoMutt, the search is case sensitive if the pattern contains at least one upper case letter, and case insensitive otherwise.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
If set to yes, when composing messages and no subject is given at the subject prompt, composition will be aborted. If set to no, composing messages with no subject given at the subject prompt will never be aborted.
Type: quadoption
Default: yes
If set to yes, composition will automatically abort after editing the message body if no changes are made to the file (this check only happens after the first edit of the file). When set to no, composition will never be aborted.
Type: command
Default: (empty)
If set, this command is used to retrieve account credentials. The command is invoked passing a number of --key value arguments with the specifics of the account to lookup. The command writes to standard output a number of key: value lines. Currently supported arguments are --hostname, --username, and --type, where type can be any of imap, imaps, pop, pops, smtp, smtps, nntp, and nntps. Currently supported output lines are login, username, and password.
Type: path
Default: “~/.neomuttrc
”
The default file in which to save aliases created by the
<create-alias>
function. Entries added to this file are
encoded in the character set specified by $config_charset if it
is set or the current character set otherwise.
Note: NeoMutt will not automatically source this file; you must explicitly use the "source" command for it to be executed in case this option points to a dedicated alias file.
The default for this option is the currently used neomuttrc file, or "~/.neomuttrc" if no user neomuttrc was found.
Type: string
Default: “%3n %f%t %-15a %-56r | %c
”
Specifies the format of the data displayed for the "alias" menu. The
following printf(3)
-style sequences are available:
%a | Alias name |
%c | Comment |
%f | Flags - currently, a "d" for an alias marked for deletion |
%n | Index number |
%r | Address which alias expands to |
%t | Character which indicates if the alias is tagged for inclusion |
%Y | Comma-separated tags |
%>X | right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X" |
%|X | pad to the end of the line with character "X" |
%*X | soft-fill with character "X" as pad |
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Controls whether 8-bit data is converted to 7-bit using either Quoted- Printable or Base64 encoding when sending mail.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Controls whether ANSI color codes in messages (and color tags in rich text messages) are to be interpreted. Messages containing these codes are rare, but if this option is set, their text will be colored accordingly. Note that this may override your color choices, and even present a security problem, since a message could include a line like
[-- PGP output follows ...
and give it the same color as your attachment color (see also $crypt_timestamp).
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, an arrow ("->") will be used to indicate the current entry in menus instead of highlighting the whole line. On slow network or modem links this will make response faster because there is less that has to be redrawn on the screen when moving to the next or previous entries in the menu.
Type: string
Default: “->
”
Specifies the string of arrow_cursor when arrow_cursor enabled.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will use plain ASCII characters when displaying thread and attachment trees, instead of the default ACS characters.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will prompt you for blind-carbon-copy (Bcc) recipients before editing an outgoing message.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will prompt you for carbon-copy (Cc) recipients before editing the body of an outgoing message.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will prompt you for follow-up groups before editing the body of an outgoing message.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will prompt you for x-comment-to field before editing the body of an outgoing message.
Type: string list
Default: (empty)
This variable is a colon-separated list of character encoding schemes for messages without character encoding indication. Header field values and message body content without character encoding indication would be assumed that they are written in one of this list. By default, all the header fields and message body without any charset indication are assumed to be in "us-ascii".
For example, Japanese users might prefer this:
set assumed_charset="iso-2022-jp:euc-jp:shift_jis:utf-8"
However, only the first content is valid for the message body.
Type: string list
Default: (empty)
This variable is a colon-separated list of character encoding schemes for text file attachments. NeoMutt uses this setting to guess which encoding files being attached are encoded in to convert them to a proper character set given in $send_charset.
If unset, the value of $charset will be used instead. For example, the following configuration would work for Japanese text handling:
set attach_charset="iso-2022-jp:euc-jp:shift_jis:utf-8"
Note: for Japanese users, "iso-2022-*" must be put at the head of the value as shown above if included.
Type: string
Default: “%u%D%I %t%4n %T%d %> [%.7m/%.10M, %.6e%<C?, %C>, %s]
”
This variable describes the format of the "attachment" menu. The
following printf(3)
-style sequences are understood:
%C | Charset |
%c | Requires charset conversion ("n" or "c") |
%D | Deleted flag |
%d | Description (if none, falls back to %F) |
%e | MIME content-transfer-encoding |
%f | Filename |
%F | Filename in content-disposition header (if none, falls back to %f) |
%I | Disposition ("I" for inline, "A" for attachment) |
%m | Major MIME type |
%M | MIME subtype |
%n | Attachment number |
%Q | "Q", if MIME part qualifies for attachment counting |
%s | Size (see formatstrings-size) |
%T | Graphic tree characters |
%t | Tagged flag |
%u | Unlink (=to delete) flag |
%X | Number of qualifying MIME parts in this part and its children (please see the "attachments" section for possible speed effects) |
%>X | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X" |
%|X | Pad to the end of the line with character "X" |
%*X | Soft-fill with character "X" as pad |
For an explanation of "soft-fill", see the $index_format documentation.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This variable, when set to true, will cause attachments to be saved to the 'attach_save_dir' location without prompting the user for the filename.
Type: string
Default: “\n
”
The separator to add between attachments when operating (saving, printing, piping, etc) on a list of tagged attachments.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If this variable is unset, when operating (saving, printing, piping, etc) on a list of tagged attachments, NeoMutt will concatenate the attachments and will operate on them as a single attachment. The $attach_sep separator is added after each attachment. When set, NeoMutt will operate on the attachments one by one.
Type: string
Default: “On %d, %n wrote:
”
This is the string that will precede a replied-to message which is quoted in the main body of the reply (this is the case when $include is set).
For a full listing of defined printf(3)
-like sequences see the section
on $index_format. See also $attribution_locale.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
The locale used by strftime(3)
to format dates in the
attribution strings. Legal values are the strings your system
accepts for the locale environment variable $LC_TIME
.
This variable is to allow the attribution date format to be customized by recipient or folder using hooks. By default, NeoMutt will use your locale environment, so there is no need to set this except to override that default.
Affected variables are: $attribution_intro, $attribution_trailer, $forward_attribution_intro, $forward_attribution_trailer, $indent_string.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Similar to the $attribution_intro variable, this is the string that will come after a replied-to message which is quoted in the main body of the reply (this is the case when $include is set).
For a full listing of defined printf(3)
-like sequences see the section
on $index_format. See also $attribution_locale.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set along with $edit_headers, NeoMutt will skip the initial send-menu (prompting for subject and recipients) and allow you to immediately begin editing the body of your message. The send-menu may still be accessed once you have finished editing the body of your message.
Note: when this option is set, you can't use send-hooks that depend on the recipients when composing a new (non-reply) message, as the initial list of recipients is empty.
Also see $fast_reply.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt assumes the presence of a List-Post header means the recipient is subscribed to the list. Unless the mailing list is in the "unsubscribe" or "unlist" lists, it will be added to the "subscribe" list. Parsing and checking these things slows header reading down, so this option is disabled by default.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, functions in the index menu which affect a message
will be applied to all tagged messages (if there are any). When
unset, you must first use the <tag-prefix>
function (bound to ";"
by default) to make the next function apply to all tagged messages.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, enables autocrypt, which provides passive encryption protection with keys exchanged via headers. See "autocryptdoc" for more details. (Autocrypt only)
Type: string
Default: “%4n %-30a %20p %10s
”
This variable describes the format of the "autocrypt account" menu.
The following printf(3)
-style sequences are understood
%a | email address |
%k | gpg keyid |
%n | current entry number |
%p | prefer-encrypt flag |
%s | status flag (active/inactive) |
(Autocrypt only)
Type: path
Default: “~/.mutt/autocrypt
”
This variable sets where autocrypt files are stored, including the GPG keyring and SQLite database. See "autocryptdoc" for more details. (Autocrypt only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, replying to an autocrypt email automatically enables autocrypt in the reply. You may want to unset this if you're using the same key for autocrypt as normal web-of-trust, so that autocrypt isn't forced on for all encrypted replies. (Autocrypt only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When this variable is set, NeoMutt will beep when an error occurs.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When this variable is set, NeoMutt will beep whenever it prints a message notifying you of new mail. This is independent of the setting of the $beep variable.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
Controls whether you will be asked to confirm bouncing messages. If set to yes you don't get asked if you want to bounce a message. Setting this variable to no is not generally useful, and thus not recommended, because you are unable to bounce messages.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When this variable is set, NeoMutt will include Delivered-To headers when bouncing messages. Postfix users may wish to unset this variable.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When this variable is set, NeoMutt will place the cursor at the beginning of the current line in menus, even when the $arrow_cursor variable is unset, making it easier for blind persons using Braille displays to follow these menus. The option is unset by default because many visual terminals don't permit making the cursor invisible.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When this variable is set, NeoMutt will abbreviate mailbox names in the browser mailbox list, using '~' and '=' shortcuts.
The default "alpha"
setting of $sort_browser uses
locale-based sorting (using strcoll(3)
), which ignores some
punctuation. This can lead to some situations where the order
doesn't make intuitive sense. In those cases, it may be
desirable to unset this variable.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If this variable is set, the browser will group directories before files.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
If this variable is set, NeoMutt will mark all articles in newsgroup as read when you quit the newsgroup (catchup newsgroup).
Type: path
Default: “~/.mutt_certificates
”
This variable specifies the file where the certificates you trust are saved. When an unknown certificate is encountered, you are asked if you accept it or not. If you accept it, the certificate can also be saved in this file and further connections are automatically accepted.
You can also manually add CA certificates in this file. Any server certificate that is signed with one of these CA certificates is also automatically accepted.
Example:
set certificate_file=~/.neomutt/certificates
Type: boolean
Default: no
When this variable is set, the <change-folder>
function
mailbox suggestion will start at the next folder in your "mailboxes"
list, instead of starting at the first folder in the list.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Character set your terminal uses to display and enter textual data. It is also the fallback for $send_charset.
Upon startup NeoMutt tries to derive this value from environment variables
such as $LC_CTYPE
or $LANG
.
Note: It should only be set in case NeoMutt isn't able to determine the character set used correctly.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When this variable is set, NeoMutt will use file size attribute instead of access time when checking for new mail in mbox and mmdf folders.
This variable is unset by default and should only be enabled when new mail detection for these folder types is unreliable or doesn't work.
Note that enabling this variable should happen before any "mailboxes" directives occur in configuration files regarding mbox or mmdf folders because NeoMutt needs to determine the initial new mail status of such a mailbox by performing a fast mailbox scan when it is defined. Afterwards the new mail status is tracked by file size changes.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Note: this option only affects maildir and MH style mailboxes.
When set, NeoMutt will check for new mail delivered while the mailbox is open. Especially with MH mailboxes, this operation can take quite some time since it involves scanning the directory and checking each file to see if it has already been looked at. If this variable is unset, no check for new mail is performed while the mailbox is open.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will collapse all threads when entering a folder.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When unset, NeoMutt will not collapse a thread if it contains any flagged messages.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When unset, NeoMutt will not collapse a thread if it contains any unread messages.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will use and allow 24bit colours (aka truecolor aka directcolor). For colours to work properly support from the terminal is required as well as a properly set TERM environment variable advertising the terminals directcolor capability, e.g. "TERM=xterm-direct".
NeoMutt tries to detect whether the terminal supports 24bit colours and enables this variable if it does. If this fails for some reason, you can force 24bit colours by setting this variable manually. You may also try to force a certain TERM environment variable by starting NeoMutt from a terminal as follows (this results in wrong colours if the terminal does not implement directcolors):
TERM=xterm-direct neomutt
Note: This variable must be set before using any `color` commands.
Type: string
Default: “-- NeoMutt: Compose [Approx. msg size: %l Atts: %a]%>-
”
Controls the format of the status line displayed in the "compose"
menu. This string is similar to $status_format, but has its own
set of printf(3)
-like sequences:
%a | Total number of attachments |
%h | Local hostname |
%l | Approximate size (in bytes) of the current message (see formatstrings-size) |
%v | NeoMutt version string |
%>X | right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X" |
%|X | pad to the end of the line with character "X" |
%*X | soft-fill with character "X" as pad |
See the text describing the $status_format option for more information on how to set $compose_format.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, Neomutt will display user-defined headers (set via my_hdr or from editing with edit-headers).
Type: string
Default: (empty)
When defined, NeoMutt will recode commands in rc files from this encoding to the current character set as specified by $charset and aliases written to $alias_file from the current character set.
Please note that if setting $charset it must be done before setting $config_charset.
Recoding should be avoided as it may render unconvertible characters as question marks which can lead to undesired side effects (for example in regular expressions).
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will prompt for confirmation when appending messages to an existing mailbox.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will prompt for confirmation when saving messages to a mailbox which does not yet exist before creating it.
Type: string
Default: “text/plain
”
Sets the default Content-Type for the body of newly composed messages.
Type: quadoption
Default: yes
This variable controls whether or not copies of your outgoing messages will be saved for later references. Also see $record, $save_name, $force_name and "fcc-hook".
Type: boolean
Default: no
Controls whether NeoMutt will weed headers when invoking the
<decode-copy>
or <decode-save>
functions.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will recurse inside multipart/alternatives while performing attachment searching and counting(see attachments).
Traditionally, multipart/alternative parts have simply represented different encodings of the main content of the email. Unfortunately, some mail clients have started to place email attachments inside one of alternatives. Setting this will allow NeoMutt to find and count matching attachments hidden there, and include them in the index via %X or through ~X pattern matching.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to always attempt to PGP encrypt outgoing messages. This is probably only useful in connection to the "send-hook" command. It can be overridden by use of the pgp menu, when encryption is not required or signing is requested as well. If $smime_is_default is set, then OpenSSL is used instead to create S/MIME messages and settings can be overridden by use of the smime menu instead. (Crypto only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This variable controls whether or not NeoMutt may automatically enable PGP encryption/signing for messages. See also $crypt_auto_encrypt, $crypt_reply_encrypt, $crypt_auto_sign, $crypt_reply_sign and $smime_is_default.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to always attempt to cryptographically sign outgoing messages. This can be overridden by use of the pgp menu, when signing is not required or encryption is requested as well. If $smime_is_default is set, then OpenSSL is used instead to create S/MIME messages and settings can be overridden by use of the smime menu instead of the pgp menu. (Crypto only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This variable controls whether or not NeoMutt may automatically enable S/MIME encryption/signing for messages. See also $crypt_auto_encrypt, $crypt_reply_encrypt, $crypt_auto_sign, $crypt_reply_sign and $smime_is_default.
Type: character string
Default: “SPsK
”
Controls the characters used in cryptography flags.
Character | Default | Description |
1 | S | The mail is signed, and the signature is successfully verified. |
2 | P | The mail is PGP encrypted. |
3 | s | The mail is signed. |
4 | K | The mail contains a PGP public key. |
5 | <space> | The mail has no crypto info. |
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, then you will be prompted for confirmation of keys when using the crypt-hook command. If unset, no such confirmation prompt will be presented. This is generally considered unsafe, especially where typos are concerned.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to automatically enable and disable encryption, based on whether all message recipient keys can be located by NeoMutt.
When this option is enabled, NeoMutt will enable/disable encryption each time the TO, CC, and BCC lists are edited. If $edit_headers is set, NeoMutt will also do so each time the message is edited.
While this is set, encryption can't be manually enabled/disabled. The pgp or smime menus provide a selection to temporarily disable this option for the current message.
If $crypt_auto_encrypt or $crypt_reply_encrypt enable encryption for a message, this option will be disabled for that message. It can be manually re-enabled in the pgp or smime menus. (Crypto only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, this modifies the behavior of $crypt_opportunistic_encrypt to only search for "strong keys", that is, keys with full validity according to the web-of-trust algorithm. A key with marginal or no validity will not enable opportunistic encryption.
For S/MIME, the behavior depends on the backend. Classic S/MIME will filter for certificates with the 't'(trusted) flag in the .index file. The GPGME backend will use the same filters as with OpenPGP, and depends on GPGME's logic for assigning the GPGME_VALIDITY_FULL and GPGME_VALIDITY_ULTIMATE validity flag.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will display protected headers ("Memory Hole") in the pager, When set, NeoMutt will display protected headers in the pager, and will update the index and header cache with revised headers.
Protected headers are stored inside the encrypted or signed part of an an email, to prevent disclosure or tampering. For more information see https://github.com/autocrypt/protected-headers Currently NeoMutt only supports the Subject header.
Encrypted messages using protected headers often substitute the exposed
Subject header with a dummy value (see $crypt_protected_headers_subject).
NeoMutt will update its concept of the correct subject after the
message is opened, i.e. via the <display-message>
function.
If you reply to a message before opening it, NeoMutt will end up using
the dummy Subject header, so be sure to open such a message first.
(Crypto only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
When $crypt_protected_headers_read is set, and a message with a protected Subject is opened, NeoMutt will save the updated Subject into the header cache by default. This allows searching/limiting based on the protected Subject header if the mailbox is re-opened, without having to re-open the message each time. However, for mbox/mh mailbox types, or if header caching is not set up, you would need to re-open the message each time the mailbox was reopened before you could see or search/limit on the protected subject again.
When this variable is set, NeoMutt additionally saves the protected Subject back in the clear-text message headers. This provides better usability, but with the tradeoff of reduced security. The protected Subject header, which may have previously been encrypted, is now stored in clear-text in the message headers. Copying the message elsewhere, via NeoMutt or external tools, could expose this previously encrypted data. Please make sure you understand the consequences of this before you enable this variable. (Crypto only)
Type: string
Default: “...
”
When $crypt_protected_headers_write is set, and the message is marked for encryption, this will be substituted into the Subject field in the message headers.
To prevent a subject from being substituted, unset this variable, or set it to the empty string. (Crypto only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will generate protected headers for signed and encrypted emails.
Protected headers are stored inside the encrypted or signed part of an an email, to prevent disclosure or tampering. For more information see https://github.com/autocrypt/protected-headers
Currently NeoMutt only supports the Subject header. (Crypto only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, automatically PGP or OpenSSL encrypt replies to messages which are encrypted. (Crypto only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, automatically PGP or OpenSSL sign replies to messages which are signed.
Note: this does not work on messages that are encrypted and signed! (Crypto only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, automatically PGP or OpenSSL sign replies to messages which are encrypted. This makes sense in combination with $crypt_reply_encrypt, because it allows you to sign all messages which are automatically encrypted. This works around the problem noted in $crypt_reply_sign, that NeoMutt is not able to find out whether an encrypted message is also signed. (Crypto only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, NeoMutt will include a time stamp in the lines surrounding PGP or S/MIME output, so spoofing such lines is more difficult. If you are using colors to mark these lines, and rely on these, you may unset this setting. (Crypto only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This variable controls the use of the GPGME-enabled crypto backends. If it is set and NeoMutt was built with GPGME support, the gpgme code for S/MIME and PGP will be used instead of the classic code. Note that you need to set this option in .neomuttrc; it won't have any effect when used interactively.
Note that the GPGME backend does not support creating old-style inline (traditional) PGP encrypted or signed messages (see $pgp_auto_inline).
Type: boolean
Default: no
Controls whether NeoMutt uses PKA (see http://www.g10code.de/docs/pka-intro.de.pdf) during signature verification (only supported by the GPGME backend).
Type: quadoption
Default: yes
If "yes", always attempt to verify PGP or S/MIME signatures. If "ask-*", ask whether or not to verify the signature. If "no", never attempt to verify cryptographic signatures. (Crypto only)
Type: string
Default: “!%a, %b %d, %Y at %I:%M:%S%p %Z
”
Instead of using $date_format it is encouraged to use "%[fmt]" directly in the corresponding format strings, where "fmt" is the value of $date_format. This allows for a more fine grained control of the different menu needs.
This variable controls the format of the date printed by the "%d"
sequence in $index_format. This is passed to the strftime(3)
function to process the date, see the man page for the proper syntax.
Unless the first character in the string is a bang ("!"), the month and week day names are expanded according to the locale. If the first character in the string is a bang, the bang is discarded, and the month and week day names in the rest of the string are expanded in the C locale (that is in US English).
Format strings using this variable are:
UI: $folder_format, $index_format, $mailbox_folder_format, $message_format
Composing: $attribution_intro, $forward_attribution_intro, $forward_attribution_trailer, $forward_format, $indent_string.
Type: path
Default: “~/.neomuttdebug
”
Debug logging is controlled by the variables $debug_file
and $debug_level
.
$debug_file
specifies the root of the filename. NeoMutt will add "0" to the end.
Each time NeoMutt is run with logging enabled, the log files are rotated.
A maximum of five log files are kept, numbered 0 (most recent) to 4 (oldest).
This option can be enabled on the command line, "neomutt -l mylog"
See also: $debug_level
Type: number
Default: 0
Debug logging is controlled by the variables $debug_file
and $debug_level
.
The debug level controls how much information is saved to the log file. If you have a problem with NeoMutt, then enabling logging may help find the cause. Levels 1-3 will usually provide enough information for writing a bug report. Levels 4,5 will be extremely verbose.
Warning: Logging at high levels may save private information to the file.
This option can be enabled on the command line, "neomutt -d 2"
See also: $debug_file
Type: string
Default: “~f %s !~P | (~P ~C %s)
”
This variable controls how some hooks are interpreted if their pattern is a
plain string or a regex. i.e. they don't contain a pattern, like ~f
The hooks are: fcc-hook, fcc-save-hook, index-format-hook, message-hook, reply-hook, save-hook, send-hook and send2-hook.
The hooks are expanded when they are declared, so a hook will be interpreted according to the value of this variable at the time the hook is declared.
The default value matches if the message is either from a user matching the regular expression given, or if it is from you (if the from address matches "alternates") and is to or cc'ed to a user matching the given regular expression.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
Controls whether or not messages are really deleted when closing or synchronizing a mailbox. If set to yes, messages marked for deleting will automatically be purged without prompting. If set to no, messages marked for deletion will be kept in the mailbox.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If this option is set, NeoMutt will untag messages when marking them for deletion. This applies when you either explicitly delete a message, or when you save it to another folder.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If this option is set, NeoMutt's received-attachments menu will not show the subparts of individual messages in a multipart/digest. To see these subparts, press "v" on that menu.
Type: command
Default: (empty)
When set, specifies a command used to filter messages. When a message is viewed it is passed as standard input to $display_filter, and the filtered message is read from the standard output.
When preparing the message, NeoMutt inserts some escape sequences into the
text. They are of the form: <esc>]9;XXX<bel>
where "XXX" is a random
64-bit number.
If these escape sequences interfere with your filter, they can be removed
using a tool like ansifilter
or sed 's/^\x1b]9;[0-9]\+\x7//'
If they are removed, then PGP and MIME headers will no longer be coloured.
This can be fixed by adding this to your config:
color body magenta default '^\[-- .* --\]$'
.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This variable sets the request for when notification is returned. The string consists of a comma separated list (no spaces!) of one or more of the following: never, to never request notification, failure, to request notification on transmission failure, delay, to be notified of message delays, success, to be notified of successful transmission.
Example:
set dsn_notify="failure,delay"
Note: when using $sendmail for delivery, you should not enable
this unless you are either using Sendmail 8.8.x or greater or a MTA
providing a sendmail(1)
-compatible interface supporting the -N
option
for DSN. For SMTP delivery, DSN support is auto-detected so that it
depends on the server whether DSN will be used or not.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This variable controls how much of your message is returned in DSN messages. It may be set to either hdrs to return just the message header, or full to return the full message.
Example:
set dsn_return=hdrs
Note: when using $sendmail for delivery, you should not enable
this unless you are either using Sendmail 8.8.x or greater or a MTA
providing a sendmail(1)
-compatible interface supporting the -R
option
for DSN. For SMTP delivery, DSN support is auto-detected so that it
depends on the server whether DSN will be used or not.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This variable controls whether NeoMutt, when $sort is set to threads, threads messages with the same Message-Id together. If it is set, it will indicate that it thinks they are duplicates of each other with an equals sign in the thread tree.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This option allows you to edit the header of your outgoing messages along with the body of your message.
Although the compose menu may have localized header labels, the labels passed to your editor will be standard RFC2822 headers, (e.g. To:, Cc:, Subject:). Headers added in your editor must also be RFC2822 headers, or one of the pseudo headers listed in "edit-header". NeoMutt will not understand localized header labels, just as it would not when parsing an actual email.
Note that changes made to the References: and Date: headers are ignored for interoperability reasons.
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This variable specifies which editor is used by NeoMutt.
It defaults to the value of the $VISUAL
, or $EDITOR
, environment
variable, or to the string "vi" if neither of those are set.
The $editor
string may contain a %s escape, which will be replaced by the name
of the file to be edited. If the %s escape does not appear in $editor
, a
space and the name to be edited are appended.
The resulting string is then executed by running
sh -c 'string'
where string is the expansion of $editor
described above.
Type: string
Default: “Re: your mail
”
This variable specifies the subject to be used when replying to an email with an empty subject. It defaults to "Re: your mail".
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will quoted-printable encode messages when they contain the string "From " (note the trailing space) in the beginning of a line. This is useful to avoid the tampering certain mail delivery and transport agents tend to do with messages (in order to prevent tools from misinterpreting the line as a mbox message separator).
Type: path
Default: (empty)
The file which includes random data that is used to initialize SSL library functions.
Type: e-mail address
Default: (empty)
Manually sets the envelope sender for outgoing messages. This value is ignored if $use_envelope_from is unset.
Type: command
Default: (empty)
If set, contains the name of the external program used by "~I" patterns. This will usually be a wrapper script around mairix, mu, or similar indexers other than notmuch (for which there is optional special support).
Here is an example how it works. Let's assume $external_search_command is set to "mairix_filter", and mairix_filter is a script which runs the old but well loved mairix indexer with the arguments given to mairix_filter, in the "raw" mode of mairix, producing on the standard output a list of Message-IDs, one per line.
If possible, it also filters down the results coming from mairix such that only messages in the current folder remain. It can do this because it gets a hidden first argument which is the path to the folder. (This can be the type of clean and simple script called a one-liner.)
Now if NeoMutt gets a limit or tag command followed by the pattern "~I '-t s:bleeping='", mairix_filter runs mairix with the arguments from inside the quotes (the quotes are needed because of the space after "-t"), mairix finds all messages with "bleeping" in the Subject plus all messages sharing threads with these and outputs their file names, and mairix_filter translates the file names into Message-IDs. Finally, NeoMutt reads the Message-IDs and targets the matching messages with the command given to it.
You, the user, still have to rewrite the mairix_filter script to match the behavior of your indexer, but this should help users of indexers other than notmuch to integrate them cleanly with NeoMutt.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, the initial prompt for recipients (to, cc, bcc) and subject are skipped when the relevant information is already provided. These cases include replying to messages and passing the relevant command line arguments. The initial prompt for recipients is also skipped when composing a new message to the current message sender, while the initial prompt for subject is also skipped when forwarding messages.
Note: this variable has no effect when the $auto_edit variable is set.
See also: $auto_edit, $edit_headers, $ask_cc, $ask_bcc
Type: quadoption
Default: yes
This variable controls whether or not attachments on outgoing messages are saved along with the main body of your message.
Note: $fcc_before_send forces the default (set) behavior of this option.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When this variable is set, FCCs will occur before sending the message. Before sending, the message cannot be manipulated, so it will be stored the exact same as sent: $fcc_attach and $fcc_clear will be ignored (using their default values).
When unset, the default, FCCs will occur after sending. Variables $fcc_attach and $fcc_clear will be respected, allowing it to be stored without attachments or encryption/signing if desired.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When this variable is set, FCCs will be stored unencrypted and unsigned, even when the actual message is encrypted and/or signed.
Note: $fcc_before_send forces the default (unset) behavior of this option. (PGP only)
See also $pgp_self_encrypt, $smime_self_encrypt
Type: character string
Default: “*!DdrONon-
”
Controls the characters used in several flags.
Character | Default | Description |
1 | * | The mail is tagged. |
2 | ! | The mail is flagged as important. |
3 | D | The mail is marked for deletion. |
4 | d | The mail has attachments marked for deletion. |
5 | r | The mail has been replied to. |
6 | O | The mail is Old (Unread but seen). |
7 | N | The mail is New (Unread but not seen). |
8 | o | The mail thread is Old (Unread but seen). |
9 | n | The mail thread is New (Unread but not seen). |
10 | - | The mail is read - %S expando. |
11 | <space> | The mail is read - %Z expando. |
Type: mailbox
Default: “~/Mail
”
Specifies the default location of your mailboxes. A "+" or "=" at the beginning of a pathname will be expanded to the value of this variable. Note that if you change this variable (from the default) value you need to make sure that the assignment occurs before you use "+" or "=" for any other variables since expansion takes place when handling the "mailboxes" command.
Type: string
Default: “%2C %t %N %F %2l %-8.8u %-8.8g %8s %d %i
”
This variable allows you to customize the file browser display to your
personal taste. This string is similar to $index_format, but has
its own set of printf(3)
-like sequences:
%C | Current file number | |
%d | Date/time folder was last modified | |
%D | Date/time folder was last modified using $date_format. It is encouraged to use "%[fmt]" instead, where "fmt" is the value of $date_format. | |
%f | Filename ("/" is appended to directory names, "@" to symbolic links and "*" to executable files) | |
%F | File permissions | |
%g | Group name (or numeric gid, if missing) | |
%i | Description of the folder | |
%l | Number of hard links | |
%m | * | Number of messages in the mailbox |
%n | * | Number of unread messages in the mailbox |
%N | "N" if mailbox has new mail, " " (space) otherwise | |
%s | Size in bytes (see formatstrings-size) | |
%t | "*" if the file is tagged, blank otherwise | |
%u | Owner name (or numeric uid, if missing) | |
%[fmt] | Date/time folder was last modified using an strftime(3) expression
| |
%>X | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X" | |
%|X | Pad to the end of the line with character "X" | |
%*X | Soft-fill with character "X" as pad |
For an explanation of "soft-fill", see the $index_format documentation.
* = can be optionally printed if nonzero
%m, %n, and %N only work for monitored mailboxes. %m requires $mail_check_stats to be set. %n requires $mail_check_stats to be set (except for IMAP mailboxes).
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Controls whether or not the "Mail-Followup-To:" header field is generated when sending mail. When set, NeoMutt will generate this field when you are replying to a known mailing list, specified with the "subscribe" or "lists" commands.
This field has two purposes. First, preventing you from receiving duplicate copies of replies to messages which you send to mailing lists, and second, ensuring that you do get a reply separately for any messages sent to known lists to which you are not subscribed.
The header will contain only the list's address for subscribed lists, and both the list address and your own email address for unsubscribed lists. Without this header, a group reply to your message sent to a subscribed list will be sent to both the list and your address, resulting in two copies of the same email for you.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
If this variable is set and the keyword "poster" is present in Followup-To header, follow-up to newsgroup function is not permitted. The message will be mailed to the submitter of the message via mail.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This variable is similar to $save_name, except that NeoMutt will store a copy of your outgoing message by the username of the address you are sending to even if that mailbox does not exist.
Also see the $record variable.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
When forwarding inline (i.e. $mime_forward unset or answered with "no" and $forward_decode set), attachments which cannot be decoded in a reasonable manner will be attached to the newly composed message if this quadoption is set or answered with "yes".
Type: string
Default: “----- Forwarded message from %f -----
”
This is the string that will precede a message which has been forwarded
in the main body of a message (when $mime_forward is unset).
For a full listing of defined printf(3)
-like sequences see
the section on $index_format. See also $attribution_locale.
Type: string
Default: “----- End forwarded message -----
”
This is the string that will follow a message which has been forwarded
in the main body of a message (when $mime_forward is unset).
For a full listing of defined printf(3)
-like sequences see
the section on $index_format. See also $attribution_locale.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Controls the decoding of complex MIME messages into text/plain
when
forwarding a message. The message header is also RFC2047 decoded.
This variable is only used, if $mime_forward is unset,
otherwise $mime_forward_decode is used instead.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Controls the handling of encrypted messages when forwarding a message. When set, the outer layer of encryption is stripped off. This variable is only used if $mime_forward is set and $mime_forward_decode is unset.
Type: quadoption
Default: yes
This quadoption controls whether or not the user is automatically placed in the editor when forwarding messages. For those who always want to forward with no modification, use a setting of "no".
Type: string
Default: “[%a: %s]
”
This variable controls the default subject when forwarding a message. It uses the same format sequences as the $index_format variable.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, forwarded messages included in the main body of the message (when $mime_forward is unset) will be quoted using $indent_string.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, forwarded messages set the "In-Reply-To:" and "References:" headers in the same way as normal replies would. Hence the forwarded message becomes part of the original thread instead of starting a new one.
Type: e-mail address
Default: (empty)
When set, this variable contains a default "from" address. It can be overridden using "my_hdr" (including from a "send-hook") and $reverse_name. This variable is ignored if $use_from is unset.
If not specified, then it may be read from the environment variable $EMAIL
.
Type: character string
Default: (empty)
Controls the character used to prefix the %F and %L fields in the index.
Character | Description |
1 | Mail is written by you and has a To address, or has a known mailing list in the To address. |
2 | Mail is written by you and has a Cc address, or has a known mailing list in the Cc address. |
3 | Mail is written by you and has a Bcc address. |
4 | All remaining cases. |
If this is empty or unset (default), the traditional long "To ", "Cc " and "Bcc " prefixes are used. If set but too short to include a character for a particular case, a single space will be prepended to the field. To prevent any prefix at all from being added in a particular case, use the special value CR (aka ^M) for the corresponding character.
This slightly odd interface is necessitated by NeoMutt's handling of string variables; one can't tell a variable that is unset from one that is set to the empty string.
Type: regular expression
Default: “^[^,]*
”
A regular expression used by NeoMutt to parse the GECOS field of a password
entry when expanding the alias. The default value
will return the string up to the first "," encountered.
If the GECOS field contains a string like "lastname, firstname" then you
should set it to ".*
".
This can be useful if you see the following behavior: you address an e-mail to user ID "stevef" whose full name is "Steve Franklin". If NeoMutt expands "stevef" to '"Franklin" stevef@foo.bar' then you should set the $gecos_mask to a regular expression that will match the whole name so NeoMutt will expand "Franklin" to "Franklin, Steve".
Type: string
Default: (empty)
When set, this is the string that will precede every message as a greeting phrase to the recipients.
"Format strings" are similar to the strings used in the "C" function printf to format output (see the man page for more detail). The following sequences are defined in NeoMutt:
%n | Recipient's real name |
%u | User (login) name of recipient |
%v | First name of recipient |
Type: string
Default: “%4C %M%N %5s %-45.45f %d
”
This variable allows you to customize the newsgroup browser display to your personal taste. This string is similar to "index_format", but has its own set of printf()-like sequences:
%C | Current newsgroup number |
%d | Description of newsgroup (becomes from server) |
%f | Newsgroup name |
%M | - if newsgroup not allowed for direct post (moderated for example) |
%N | N if newsgroup is new, u if unsubscribed, blank otherwise |
%n | Number of new articles in newsgroup |
%s | Number of unread articles in newsgroup |
%>X | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X" |
%|X | Pad to the end of the line with character "X" |
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When unset, the header fields normally added by the "my_hdr" command are not created. This variable must be unset before composing a new message or replying in order to take effect. If set, the user defined header fields are added to every new message.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, this variable causes NeoMutt to include the header of the message you are replying to into the edit buffer. The $weed setting applies.
Type: path
Default: (empty)
This variable points to the header cache database. If the path points to an existing directory, NeoMutt will create a dedicated header cache database per folder. Otherwise, the path points to a regular file, which will be created as needed and used as a shared global header cache for all folders. By default it is unset so no header caching will be used.
Header caching can greatly improve speed when opening POP, IMAP MH or Maildir folders, see "caching" in the NeoMutt Guide for details.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This variable specifies the header cache backend. If no backend is specified, the first available backend will be used in the following order: tokyocabinet, kyotocabinet, qdbm, rocksdb, gdbm, bdb, tdb, lmdb.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, color header regexes behave like color body regexes: color is applied to the exact text matched by the regex. When unset, color is applied to the entire header.
One use of this option might be to apply color to just the header labels.
See "color" for more details.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, help lines describing the bindings for the major functions provided by each menu are displayed on the first line of the screen.
Note: The binding will not be displayed correctly if the function is bound to a sequence rather than a single keystroke. Also, the help line may not be updated if a binding is changed while NeoMutt is running. Since this variable is primarily aimed at new users, neither of these should present a major problem.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will skip the host name part of $hostname variable when adding the domain part to addresses.
Type: string list
Default: “unread,draft,flagged,passed,replied,attachment,signed,encrypted
”
This variable specifies a list of comma-separated private notmuch/imap tags which should not be printed on screen.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will not show the presence of messages that are hidden by limiting, in the thread tree.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will not show the presence of missing messages in the thread tree.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will not show the subject of messages in the thread tree that have the same subject as their parent or closest previously displayed sibling.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will not show the presence of messages that are hidden by limiting, at the top of threads in the thread tree. Note that when $hide_limited is set, this option will have no effect.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will not show the presence of missing messages at the top of threads in the thread tree. Note that when $hide_missing is set, this option will have no effect.
Type: number
Default: 10
This variable controls the size (in number of strings remembered) of the string history buffer per category. The buffer is cleared each time the variable is set.
Note that strings (e.g. commands) starting with a space are never recorded in the history. This is for example useful to prevent leaking sensitive information into the history file or for one off tests.
Also note that a string is not added to the history if it exactly matches its immediate predecessor, e.g. executing the same command twice in a row results in only one copy being added to the history. To prevent duplicates over all entries use $history_remove_dups.
Type: path
Default: “~/.mutthistory
”
The file in which NeoMutt will save its history.
Also see $save_history.
Type: string
Default: “%s
”
Controls the format of the entries of the history list.
This string is similar to $index_format, but has its own
set of printf(3)
-like sequences:
%C | Line number |
%s | History match |
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, all of the string history will be scanned for duplicates when a new entry is added. Duplicate entries in the $history_file will also be removed when it is periodically compacted.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will not display attachments with a disposition of "attachment" inline even if it could render the part to plain text. These MIME parts can only be viewed from the attachment menu.
If unset, NeoMutt will render all MIME parts it can properly transform to plain text.
Type: quadoption
Default: yes
This variable controls whether or not a Mail-Followup-To header is honored when group-replying to a message.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Specifies the fully-qualified hostname of the system NeoMutt is running on containing the host's name and the DNS domain it belongs to. It is used as the domain part (after "@") for local email addresses.
If not specified in a config file, then NeoMutt will try to determine the hostname itself.
Optionally, NeoMutt can be compiled with a fixed domain name.
Also see $use_domain and $hidden_host.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will show you international domain names decoded. Note: You can use IDNs for addresses even if this is unset. This variable only affects decoding. (IDN only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will encode international domain names using IDN. Unset this if your SMTP server can handle newer (RFC6531) UTF-8 encoded domains. (IDN only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
Affects the behavior of the <reply>
function when replying to
messages from mailing lists (as defined by the "subscribe" or
"lists" commands). When set, if the "Reply-To:" field is
set to the same value as the "To:" field, NeoMutt assumes that the
"Reply-To:" field was set by the mailing list to automate responses
to the list, and will ignore this field. To direct a response to the
mailing list when this option is set, use the <list-reply>
function; <group-reply>
will reply to both the sender and the
list.
Type: string list
Default: (empty)
This is a colon-separated list of authentication methods NeoMutt may attempt to use to log in to an IMAP server, in the order NeoMutt should try them. Authentication methods are either "login" or the right side of an IMAP "AUTH=xxx" capability string, e.g. "digest-md5", "gssapi" or "cram-md5". This option is case-insensitive. If it's unset (the default) NeoMutt will try all available methods, in order from most-secure to least-secure.
Example:
set imap_authenticators="gssapi:cram-md5:login"
Note: NeoMutt will only fall back to other authentication methods if the previous methods are unavailable. If a method is available but authentication fails, NeoMutt will not connect to the IMAP server.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will fetch the set of subscribed folders from your server whenever a mailbox is selected, and add them to the set of mailboxes it polls for new mail just as if you had issued individual "mailboxes" commands.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will use the CONDSTORE extension (RFC7162) if advertised by the server. NeoMutt's current implementation is basic, used only for initial message fetching and flag updates.
For some IMAP servers, enabling this will slightly speed up downloading initial messages. Unfortunately, Gmail is not one those, and displays worse performance when enabled. Your mileage may vary.
Type: string
Default: “/.
”
This contains the list of characters that NeoMutt will use as folder separators for IMAP paths, when no separator is provided on the IMAP connection.
Type: number (long)
Default: 0
When set to a value greater than 0, new headers will be downloaded in groups of this many headers per request. If you have a very large mailbox, this might prevent a timeout and disconnect when opening the mailbox, by sending a FETCH per set of this many headers, instead of a single FETCH for all new headers.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
NeoMutt requests these header fields in addition to the default headers ("Date:", "From:", "Sender:", "Subject:", "To:", "Cc:", "Message-Id:", "References:", "Content-Type:", "Content-Description:", "In-Reply-To:", "Reply-To:", "Lines:", "List-Post:", "X-Label:") from IMAP servers before displaying the index menu. You may want to add more headers for spam detection.
Note: This is a space separated list, items should be uppercase and not contain the colon, e.g. "X-BOGOSITY X-SPAM-STATUS" for the "X-Bogosity:" and "X-Spam-Status:" header fields.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will attempt to use the IMAP IDLE extension to check for new mail in the current mailbox. Some servers (dovecot was the inspiration for this option) react badly to NeoMutt's implementation. If your connection seems to freeze up periodically, try unsetting this.
Type: number
Default: 300
This variable specifies the maximum amount of time in seconds that NeoMutt will wait before polling open IMAP connections, to prevent the server from closing them before NeoMutt has finished with them. The default is well within the RFC-specified minimum amount of time (30 minutes) before a server is allowed to do this, but in practice the RFC does get violated every now and then. Reduce this number if you find yourself getting disconnected from your IMAP server due to inactivity.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This variable configures whether IMAP folder browsing will look for
only subscribed folders or all folders. This can be toggled in the
IMAP browser with the <toggle-subscribed>
function.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Your login name on the IMAP server.
This variable defaults to the value of $imap_user.
Type: command
Default: (empty)
The command to run to generate an OAUTH refresh token for authorizing your connection to your IMAP server. This command will be run on every connection attempt that uses the OAUTHBEARER or XOAUTH2 authentication mechanisms. See "oauth" for details.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Specifies the password for your IMAP account. If unset, NeoMutt will
prompt you for your password when you invoke the <imap-fetch-mail>
function
or try to open an IMAP folder.
Warning: you should only use this option when you are on a fairly secure machine, because the superuser can read your neomuttrc even if you are the only one who can read the file.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will not open new IMAP connections to check for new mail. NeoMutt will only check for new mail over existing IMAP connections. This is useful if you don't want to be prompted for user/password pairs on NeoMutt invocation, or if opening the connection is slow.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will avoid implicitly marking your mail as read whenever you fetch a message from the server. This is generally a good thing, but can make closing an IMAP folder somewhat slower. This option exists to appease speed freaks.
Type: number
Default: 15
Controls the number of IMAP commands that may be queued up before they are sent to the server. A deeper pipeline reduces the amount of time NeoMutt must wait for the server, and can make IMAP servers feel much more responsive. But not all servers correctly handle pipelined commands, so if you have problems you might want to try setting this variable to 0.
Note: Changes to this variable have no effect on open connections.
Type: number
Default: 15
This variable specifies the maximum amount of time in seconds that NeoMutt will wait for a response when polling IMAP connections for new mail, before timing out and closing the connection. Set to 0 to disable timing out.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will use the QRESYNC extension (RFC7162) if advertised by the server. NeoMutt's current implementation is basic, used only for initial message fetching and flag updates.
Note: this feature is currently experimental. If you experience strange behavior, such as duplicate or missing messages please file a bug report to let us know.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will use the IMAP ENABLE extension (RFC5161) to select CAPABILITIES. Some servers (notably Coremail System IMap Server) do not properly respond to ENABLE commands, which might cause NeoMutt to hang. If your connection seems to freeze at login, try unsetting this. See also https://github.com/neomutt/neomutt/issues/1689
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will send an IMAP ID command (RFC2971) to the server when logging in if advertised by the server. This command provides information about the IMAP client, such as "NeoMutt" and the current version.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will display warning messages from the IMAP server as error messages. Since these messages are often harmless, or generated due to configuration problems on the server which are out of the users' hands, you may wish to suppress them at some point.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
The name of the user whose mail you intend to access on the IMAP server.
This variable defaults to your user name on the local machine.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set to "yes", NeoMutt will look for a mailcap entry with the
"copiousoutput
" flag set for every MIME attachment it doesn't have
an internal viewer defined for. If such an entry is found, NeoMutt will
use the viewer defined in that entry to convert the body part to text
form.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
Controls whether or not a copy of the message(s) you are replying to is included in your reply.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Controls whether or not NeoMutt includes separately encrypted attachment contents when replying.
This variable was added to prevent accidental exposure of encrypted contents when replying to an attacker. If a previously encrypted message were attached by the attacker, they could trick an unwary recipient into decrypting and including the message in their reply.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Controls whether or not NeoMutt includes only the first attachment of the message you are replying.
Type: string
Default: “>
”
Specifies the string to prepend to each line of text quoted in a message to which you are replying. You are strongly encouraged not to change this value, as it tends to agitate the more fanatical netizens.
The value of this option is ignored if $text_flowed is set, because the quoting mechanism is strictly defined for format=flowed.
This option is a format string, please see the description of
$index_format for supported printf(3)
-style sequences.
Type: string
Default: “%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-15.15L (%<l?%4l&%4c>) %s
”
This variable allows you to customize the message index display to your personal taste.
"Format strings" are similar to the strings used in the C
function printf(3)
to format output (see the man page for more details).
For an explanation of the %<...> construct, see the status_format description.
The following sequences are defined in NeoMutt:
%a | Address of the author |
%A | Reply-to address (if present; otherwise: address of author) |
%b | Filename of the original message folder (think mailbox) |
%B | Same as %K |
%C | Current message number |
%c | Number of characters (bytes) in the body of the message (see formatstrings-size) |
%cr | Number of characters (bytes) in the raw message, including the header (see formatstrings-size) |
%D | Date and time of message using date_format and local timezone It is encouraged to use "%[fmt]" instead, where "fmt" is the value of $date_format. |
%d | Date and time of message using date_format and sender's timezone It is encouraged to use "%{fmt}" instead, where "fmt" is the value of $date_format. |
%e | Current message number in thread |
%E | Number of messages in current thread |
%F | Author name, or recipient name if the message is from you |
%Fp | Like %F, but plain. No contextual formatting is applied to recipient name |
%f | Sender (address + real name), either From: or Return-Path: |
%g | Newsgroup name (if compiled with NNTP support) |
%g | Message tags (e.g. notmuch tags/imap flags) |
%Gx | Individual message tag (e.g. notmuch tags/imap flags) |
%H | Spam attribute(s) of this message |
%I | Initials of author |
%i | Message-id of the current message |
%J | Message tags (if present, tree unfolded, and != parent's tags) |
%K | The list to which the letter was sent (if any; otherwise: empty) |
%L | If an address in the "To:" or "Cc:" header field matches an address Defined by the user's "subscribe" command, this displays "To <list-name>", otherwise the same as %F |
%l | number of lines in the unprocessed message (may not work with maildir, mh, and IMAP folders) |
%M | Number of hidden messages if the thread is collapsed |
%m | Total number of message in the mailbox |
%N | Message score |
%n | Author's real name (or address if missing) |
%O | Original save folder where NeoMutt would formerly have Stashed the message: list name or recipient name If not sent to a list |
%P | Progress indicator for the built-in pager (how much of the file has been displayed) |
%q | Newsgroup name (if compiled with NNTP support) |
%R | Comma separated list of "Cc:" recipients |
%r | Comma separated list of "To:" recipients |
%S | Single character status of the message ("N"/"O"/"D"/"d"/"!"/"r"/"*") |
%s | Subject of the message |
%T | The appropriate character from the $to_chars string |
%t | "To:" field (recipients) |
%u | User (login) name of the author |
%v | First name of the author, or the recipient if the message is from you |
%W | Name of organization of author ("Organization:" field) |
%x | "X-Comment-To:" field (if present and compiled with NNTP support) |
%X | Number of MIME attachments (please see the "attachments" section for possible speed effects) |
%Y | "X-Label:" field, if present, and (1) not at part of a thread tree, (2) at the top of a thread, or (3) "X-Label:" is different from Preceding message's "X-Label:" |
%y | "X-Label:" field, if present |
%Z | A three character set of message status flags. The first character is new/read/replied flags ("n"/"o"/"r"/"O"/"N"). The second is deleted or encryption flags ("D"/"d"/"S"/"P"/"s"/"K"). The third is either tagged/flagged ("*"/"!"), or one of the characters Listed in $to_chars. |
%zc | Message crypto flags |
%zs | Message status flags |
%zt | Message tag flags |
%@name@ | insert and evaluate format-string from the matching "index-format-hook" command |
%{fmt} | the date and time of the message is converted to sender's
time zone, and "fmt" is expanded by the library function
strftime(3) ; if the first character inside the braces
is a bang ("!"), the date is formatted ignoring any locale
settings. Note that the sender's time zone might only be
available as a numerical offset, so "%Z" behaves like "%z".
|
%[fmt] | the date and time of the message is converted to the local
time zone, and "fmt" is expanded by the library function
strftime(3) ; if the first character inside the brackets
is a bang ("!"), the date is formatted ignoring any locale settings.
|
%(fmt) | the local date and time when the message was received, and
"fmt" is expanded by the library function strftime(3) ;
if the first character inside the parentheses is a bang ("!"),
the date is formatted ignoring any locale settings.
|
%>X | right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X" |
%|X | pad to the end of the line with character "X" |
%*X | soft-fill with character "X" as pad |
Date format expressions can be constructed based on relative dates. Using the date formatting operators along with nested conditionals, the date format can be modified based on how old a message is. See the section on "Conditional Dates" for an explanation and examples
Note that for mbox/mmdf, "%l" applies to the unprocessed message, and for maildir/mh, the value comes from the "Lines:" header field when present (the meaning is normally the same). Thus the value depends on the encodings used in the different parts of the message and has little meaning in practice.
"Soft-fill" deserves some explanation: Normal right-justification will print everything to the left of the "%>", displaying padding and whatever lies to the right only if there's room. By contrast, soft-fill gives priority to the right-hand side, guaranteeing space to display it and showing padding only if there's still room. If necessary, soft-fill will eat text leftwards to make room for rightward text.
Note that these expandos are supported in "save-hook", "fcc-hook" and "fcc-save-hook", too.
Type: command
Default: (empty)
If set, specifies the program and arguments used to deliver news posted by NeoMutt. Otherwise, NeoMutt posts article using current connection to news server. The following printf-style sequence is understood:
%a | account url |
%p | port |
%P | port if specified |
%s | news server name |
%S | url schema |
%u | username |
Example:
set inews="/usr/local/bin/inews -hS"
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, read messages marked as flagged will not be moved from your spool mailbox to your $mbox mailbox or to the "mbox" specified by a mbox-hook command.
Note that $keep_flagged only has an effect if $move is set.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, the date in the Date header of emails that you send will be in your local timezone. If unset a UTC date will be used instead to avoid leaking information about your current location.
Type: number
Default: 5
This variable configures how often (in seconds) NeoMutt should look for new mail. Also see the $timeout variable.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will only notify you about new mail that has been received since the last time you opened the mailbox. When unset, NeoMutt will notify you if any new mail exists in the mailbox, regardless of whether you have visited it recently.
When $mark_old is set, NeoMutt does not consider the mailbox to contain new mail if only old messages exist.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will periodically calculate message statistics of a mailbox while polling for new mail. It will check for unread, flagged, and total message counts. Because this operation is more performance intensive, it defaults to unset, and has a separate option, $mail_check_stats_interval, to control how often to update these counts.
Message statistics can also be explicitly calculated by invoking the
<check-stats>
function.
Type: number
Default: 60
When $mail_check_stats is set, this variable configures how often (in seconds) NeoMutt will update message counts.
Type: string
Default: “%2C %<n?%6n& > %6m %i
”
This variable allows you to customize the file browser display to your personal taste. It's only used to customize network mailboxes (e.g. imap). This string is identical in formatting to the one used by "$folder_format".
Type: string list
Default: “~/.mailcap:/usr/local/share/neomutt/mailcap:/usr/local/etc/mailcap:/etc/mailcap:/usr/etc/mailcap:/usr/local/etc/mailcap
”
This variable specifies a list of colon-separated files to consult when attempting to display MIME bodies not directly supported by NeoMutt. The default value is generated during startup: see the "mailcap" section of the manual.
$mailcap_path is overridden by the environment variable $MAILCAPS
.
The default search path is from RFC1524.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, NeoMutt will restrict possible characters in mailcap % expandos to a well-defined set of safe characters. This is the safe setting, but we are not sure it doesn't break some more advanced MIME stuff.
DON'T CHANGE THIS SETTING UNLESS YOU ARE REALLY SURE WHAT YOU ARE DOING!
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will poll both the new and cur directories of a maildir folder for new messages. This might be useful if other programs interacting with the folder (e.g. dovecot) are moving new messages to the cur directory. Note that setting this option may slow down polling for new messages in large folders, since NeoMutt has to scan all cur messages.
Type: string
Default: “:
”
Use the value as maildir field delimiter. This is a single-character used to accommodate maildir mailboxes on platforms where `:` is not allowed in a filename. The recommended alternative on such platforms is `;`. Neomutt supports all non-alphanumeric values except for `-`, `.`, `\`, `/`. Note: this only applies to maildir-style mailboxes. Setting it will have no effect on other mailbox types.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Check for Maildir unaware programs other than NeoMutt having modified maildir
files when the header cache is in use. This incurs one stat(2)
per
message every time the folder is opened (which can be very slow for NFS
folders).
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, messages marked as deleted will be saved with the maildir trashed flag instead of unlinked. Note: this only applies to maildir-style mailboxes. Setting it will have no effect on other mailbox types.
Type: string
Default: “'
”
Prefix for macros created using mark-message. A new macro automatically generated with <mark-message>a will be composed from this prefix and the letter a.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Controls whether or not NeoMutt marks new unread messages as old if you exit a mailbox without reading them. With this option set, the next time you start NeoMutt, the messages will show up with an "O" next to them in the index menu, indicating that they are old.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Controls the display of wrapped lines in the internal pager. If set, a "+" marker is displayed at the beginning of wrapped lines.
Also see the $smart_wrap variable.
Type: regular expression
Default: “!^\.[^.]
”
A regular expression used in the file browser, optionally preceded by the not operator "!". Only files whose names match this mask will be shown. The match is always case-sensitive.
Type: mailbox
Default: “~/mbox
”
This specifies the folder into which read mail in your $spool_file folder will be appended.
Also see the $move variable.
Type: enumeration
Default: mbox
The default mailbox type used when creating new folders. May be any of "mbox", "MMDF", "MH" or "Maildir".
This can also be set using the -m
command-line option.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If unset, NeoMutt will remove your address (see the "alternates" command) from the list of recipients when replying to a message.
Type: number
Default: 0
This variable controls the number of lines of context that are given when scrolling through menus. (Similar to $pager_context.)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When unset, the bottom entry of menus will never scroll up past the bottom of the screen, unless there are less entries than lines. When set, the bottom entry may move off the bottom.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, menus will be scrolled up or down one line when you attempt to move across a screen boundary. If unset, the screen is cleared and the next or previous page of the menu is displayed (useful for slow links to avoid many redraws).
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will clean out obsolete entries from the message cache when the mailbox is synchronized. You probably only want to set it every once in a while, since it can be a little slow (especially for large folders).
Type: path
Default: (empty)
Set this to a directory and NeoMutt will cache copies of messages from your IMAP and POP servers here. You are free to remove entries at any time.
When setting this variable to a directory, NeoMutt needs to fetch every remote message only once and can perform regular expression searches as fast as for local folders.
Also see the $message_cache_clean variable.
Type: string
Default: “%s
”
This is the string displayed in the "attachment" menu for
attachments of type message/rfc822
. For a full listing of defined
printf(3)
-like sequences see the section on $index_format.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, forces NeoMutt to interpret keystrokes with the high bit (bit 8)
set as if the user had pressed the Esc key and whatever key remains
after having the high bit removed. For example, if the key pressed
has an ASCII value of 0xf8
, then this is treated as if the user had
pressed Esc then "x". This is because the result of removing the
high bit from 0xf8
is 0x78
, which is the ASCII character
"x".
Type: boolean
Default: no
When unset, NeoMutt will mimic mh's behavior and rename deleted messages to ,<old file name> in mh folders instead of really deleting them. This leaves the message on disk but makes programs reading the folder ignore it. If the variable is set, the message files will simply be deleted.
This option is similar to $maildir_trash for Maildir folders.
Type: string
Default: “flagged
”
The name of the MH sequence used for flagged messages.
Type: string
Default: “replied
”
The name of the MH sequence used to tag replied messages.
Type: string
Default: “unseen
”
The name of the MH sequence used for unseen messages.
Type: quadoption
Default: no
When set, the message you are forwarding will be attached as a
separate message/rfc822
MIME part instead of included in the main body of the
message. This is useful for forwarding MIME messages so the receiver
can properly view the message as it was delivered to you. If you like
to switch between MIME and not MIME from mail to mail, set this
variable to "ask-no" or "ask-yes".
Also see $forward_decode and $mime_forward_decode.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Controls the decoding of complex MIME messages into text/plain
when
forwarding a message while $mime_forward is set. Otherwise
$forward_decode is used instead.
Type: quadoption
Default: yes
When forwarding multiple attachments of a MIME message from the attachment menu, attachments which can't be decoded in a reasonable manner will be attached to the newly composed message if this option is set.
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This specifies a command to run, to determine the mime type of a new attachment when composing a message. Unless $mime_type_query_first is set, this will only be run if the attachment's extension is not found in the mime.types file.
The string may contain a "%s", which will be substituted with the attachment filename. NeoMutt will add quotes around the string substituted for "%s" automatically according to shell quoting rules, so you should avoid adding your own. If no "%s" is found in the string, NeoMutt will append the attachment filename to the end of the string.
The command should output a single line containing the attachment's mime type.
Suggested values are "xdg-mime query filetype" or "file -bi".
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, the $mime_type_query_command will be run before the mime.types lookup.
Type: quadoption
Default: no
If this variable is set, then NeoMutt will move read messages from your spool mailbox to your $mbox mailbox or to the "mbox" specified by a mbox-hook command.
See also $keep_flagged.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This variable, when set, makes the thread tree narrower, allowing deeper threads to fit on the screen.
Type: number
Default: 10
Operations that expect to transfer a large amount of data over the network will update their progress every $net_inc kilobytes. If set to 0, no progress messages will be displayed.
See also $read_inc, $write_inc and $net_inc.
Type: command
Default: (empty)
If set, NeoMutt will call this command after a new message is received. See the $status_format documentation for the values that can be formatted into this command.
Type: path
Default: “~/.neomutt
”
This variable pointing to directory where NeoMutt will save cached news articles and headers in. If unset, articles and headers will not be saved at all and will be reloaded from the server each time.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This variable specifies domain name or address of NNTP server.
You can also specify username and an alternative port for each news server,
e.g. [[s]news://][username[:password]@]server[:port]
This option can also be set using the command line option "-g", the
environment variable $NNTPSERVER
, or putting the server name in the
file "/etc/nntpserver".
Type: path
Default: “~/.newsrc
”
The file, containing info about subscribed newsgroups - names and indexes of read articles. The following printf-style sequence is understood:
Expando | Description | Example |
%a | Account url | news:news.gmane.org
|
%p | Port | 119
|
%P | Port if specified | 10119
|
%s | News server name | news.gmane.org
|
%S | Url schema | news
|
%u | Username | username
|
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This is a colon-delimited list of authentication methods NeoMutt may attempt to use to log in to a news server, in the order NeoMutt should try them. Authentication methods are either "user" or any SASL mechanism, e.g. "digest-md5", "gssapi" or "cram-md5". This option is case-insensitive. If it's unset (the default) NeoMutt will try all available methods, in order from most-secure to least-secure.
Example:
set nntp_authenticators="digest-md5:user"
Note: NeoMutt will only fall back to other authentication methods if the previous methods are unavailable. If a method is available but authentication fails, NeoMutt will not connect to the IMAP server.
Type: number (long)
Default: 1000
This variable defines number of articles which will be in index when newsgroup entered. If active newsgroup have more articles than this number, oldest articles will be ignored. Also controls how many articles headers will be saved in cache when you quit newsgroup.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This variable controls whether or not existence of each article is checked when newsgroup is entered.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This variable controls whether or not descriptions for each newsgroup must be loaded when newsgroup is added to list (first time list loading or new newsgroup adding).
Type: number
Default: 60
The time in seconds until any operations on newsgroup except post new article will cause recheck for new news. If set to 0, NeoMutt will recheck newsgroup on each operation in index (stepping, read article, etc.).
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Your login name on the NNTP server. If unset and NNTP server requires authentication, NeoMutt will prompt you for your account name when you connect to news server.
Type: command
Default: “builtin
”
This variable specifies which pager you would like to use to view messages. The value "builtin" means to use the built-in pager, otherwise this variable should specify the pathname of the external pager you would like to use.
Using an external pager may have some disadvantages: Additional keystrokes are necessary because you can't call NeoMutt functions directly from the pager, and screen resizes cause lines longer than the screen width to be badly formatted in the help menu.
Type: number
Default: 0
This variable controls the number of lines of context that are given when displaying the next or previous page in the internal pager. By default, NeoMutt will display the line after the last one on the screen at the top of the next page (0 lines of context).
This variable also specifies the amount of context given for search results. If positive, this many lines will be given before a match, if 0, the match will be top-aligned.
Type: string
Default: “-%Z- %C/%m: %-20.20n %s%* -- (%P)
”
This variable controls the format of the one-line message "status" displayed before each message in either the internal or an external pager. The valid sequences are listed in the $index_format section.
Type: number
Default: 0
Determines the number of lines of a mini-index which is shown when in the pager. The current message, unless near the top or bottom of the folder, will be roughly one third of the way down this mini-index, giving the reader the context of a few messages before and after the message. This is useful, for example, to determine how many messages remain to be read in the current thread. A value of 0 results in no index being shown.
Type: number
Default: 0
Determines the number of seconds that must elapse after first opening a new message in the pager before that message will be marked as read. A value of 0 results in the message being marked read unconditionally; for other values, navigating to another message or exiting the pager before the timeout will leave the message marked unread. This setting is ignored if $pager is not builtin.
Type: number
Default: 0
Determines the number of lines of context to show before the
unquoted text when using the <skip-quoted>
function. When set
to a positive number at most that many lines of the previous quote
are displayed. If the previous quote is shorter the whole quote is
displayed.
The (now deprecated) skip_quoted_offset is an alias for this variable, and should no longer be used.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, the internal-pager will not move to the next message
when you are at the end of a message and invoke the <next-page>
function.
Type: string
Default: “%2n %-15e %d
”
This variable describes the format of the "pattern completion" menu. The
following printf(3)
-style sequences are understood:
%d | pattern description |
%e | pattern expression |
%n | index number |
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will automatically attempt to decrypt traditional PGP
messages whenever the user performs an operation which ordinarily would
result in the contents of the message being operated on. For example,
if the user displays a pgp-traditional message which has not been manually
checked with the <check-traditional-pgp>
function, NeoMutt will automatically
check the message for traditional pgp.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This option controls whether NeoMutt generates old-style inline (traditional) PGP encrypted or signed messages under certain circumstances. This can be overridden by use of the pgp menu, when inline is not required. The GPGME backend does not support this option.
Note that NeoMutt might automatically use PGP/MIME for messages which consist of more than a single MIME part. NeoMutt can be configured to ask before sending PGP/MIME messages when inline (traditional) would not work.
Also see the $pgp_mime_auto variable.
Also note that using the old-style PGP message format is strongly deprecated. (PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, NeoMutt will check the exit code of the PGP subprocess when signing or encrypting. A non-zero exit code means that the subprocess failed. (PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, NeoMutt will check the status file descriptor output of $pgp_decrypt_command and $pgp_decode_command for GnuPG status codes indicating successful decryption. This will check for the presence of DECRYPTION_OKAY, absence of DECRYPTION_FAILED, and that all PLAINTEXT occurs between the BEGIN_DECRYPTION and END_DECRYPTION status codes.
If unset, NeoMutt will instead match the status fd output against $pgp_decryption_okay. (PGP only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This format is used to create an old-style "clearsigned" PGP message. Note that the use of this format is strongly deprecated.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
Note that in this case, %r expands to the search string, which is a list of
one or more quoted values such as email address, name, or keyid.
(PGP only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This format strings specifies a command which is used to decode application/pgp attachments.
The PGP command formats have their own set of printf(3)
-like sequences:
%a | The value of $pgp_sign_as if set, otherwise the value of $pgp_default_key. |
%f | Expands to the name of a file containing a message. |
%p | Expands to PGPPASSFD=0 when a pass phrase is needed, to an empty string otherwise. Note: This may be used with a %<...> construct. |
%r | One or more key IDs (or fingerprints if available). |
%s | Expands to the name of a file containing the signature part
of a multipart/signed attachment when verifying it.
|
(PGP only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is used to decrypt a PGP encrypted message.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Note: When decrypting messages using gpg
, a pinentry program needs to
be invoked unless the password is cached within gpg-agent
.
Currently, the pinentry-tty
program (usually distributed with
gpg
) isn't suitable for being invoked by NeoMutt. You are encouraged
to use a different pinentry-program when running NeoMutt in order to avoid
problems.
See also: https://github.com/neomutt/neomutt/issues/1014
Type: regular expression
Default: (empty)
If you assign text to this variable, then an encrypted PGP message is only considered successfully decrypted if the output from $pgp_decrypt_command contains the text. This is used to protect against a spoofed encrypted message, with multipart/encrypted headers but containing a block that is not actually encrypted. (e.g. simply signed and ascii armored text).
Note that if $pgp_check_gpg_decrypt_status_fd is set, this variable is ignored. (PGP only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This is the default key-pair to use for PGP operations. It will be used for encryption (see $postpone_encrypt and $pgp_self_encrypt).
It will also be used for signing unless $pgp_sign_as is set.
The (now deprecated) pgp_self_encrypt_as is an alias for this variable, and should no longer be used. (PGP only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is used to encrypt a body part without signing it.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
Note that in this case, %r expands to the search string, which is a list of
one or more quoted values such as email address, name, or keyid.
(PGP only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is used to both sign and encrypt a body part.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Type: string
Default: “%4n %t%f %4l/0x%k %-4a %2c %u
”
This variable allows you to customize the PGP key selection menu to
your personal taste. If $crypt_use_gpgme is set, then it applies
to S/MIME key selection menu also. This string is similar to $index_format,
but has its own set of printf(3)
-like sequences:
%a | Algorithm |
%c | Capabilities |
%f | Flags |
%i | Key fingerprint (or long key id if non-existent) |
%k | Key id |
%l | Key length |
%n | Number |
%p | Protocol |
%t | Trust/validity of the key-uid association |
%u | User id |
%[<s>] | Date of the key where <s> is an strftime(3) expression
|
See the section "Sending Cryptographically Signed/Encrypted Messages" of the user manual for the meaning of the letters some of these sequences expand to.
(Crypto only) or (PGP only when GPGME disabled)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is used to export a public key from the user's key ring.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is invoked whenever NeoMutt needs to fetch the public key associated with
an email address. Of the sequences supported by $pgp_decode_command, %r is
the only printf(3)
-like sequence used with this format. Note that
in this case, %r expands to the email address, not the public key ID (the key ID is
unknown, which is why NeoMutt is invoking this command).
(PGP only)
Type: regular expression
Default: (empty)
If you assign a text to this variable, then a PGP signature is only considered verified if the output from $pgp_verify_command contains the text. Use this variable if the exit code from the command is 0 even for bad signatures. (PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to ignore OpenPGP subkeys. Instead, the principal key will inherit the subkeys' capabilities. Unset this if you want to play interesting key selection games. (PGP only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is used to import a key from a message into the user's public key ring.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is used to list the public key ring's contents. The output format must be analogous to the one used by
gpg --list-keys --with-colons --with-fingerprint
Note: gpg's fixed-list-mode
option should not be used. It
produces a different date format which may result in NeoMutt showing
incorrect key generation dates.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is used to list the secret key ring's contents. The output format must be analogous to the one used by:
gpg --list-keys --with-colons --with-fingerprint
Note: gpg's fixed-list-mode
option should not be used. It
produces a different date format which may result in NeoMutt showing
incorrect key generation dates.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, use 64 bit PGP key IDs, if unset use the normal 32 bit key IDs. NOTE: Internally, NeoMutt has transitioned to using fingerprints (or long key IDs as a fallback). This option now only controls the display of key IDs in the key selection menu and a few other places. (PGP only)
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
This option controls whether NeoMutt will prompt you for automatically sending a (signed/encrypted) message using PGP/MIME when inline (traditional) fails (for any reason).
Also note that using the old-style PGP message format is strongly deprecated. (PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
Setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to always attempt to create an inline (traditional) message when replying to a message which is PGP encrypted/signed inline. This can be overridden by use of the pgp menu, when inline is not required. This option does not automatically detect if the (replied-to) message is inline; instead it relies on NeoMutt internals for previously checked/flagged messages.
Note that NeoMutt might automatically use PGP/MIME for messages which consist of more than a single MIME part. NeoMutt can be configured to ask before sending PGP/MIME messages when inline (traditional) would not work.
Also see the $pgp_mime_auto variable.
Also note that using the old-style PGP message format is strongly deprecated. (PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, signed and encrypted messages will consist of nested
multipart/signed
and multipart/encrypted
body parts.
This is useful for applications like encrypted and signed mailing
lists, where the outer layer (multipart/encrypted
) can be easily
removed, while the inner multipart/signed
part is retained.
(PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, PGP encrypted messages will also be encrypted using the key in $pgp_default_key. (PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, NeoMutt will display non-usable keys on the PGP key selection menu. This includes keys which have been revoked, have expired, or have been marked as "disabled" by the user. (PGP only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
If you have a different key pair to use for signing, you should
set this to the signing key. Most people will only need to set
$pgp_default_key. It is recommended that you use the keyid form
to specify your key (e.g. 0x00112233
).
(PGP only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is used to create the detached PGP signature for a
multipart/signed
PGP/MIME body part.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Type: sort order
Default: address
Specifies how the entries in the pgp menu are sorted. The following are legal values:
address | sort alphabetically by user id |
keyid | sort alphabetically by key id |
date | sort by key creation date |
trust | sort by the trust of the key |
If you prefer reverse order of the above values, prefix it with "reverse-". (PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, NeoMutt will automatically encode PGP/MIME signed messages as quoted-printable. Please note that unsetting this variable may lead to problems with non-verifyable PGP signatures, so only change this if you know what you are doing. (PGP only)
Type: number (long)
Default: 300
The number of seconds after which a cached passphrase will expire if not used. (PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, NeoMutt expects a gpg-agent(1)
process will handle
private key passphrase prompts. If unset, NeoMutt will prompt
for the passphrase and pass it via stdin to the pgp command.
Note that as of version 2.1, GnuPG automatically spawns an agent and requires the agent be used for passphrase management. Since that version is increasingly prevalent, this variable now defaults set.
NeoMutt works with a GUI or curses pinentry program. A TTY pinentry should not be used.
If you are using an older version of GnuPG without an agent running, or another encryption program without an agent, you will need to unset this variable. (PGP only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is used to verify PGP signatures.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is used to verify key information from the key selection menu.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
Used in connection with the <pipe-message>
function. When unset,
NeoMutt will pipe the messages without any preprocessing. When set, NeoMutt
will attempt to decode the messages first.
Also see $pipe_decode_weed, which controls whether headers will be weeded when this is set.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
For <pipe-message>
, when $pipe_decode is set, this further
controls whether NeoMutt will weed headers.
Type: string
Default: “\n
”
The separator to add between messages when piping a list of tagged messages to an external Unix command.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Used in connection with the <pipe-message>
function following
<tag-prefix>
. If this variable is unset, when piping a list of
tagged messages NeoMutt will concatenate the messages and will pipe them
all concatenated. When set, NeoMutt will pipe the messages one by one.
In both cases the messages are piped in the current sorted order,
and the $pipe_sep separator is added after each message.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, NeoMutt will try all available authentication methods. When unset, NeoMutt will only fall back to other authentication methods if the previous methods are unavailable. If a method is available but authentication fails, NeoMutt will not connect to the POP server.
Type: string list
Default: (empty)
This is a colon-separated list of authentication methods NeoMutt may attempt to use to log in to an POP server, in the order NeoMutt should try them. Authentication methods are either "user", "apop" or any SASL mechanism, e.g. "digest-md5", "gssapi" or "cram-md5". This option is case-insensitive. If this option is unset (the default) NeoMutt will try all available methods, in order from most-secure to least-secure.
Example:
set pop_authenticators="digest-md5:apop:user"
Type: number
Default: 60
This variable configures how often (in seconds) NeoMutt should look for new mail in the currently selected mailbox if it is a POP mailbox.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-no
If set, NeoMutt will delete successfully downloaded messages from the POP
server when using the <fetch-mail>
function. When unset, NeoMutt will
download messages but also leave them on the POP server.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
The name of your POP server for the <fetch-mail>
function. You
can also specify an alternative port, username and password, i.e.:
[pop[s]://][username[:password]@]popserver[:port]
where "[...]" denotes an optional part.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If this variable is set, NeoMutt will try to use the "LAST
" POP command
for retrieving only unread messages from the POP server when using
the <fetch-mail>
function.
Type: command
Default: (empty)
The command to run to generate an OAUTH refresh token for authorizing your connection to your POP server. This command will be run on every connection attempt that uses the OAUTHBEARER authentication mechanism. See "oauth" for details.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Specifies the password for your POP account. If unset, NeoMutt will prompt you for your password when you open a POP mailbox.
Warning: you should only use this option when you are on a fairly secure machine, because the superuser can read your neomuttrc even if you are the only one who can read the file.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
Controls whether or not NeoMutt will try to reconnect to the POP server if the connection is lost.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Your login name on the POP server.
This variable defaults to your user name on the local machine.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
If set to yes, NeoMutt will post article to newsgroup that have not permissions to posting (e.g. moderated). Note: if news server does not support posting to that newsgroup or totally read-only, that posting will not have an effect.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
Controls whether or not messages are saved in the $postponed mailbox when you elect not to send immediately. If set to ask-yes or ask-no, you will be prompted with "Save (postpone) draft message?" when quitting from the "compose" screen.
Also see the $recall variable.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, postponed messages that are marked for encryption will be self-encrypted. NeoMutt will first try to encrypt using the value specified in $pgp_default_key or $smime_default_key. If those are not set, it will try the deprecated $postpone_encrypt_as. (Crypto only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This is a deprecated fall-back variable for $postpone_encrypt. Please use $pgp_default_key or $smime_default_key. (Crypto only)
Type: mailbox
Default: “~/postponed
”
NeoMutt allows you to indefinitely "postpone sending a message" which you are editing. When you choose to postpone a message, NeoMutt saves it in the mailbox specified by this variable.
Also see the $postpone variable.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
If set, a shell command to be executed if NeoMutt fails to establish
a connection to the server. This is useful for setting up secure
connections, e.g. with ssh(1)
. If the command returns a nonzero
status, NeoMutt gives up opening the server. Example:
set preconnect="ssh -f -q -L 1234:mailhost.net:143 mailhost.net \ sleep 20 < /dev/null > /dev/null"
Mailbox "foo" on "mailhost.net" can now be reached as "{localhost:1234}foo".
Note: For this example to work, you must be able to log in to the remote machine without having to enter a password.
Type: string list
Default: (empty)
This variable specifies a list of comma-separated languages. RFC8255 : user preferred languages to be searched in parts and display. Example:
set preferred_languages="en,fr,de"
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-no
Controls whether or not NeoMutt really prints messages. This is set to "ask-no" by default, because some people accidentally hit "p" often.
Type: command
Default: “lpr
”
This specifies the command pipe that should be used to print messages.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Used in connection with the <print-message>
function. If this
option is set, the message is decoded before it is passed to the
external command specified by $print_command. If this option
is unset, no processing will be applied to the message when
printing it. The latter setting may be useful if you are using
some advanced printer filter which is able to properly format
e-mail messages for printing.
Also see $print_decode_weed, which controls whether headers will be weeded when this is set.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
For <print-message>
, when $print_decode is set, this
further controls whether NeoMutt will weed headers.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Used in connection with the <print-message>
function. If this option
is set, the command specified by $print_command is executed once for
each message which is to be printed. If this option is unset,
the command specified by $print_command is executed only once, and
all the messages are concatenated, with a form feed as the message
separator.
Those who use the enscript
(1) program's mail-printing mode will
most likely want to set this option.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If you use an external $pager, setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to prompt you for a command when the pager exits rather than returning to the index menu. If unset, NeoMutt will return to the index menu when the external pager exits.
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This specifies the command NeoMutt will use to make external address queries. The string may contain a "%s", which will be substituted with the query string the user types. NeoMutt will add quotes around the string substituted for "%s" automatically according to shell quoting rules, so you should avoid adding your own. If no "%s" is found in the string, NeoMutt will append the user's query to the end of the string. See "query" (https://neomutt.org/guide/advancedusage.html#query) for more information.
Type: string
Default: “%3c %t %-25.25n %-25.25a | %e
”
This variable describes the format of the "query" menu. The
following printf(3)
-style sequences are understood:
%a | Destination address | |
%c | Current entry number | |
%e | * | Extra information |
%n | Destination name | |
%t | "*" if current entry is tagged, a space otherwise | |
%Y | Comma-separated tags | |
%>X | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with "X" | |
%|X | Pad to the end of the line with "X" | |
%*X | Soft-fill with character "X" as pad |
For an explanation of "soft-fill", see the $index_format documentation.
* = can be optionally printed if nonzero, see the $status_format documentation.
Type: quadoption
Default: yes
This variable controls whether "quit" and "exit" actually quit from NeoMutt. If this option is set, they do quit, if it is unset, they have no effect, and if it is set to ask-yes or ask-no, you are prompted for confirmation when you try to quit.
In order to quit from NeoMutt if this variable is unset, you must send the signal SIGINT to NeoMutt. This can usually be achieved by pressing CTRL-C in the terminal.
Type: regular expression
Default: “^([ \t]*[|>:}#])+
”
A regular expression used in the internal pager to determine quoted
sections of text in the body of a message. Quoted text may be filtered
out using the <toggle-quoted>
command, or colored according to the
"color quoted" family of directives.
Higher levels of quoting may be colored differently ("color quoted1", "color quoted2", etc.). The quoting level is determined by removing the last character from the matched text and recursively reapplying the regular expression until it fails to produce a match.
Match detection may be overridden by the $smileys regular expression.
Type: number
Default: 10
If set to a value greater than 0, NeoMutt will display which message it is currently on when reading a mailbox or when performing search actions such as search and limit. The message is printed after this many messages have been read or searched (e.g., if set to 25, NeoMutt will print a message when it is at message 25, and then again when it gets to message 50). This variable is meant to indicate progress when reading or searching large mailboxes which may take some time. When set to 0, only a single message will appear before the reading the mailbox.
Also see the $write_inc, $net_inc and $time_inc variables and the "tuning" section of the manual for performance considerations.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This variable specifies what "real" or "personal" name should be used when sending messages.
If not specified, then the user's "real name" will be read from /etc/passwd
.
This option will not be used, if "$from" is set.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
Controls whether or not NeoMutt recalls postponed messages when composing a new message.
Setting this variable to yes is not generally useful, and thus not
recommended. Note that the <recall-message>
function can be used
to manually recall postponed messages.
Also see $postponed variable.
Type: mailbox
Default: “~/sent
”
This specifies the file into which your outgoing messages should be appended. (This is meant as the primary method for saving a copy of your messages, but another way to do this is using the "my_hdr" command to create a "Bcc:" field with your email address in it.)
The value of $record is overridden by the $force_name and $save_name variables, and the "fcc-hook" command. Also see $copy and $write_bcc.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This option controls how quotes from format=flowed messages are displayed in the pager and when replying (with $text_flowed unset). When set, this option adds spaces after each level of quote marks, turning ">>>foo" into "> > > foo".
Note: If $reflow_text is unset, this option has no effect. Also, this option does not affect replies when $text_flowed is set.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will reformat paragraphs in text/plain parts marked format=flowed. If unset, NeoMutt will display paragraphs unaltered from how they appear in the message body. See RFC3676 for details on the format=flowed format.
Also see $reflow_wrap, and $wrap.
Type: number
Default: 78
This variable controls the maximum paragraph width when reformatting text/plain parts when $reflow_text is set. When the value is 0, paragraphs will be wrapped at the terminal's right margin. A positive value sets the paragraph width relative to the left margin. A negative value set the paragraph width relative to the right margin.
Be aware that the reformatted lines of a paragraph are still subject to $wrap. This means if $reflow_wrap is 40 and $wrap is 30, then the paragraph gets reformatted to 40 characters a line (due to $reflow_wrap) and afterwards each 40-character-line is split at 30 characters (due to $wrap), resulting in alternating line lengths of 30 and 10 characters.
Also see $wrap.
Type: regular expression
Default: “^((re|aw|sv)(\[[0-9]+\])*:[ \t]*)*
”
A regular expression used to recognize reply messages when threading and replying. The default value corresponds to the English "Re:", the German "Aw:" and the Swedish "Sv:".
Type: boolean
Default: no
If unset and you are replying to a message sent by you, NeoMutt will assume that you want to reply to the recipients of that message rather than to yourself.
Also see the "alternates" command.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
If set, when replying to a message, NeoMutt will use the address listed in the Reply-to: header as the recipient of the reply. If unset, it will use the address in the From: header field instead. This option is useful for reading a mailing list that sets the Reply-To: header field to the list address and you want to send a private message to the author of a message.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This variable provides a toggle. When active, the From: header will be extracted from the current mail's 'X-Original-To:' header. This setting does not have precedence over "reverse_real_name".
Assuming 'fast_reply' is disabled, this option will prompt the user with a prefilled From: header.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, the cursor in a list will be automatically advanced to the next (possibly undeleted) message/attachment/entry whenever a command that modifies the current message/attachment/entry is executed.
Examples of such commands are tagging a message, deleting an entry, or saving an attachment.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, draft files (specified by -H
on the command
line) are processed similarly to when resuming a postponed
message. Recipients are not prompted for; send-hooks are not
evaluated; no alias expansion takes place; user-defined headers
and signatures are not added to the message.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, draft files previously edited (via -E -H
on
the command line) will have $resume_draft_files automatically
set when they are used as a draft file again.
The first time a draft file is saved, NeoMutt will add a header, X-Mutt-Resume-Draft to the saved file. The next time the draft file is read in, if NeoMutt sees the header, it will set $resume_draft_files.
This option is designed to prevent multiple signatures, user-defined headers, and other processing effects from being made multiple times to the draft file.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This variable controls whether or not NeoMutt will display the "personal" name from your aliases in the index menu if it finds an alias that matches the message's sender. For example, if you have the following alias:
alias juser abd30425@somewhere.net (Joe User)
and then you receive mail which contains the following header:
From: abd30425@somewhere.net
It would be displayed in the index menu as "Joe User" instead of "abd30425@somewhere.net." This is useful when the person's e-mail address is not human friendly.
Type: boolean
Default: no
It may sometimes arrive that you receive mail to a certain machine, move the messages to another machine, and reply to some the messages from there. If this variable is set, the default From: line of the reply messages is built using the address where you received the messages you are replying to if that address matches your "alternates". If the variable is unset, or the address that would be used doesn't match your "alternates", the From: line will use your address on the current machine.
Also see the "alternates" command and $reverse_real_name.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This variable fine-tunes the behavior of the $reverse_name feature.
When it is unset, NeoMutt will remove the real name part of a matching address. This allows the use of the email address without having to also use what the sender put in the real name field.
When it is set, NeoMutt will use the matching address as-is.
In either case, a missing real name will be filled in afterwards using the value of $real_name.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When this variable is set, NeoMutt will decode RFC2047-encoded MIME parameters. You want to set this variable when NeoMutt suggests you to save attachments to files named like:
=?iso-8859-1?Q?file=5F=E4=5F991116=2Ezip?= =?utf-8?Q?z=C4=99ta.png?=
When this variable is set interactively, the change won't be active until you change folders.
Note that this use of RFC2047's encoding is explicitly prohibited by the standard, but nevertheless encountered in the wild and produced by, e.g., Outlook.
Also note that setting this parameter will not have the effect that NeoMutt generates this kind of encoding. Instead, NeoMutt will unconditionally use the encoding specified in RFC2231.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will take the sender's full address when choosing a default folder for saving a mail. If $save_name or $force_name is set too, the selection of the Fcc folder will be changed as well.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When unset, mailboxes which contain no saved messages will be removed when closed (the exception is $spool_file which is never removed). If set, mailboxes are never removed.
Note: This only applies to mbox and MMDF folders, NeoMutt does not delete MH and Maildir directories.
Type: number
Default: 0
This variable controls the size of the history (per category) saved in the $history_file file.
Setting this to a value greater than $history is possible. However, there will never be more than $history entries to select from even if more are recorded in the history file.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This variable controls how copies of outgoing messages are saved. When set, a check is made to see if a mailbox specified by the recipient address exists (this is done by searching for a mailbox in the $folder directory with the username part of the recipient address). If the mailbox exists, the outgoing message will be saved to that mailbox, otherwise the message is saved to the $record mailbox.
Also see the $force_name variable.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, info about unsubscribed newsgroups will be saved into "newsrc" file and into cache.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When this variable is unset, scoring is turned off. This can be useful to selectively disable scoring for certain folders when the $score_threshold_delete variable and related are used.
Type: number
Default: -1
Messages which have been assigned a score equal to or lower than the value of this variable are automatically marked for deletion by NeoMutt. Since NeoMutt scores are always greater than or equal to zero, the default setting of this variable will never mark a message for deletion.
Type: number
Default: 9999
Messages which have been assigned a score greater than or equal to this variable's value are automatically marked "flagged".
Type: number
Default: -1
Messages which have been assigned a score equal to or lower than the value of this variable are automatically marked as read by NeoMutt. Since NeoMutt scores are always greater than or equal to zero, the default setting of this variable will never mark a message read.
Type: number
Default: 0
For the pager, this variable specifies the number of lines shown before search results. By default, search results will be top-aligned.
Type: string list
Default: “us-ascii:iso-8859-1:utf-8
”
A colon-delimited list of character sets for outgoing messages. NeoMutt will use the first character set into which the text can be converted exactly. If your $charset is not "iso-8859-1" and recipients may not understand "UTF-8", it is advisable to include in the list an appropriate widely used standard character set (such as "iso-8859-2", "koi8-r" or "iso-2022-jp") either instead of or after "iso-8859-1".
In case the text can't be converted into one of these exactly, NeoMutt uses $charset as a fallback.
Type: command
Default: “/usr/sbin/sendmail -oem -oi
”
Specifies the program and arguments used to deliver mail sent by NeoMutt.
NeoMutt expects that the specified program interprets additional
arguments as recipient addresses. NeoMutt appends all recipients after
adding a --
delimiter (if not already present). Additional
flags, such as for $use_8bit_mime, $use_envelope_from,
$dsn_notify, or $dsn_return will be added before the delimiter.
See also: $write_bcc.
Type: number
Default: 0
Specifies the number of seconds to wait for the $sendmail process to finish before giving up and putting delivery in the background.
NeoMutt interprets the value of this variable as follows:
>0 | number of seconds to wait for sendmail to finish before continuing |
0 | wait forever for sendmail to finish |
<0 | always put sendmail in the background without waiting |
Note that if you specify a value other than 0, the output of the child process will be put in a temporary file. If there is some error, you will be informed as to where to find the output.
Type: command
Default: “/bin/sh
”
Command to use when spawning a subshell.
If not specified, then the user's login shell from /etc/passwd
is used.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
When set to info
, the multipart/alternative information is shown.
When set to inline
, all of the alternatives are displayed.
When not set, the default behavior is to show only the chosen alternative.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, news server will be asked for new newsgroups on entering the browser. Otherwise, it will be done only once for a news server. Also controls whether or not number of new articles of subscribed newsgroups will be then checked.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, only subscribed newsgroups that contain unread articles will be displayed in browser.
Type: number
Default: 0
By default the sidebar will show the mailbox's path, relative to the
$folder variable. This specifies the number of parent directories to hide
from display in the sidebar. For example: If a maildir is normally
displayed in the sidebar as dir1/dir2/dir3/maildir, setting
sidebar_component_depth=2
will display it as dir3/maildir, having
truncated the 2 highest directories.
See also: $sidebar_short_path
Type: string
Default: “/.
”
This contains the list of characters which you would like to treat as folder separators for displaying paths in the sidebar.
Local mail is often arranged in directories: 'dir1/dir2/mailbox'.
set sidebar_delim_chars='/'
IMAP mailboxes are often named: 'folder1.folder2.mailbox'.
set sidebar_delim_chars='.'
See also: $sidebar_short_path, $sidebar_folder_indent, $sidebar_indent_string.
Type: string
Default: “|
”
The default is a Unicode vertical line.
This specifies the characters to be drawn between the sidebar (when visible) and the other NeoMutt panels. ASCII and Unicode line-drawing characters are supported.
The divider char can be set to an empty string for some extra space. If empty, setting the sidebar_background color may help distinguish the sidebar from other panels.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Set this to indent mailboxes in the sidebar.
See also: $sidebar_short_path, $sidebar_indent_string, $sidebar_delim_chars.
Type: string
Default: “%D%* %n
”
This variable allows you to customize the sidebar display. This string is
similar to $index_format, but has its own set of printf(3)
-like
sequences:
%B | Name of the mailbox | |
%d | * @ | Number of deleted messages in the mailbox |
%D | Descriptive name of the mailbox | |
%F | * | Number of flagged messages in the mailbox |
%L | * @ | Number of messages after limiting |
%n | "N" if mailbox has new mail, " " (space) otherwise | |
%N | * | Number of unread messages in the mailbox (seen or unseen) |
%o | * | Number of old messages in the mailbox (unread, seen) |
%r | * | Number of read messages in the mailbox (read, seen) |
%S | * | Size of mailbox (total number of messages) |
%t | * @ | Number of tagged messages in the mailbox |
%Z | * | Number of new messages in the mailbox (unread, unseen) |
%! | "!" : one flagged message; "!!" : two flagged messages; "n!" : n flagged messages (for n > 2). Otherwise prints nothing. | |
%>X | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with "X" | |
%|X | Pad to the end of the line with "X" | |
%*X | Soft-fill with character "X" as pad |
* = Can be optionally printed if nonzero
@ = Only applicable to the current folder
In order to use %S, %N, %F, and %!, $mail_check_stats must be set. When thus set, a suggested value for this option is "%B%<F? [%F]>%* %<N?%N/>%S".
Type: string
Default: “
”
This specifies the string that is used to indent mailboxes in the sidebar. It defaults to two spaces.
See also: $sidebar_short_path, $sidebar_folder_indent, $sidebar_delim_chars.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, the sidebar will only display mailboxes containing new, or flagged, mail.
See also: sidebar_pin, $sidebar_non_empty_mailbox_only.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, the <sidebar-next-new>
command will not stop at the end of
the list of mailboxes, but wrap around to the beginning. The
<sidebar-prev-new>
command is similarly affected, wrapping around to
the end of the list.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, the sidebar will only display mailboxes that contain one or more mails.
See also: $sidebar_new_mail_only, sidebar_pin.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, the sidebar will appear on the right-hand side of the screen.
Type: boolean
Default: no
By default the sidebar will show the mailbox's path, relative to the
$folder variable. Setting sidebar_shortpath=yes
will shorten the
names relative to the previous name. Here's an example:
shortpath=no | shortpath=yes | shortpath=yes, folderindent=yes, indentstr=".." |
fruit | fruit | fruit
|
fruit.apple | apple | ..apple
|
fruit.banana | banana | ..banana
|
fruit.cherry | cherry | ..cherry
|
See also: $sidebar_delim_chars, $sidebar_folder_indent, $sidebar_indent_string, $sidebar_component_depth.
Type: sort order
Default: order
Specifies how to sort mailbox entries in the sidebar. By default, the entries are unsorted. Valid values:
path (alphabetically)
count (all message count)
flagged (flagged message count)
unread (unread message count)
unsorted
You may optionally use the "reverse-" prefix to specify reverse sorting
order (example: "set sidebar_sort_method=reverse-path
").
The alpha and name values are synonyms for path. The new value is a synonym for unread.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This specifies whether or not to show sidebar. The sidebar shows a list of all your mailboxes.
See also: $sidebar_format, $sidebar_width
Type: number
Default: 30
This controls the width of the sidebar. It is measured in screen columns. For example: sidebar_width=20 could display 20 ASCII characters, or 10 Chinese characters.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, a line containing "-- " (note the trailing space) will be inserted before your $signature. It is strongly recommended that you not unset this variable unless your signature contains just your name. The reason for this is because many software packages use "-- \n" to detect your signature. For example, NeoMutt has the ability to highlight the signature in a different color in the built-in pager.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, the signature will be included before any quoted or forwarded text. It is strongly recommended that you do not set this variable unless you really know what you are doing, and are prepared to take some heat from netiquette guardians.
Type: path
Default: “~/.signature
”
Specifies the filename of your signature, which is appended to all outgoing messages. If the filename ends with a pipe ("|"), it is assumed that filename is a shell command and input should be read from its standard output.
Type: string
Default: “~f %s | ~s %s
”
Specifies how NeoMutt should expand a simple search into a real search pattern. A simple search is one that does not contain any of the "~" pattern operators. See "patterns" for more information on search patterns.
simple_search applies to several functions, e.g. <delete-pattern>
,
<limit>
, searching in the index, and all of the index colors.
For example, if you simply type "joe" at a search or limit prompt, NeoMutt will automatically expand it to the value specified by this variable by replacing "%s" with the supplied string. For the default value, "joe" would be expanded to: "~f joe | ~s joe".
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, message sizes will display bytes for values less than 1 kilobyte. See formatstrings-size.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, message sizes will be displayed with a single decimal value for sizes from 0 to 10 kilobytes and 1 to 10 megabytes. See formatstrings-size.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, message sizes will display megabytes for values greater than or equal to 1 megabyte. See formatstrings-size.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, message sizes units will be displayed to the left of the number. See formatstrings-size.
Type: number
Default: 1
Specifies time, in seconds, to pause while displaying certain informational messages, while moving from folder to folder and after expunging messages from the current folder. The default is to pause one second, so a value of zero for this option suppresses the pause.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Controls the display of lines longer than the screen width in the internal pager. If set, long lines are wrapped at a word boundary. If unset, lines are simply wrapped at the screen edge. Also see the $markers variable.
Type: regular expression
Default: “(>From )|(:[-^]?[][)(><}{|/DP])
”
The pager uses this variable to catch some common false positives of $quote_regex, most notably smileys and not consider a line quoted text if it also matches $smileys. This mostly happens at the beginning of a line.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This flag controls whether you want to be asked to enter a label for a certificate about to be added to the database or not. It is set by default. (S/MIME only)
Type: path
Default: (empty)
This variable contains the name of either a directory, or a file which contains trusted certificates for use with OpenSSL. (S/MIME only)
Type: path
Default: (empty)
Since for S/MIME there is no pubring/secring as with PGP, NeoMutt has to handle storage and retrieval of keys by itself. This is very basic right now, and keys and certificates are stored in two different directories, both named as the hash-value retrieved from OpenSSL. There is an index file which contains mailbox-address keyid pairs, and which can be manually edited. This option points to the location of the certificates. (S/MIME only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This format string specifies a command which is used to decrypt
application/pkcs7-mime
attachments.
The OpenSSL command formats have their own set of printf(3)
-like sequences
similar to PGP's:
%f | Expands to the name of a file containing a message. |
%s | Expands to the name of a file containing the signature part
of a multipart/signed attachment when verifying it.
|
%k | The key-pair specified with $smime_default_key |
%i | Intermediate certificates |
%c | One or more certificate IDs. |
%a | The algorithm used for encryption. |
%d | The message digest algorithm specified with $smime_sign_digest_alg. |
%C | CA location: Depending on whether $smime_ca_location points to a directory or file, this expands to "-CApath $smime_ca_location" or "-CAfile $smime_ca_location". |
For examples on how to configure these formats, see the smime.rc
in
the samples/
subdirectory which has been installed on your system
alongside the documentation.
(S/MIME only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set (default) this tells NeoMutt to use the default key for decryption. Otherwise, if managing multiple certificate-key-pairs, NeoMutt will try to use the mailbox-address to determine the key to use. It will ask you to supply a key, if it can't find one. (S/MIME only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This is the default key-pair to use for S/MIME operations, and must be set to the keyid (the hash-value that OpenSSL generates) to work properly.
It will be used for encryption (see $postpone_encrypt and $smime_self_encrypt).
It will be used for decryption unless $smime_decrypt_use_default_key is unset.
It will also be used for signing unless $smime_sign_as is set.
The (now deprecated) smime_self_encrypt_as is an alias for this variable, and should no longer be used. (S/MIME only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is used to create encrypted S/MIME messages.
This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(S/MIME only)
Encrypt the message to $smime_default_key too. (S/MIME only)
Type: string
Default: “aes256
”
This sets the algorithm that should be used for encryption. Valid choices are "aes128", "aes192", "aes256", "des", "des3", "rc2-40", "rc2-64", "rc2-128". (S/MIME only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is used to extract X509 certificates from a PKCS7 structure.
This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(S/MIME only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is used to extract the mail address(es) used for storing X509 certificates, and for verification purposes (to check whether the certificate was issued for the sender's mailbox).
This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(S/MIME only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is used to extract only the signers X509 certificate from a S/MIME signature, so that the certificate's owner may get compared to the email's "From:" field.
This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(S/MIME only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is used to import a certificate via smime_keys.
This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences. NOTE: %c and %k will default
to $smime_sign_as if set, otherwise $smime_default_key.
(S/MIME only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
The default behavior of NeoMutt is to use PGP on all auto-sign/encryption operations. To override and to use OpenSSL instead this must be set. However, this has no effect while replying, since NeoMutt will automatically select the same application that was used to sign/encrypt the original message. (Note that this variable can be overridden by unsetting $crypt_auto_smime.) (S/MIME only)
Type: path
Default: (empty)
Since for S/MIME there is no pubring/secring as with PGP, NeoMutt has to handle storage and retrieval of keys/certs by itself. This is very basic right now, and stores keys and certificates in two different directories, both named as the hash-value retrieved from OpenSSL. There is an index file which contains mailbox-address keyid pair, and which can be manually edited. This option points to the location of the private keys. (S/MIME only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is used to extract PKCS7 structures of S/MIME signatures, in order to extract the public X509 certificate(s).
This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(S/MIME only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, S/MIME encrypted messages will also be encrypted using the certificate in $smime_default_key. (S/MIME only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
If you have a separate key to use for signing, you should set this to the signing key. Most people will only need to set $smime_default_key. (S/MIME only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is used to created S/MIME signatures of type
multipart/signed
, which can be read by all mail clients.
This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(S/MIME only)
Type: string
Default: “sha256
”
This sets the algorithm that should be used for the signature message digest. Valid choices are "md5", "sha1", "sha224", "sha256", "sha384", "sha512". (S/MIME only)
Type: number
Default: 300
The number of seconds after which a cached passphrase will expire if not used. (S/MIME only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is used to verify S/MIME signatures of type multipart/signed
.
This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(S/MIME only)
Type: command
Default: (empty)
This command is used to verify S/MIME signatures of type
application/pkcs7-mime
.
This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(S/MIME only)
Type: string list
Default: (empty)
This is a colon-separated list of authentication methods NeoMutt may attempt to use to log in to an SMTP server, in the order NeoMutt should try them. Authentication methods are any SASL mechanism, e.g. "plain", "digest-md5", "gssapi" or "cram-md5". This option is case-insensitive. If it is "unset" (the default) NeoMutt will try all available methods, in order from most-secure to least-secure. Support for the "plain" mechanism is bundled; other mechanisms are provided by an external SASL library (look for '+sasl' in the output of neomutt -v).
Example:
set smtp_authenticators="digest-md5:cram-md5"
Type: command
Default: (empty)
The command to run to generate an OAUTH refresh token for authorizing your connection to your SMTP server. This command will be run on every connection attempt that uses the OAUTHBEARER or XOAUTH2 authentication mechanisms. See "oauth" for details.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Specifies the password for your SMTP account. If unset, NeoMutt will prompt you for your password when you first send mail via SMTP. See $smtp_url to configure NeoMutt to send mail via SMTP.
Warning: you should only use this option when you are on a fairly secure machine, because the superuser can read your neomuttrc even if you are the only one who can read the file.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Defines the SMTP smarthost where sent messages should relayed for delivery. This should take the form of an SMTP URL, e.g.:
smtp[s]://[user[:pass]@]host[:port]
where "[...]" denotes an optional part. Setting this variable overrides the value of the $sendmail variable.
Also see $write_bcc.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
The username for the SMTP server.
This variable defaults to your user name on the local machine.
Type: number
Default: 30
Causes NeoMutt to timeout any socket connect/read/write operation (for IMAP, POP or SMTP) after this many seconds. A negative value causes NeoMutt to wait indefinitely.
Type: sort order
Default: date
Specifies how to sort messages in the "index" menu. Valid values are:
date
date-received
from
score
size
spam
subject
threads
to
unsorted
You may optionally use the "reverse-" prefix to specify reverse sorting order, or the "last-" prefix to sort threads based on the corresponding attribute of the last descendant rather than the thread root. If both prefixes are in use, "reverse-" must come before "last-". The "last-" prefix has no effect on a flat view.
Any ties in the primary sort are broken by $sort_aux. When $use_threads is "threads" or "reverse", $sort controls the sorting between threads, and $sort_aux controls the sorting within a thread.
The "date-sent" value is a synonym for "date". The "mailbox-order" value is a synonym for "unsorted".
The values of "threads" and "reverse-threads" are legacy options,
which cause the value of $sort_aux
to also control sorting
between threads, and they may not be used with the "last-" prefix.
The preferred way to enable a threaded view is via
$use_threads
. This variable can also be set via the
<sort-mailbox>
and <sort-reverse>
functions.
Note: When $use_threads is "threads", the last thread sorts to the bottom; when it is "reversed", the last thread sorts to the top. The use of "reverse-" in $sort swaps which end the last thread will sort to.
See the "Use Threads Feature" section for further explanation and examples, https://neomutt.org/feature/use-threads
Type: sort order
Default: alias
Specifies how the entries in the "alias" menu are sorted. The following are legal values:
address (sort alphabetically by email address)
alias (sort alphabetically by alias name)
unsorted (leave in order specified in .neomuttrc)
Note: This also affects the entries of the address query menu, thus potentially overruling the order of entries as generated by $query_command.
Type: sort order
Default: date
This provides a secondary sort for messages in the "index" menu, used when the $sort value is equal for two messages.
When sorting by threads, this variable controls how subthreads are sorted within a single thread (for the order between threads, see $sort). This can be set to any value that $sort can, including with the use of "reverse-" and "last-" prefixes, except for variations using "threads" (in that case, NeoMutt will just use "date"). For instance,
set sort_aux=last-date-received
would mean that if a new message is received in a thread, that
subthread becomes the last one displayed (or the first, if you have
"set use_threads=reverse
".) When using $use_threads, it is
more common to use "last-" with $sort and not with $sort_aux.
See the "Use Threads Feature" section for further explanation and examples, https://neomutt.org/feature/use-threads
Type: sort order
Default: alpha
Specifies how to sort entries in the file browser. By default, the entries are sorted alphabetically. Valid values:
alpha (alphabetically)
count (all message count)
date
desc (description)
new (new message count)
size
unsorted
You may optionally use the "reverse-" prefix to specify reverse sorting
order (example: "set sort_browser=reverse-date
").
The "unread" value is a synonym for "new".
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This variable is only useful when sorting by threads with $strict_threads unset. In that case, it changes the heuristic neomutt uses to thread messages by subject. With $sort_re set, neomutt will only attach a message as the child of another message by subject if the subject of the child message starts with a substring matching the setting of $reply_regex. With $sort_re unset, neomutt will attach the message whether or not this is the case, as long as the non-$reply_regex parts of both messages are identical.
Type: string
Default: “,
”
This variable controls what happens when multiple spam headers are matched: if unset, each successive header will overwrite any previous matches value for the spam label. If set, each successive match will append to the previous, using this variable's value as a separator.
Type: mailbox
Default: (empty)
If your spool mailbox is in a non-default place where NeoMutt can't find it, you can specify its location with this variable. The description from "named-mailboxes" or "virtual-mailboxes" may be used for the spool_file.
If not specified, then the environment variables $MAIL
and
$MAILDIR
will be checked.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Contains a colon-separated list of ciphers to use when using SSL. For OpenSSL, see ciphers(1) for the syntax of the string.
For GnuTLS, this option will be used in place of "NORMAL" at the start of the priority string. See gnutls_priority_init(3) for the syntax and more details. (Note: GnuTLS version 2.1.7 or higher is required.)
Type: path
Default: (empty)
The file containing a client certificate and its associated private key.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If this variable is set, NeoMutt will require that all connections to remote servers be encrypted. Furthermore it will attempt to negotiate TLS even if the server does not advertise the capability, since it would otherwise have to abort the connection anyway. This option supersedes $ssl_starttls.
Type: quadoption
Default: yes
If set (the default), NeoMutt will attempt to use STARTTLS
on servers
advertising the capability. When unset, NeoMutt will not attempt to
use STARTTLS
regardless of the server's capabilities.
Note that STARTTLS
is subject to many kinds of
attacks, including the ability of a machine-in-the-middle to
suppress the advertising of support. Setting $ssl_force_tls is
recommended if you rely on STARTTLS
.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set , NeoMutt will use SSLv2 when communicating with servers that request it. N.B. As of 2011, SSLv2 is considered insecure, and using is inadvisable. See https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6176 (OpenSSL only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set , NeoMutt will use SSLv3 when communicating with servers that request it. N.B. As of 2015, SSLv3 is considered insecure, and using it is inadvisable. See https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7525
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set to yes, NeoMutt will use CA certificates in the system-wide certificate store when checking if a server certificate is signed by a trusted CA. (OpenSSL only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set , NeoMutt will use TLSv1.0 when communicating with servers that request it. N.B. As of 2015, TLSv1.0 is considered insecure, and using it is inadvisable. See https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7525
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set , NeoMutt will use TLSv1.1 when communicating with servers that request it. N.B. As of 2015, TLSv1.1 is considered insecure, and using it is inadvisable. See https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7525
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set , NeoMutt will use TLSv1.2 when communicating with servers that request it.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set , NeoMutt will use TLSv1.3 when communicating with servers that request it.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set (the default), NeoMutt will not automatically accept a server
certificate that is either not yet valid or already expired. You should
only unset this for particular known hosts, using the
<account-hook>
function.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set (the default), NeoMutt will not automatically accept a server
certificate whose host name does not match the host used in your folder
URL. You should only unset this for particular known hosts, using
the <account-hook>
function.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This option should not be changed from the default unless you understand what you are doing.
Setting this variable to yes will permit verifying partial certification chains, i. e. a certificate chain where not the root, but an intermediate certificate CA, or the host certificate, are marked trusted (in $certificate_file), without marking the root signing CA as trusted.
(OpenSSL 1.0.2b and newer only).
Type: character string
Default: “-*%A
”
Controls the characters used by the "%r" indicator in $status_format.
Character | Default | Description |
1 | - | Mailbox is unchanged |
2 | * | Mailbox has been changed and needs to be resynchronized |
3 | % | Mailbox is read-only, or will not be written when exiting.
(You can toggle whether to write changes to a mailbox
with the <toggle-write> operation, bound by default
to "%")
|
4 | A | Folder opened in attach-message mode. (Certain operations like composing a new mail, replying, forwarding, etc. are not permitted in this mode) |
Type: string
Default: “-%r-NeoMutt: %D [Msgs:%<M?%M/>%m%<n? New:%n>%<o? Old:%o>%<d? Del:%d>%<F? Flag:%F>%<t? Tag:%t>%<p? Post:%p>%<b? Inc:%b>%<l? %l>]---(%<T?%T/>%s/%S)-%>-(%P)---
”
Controls the format of the status line displayed in the "index"
menu. This string is similar to $index_format, but has its own
set of printf(3)
-like sequences:
%b | * | Number of mailboxes with new mail |
%d | * | Number of deleted messages |
%D | Description of the mailbox | |
%f | The full pathname of the current mailbox | |
%F | * | Number of flagged messages |
%h | Local hostname | |
%l | * | Size (in bytes) of the current mailbox (see formatstrings-size) |
%L | * | Size (in bytes) of the messages shown (i.e., which match the current limit) (see formatstrings-size) |
%m | * | The number of messages in the mailbox |
%M | * | The number of messages shown (i.e., which match the current limit) |
%n | * | Number of new messages in the mailbox (unread, unseen) |
%o | * | Number of old messages in the mailbox (unread, seen) |
%p | * | Number of postponed messages |
%P | Percentage of the way through the index | |
%r | Modified/read-only/won't-write/attach-message indicator, According to $status_chars | |
%R | * | Number of read messages in the mailbox (read, seen) |
%s | Current sorting mode ($sort) | |
%S | Current aux sorting method ($sort_aux) | |
%t | * | Number of tagged messages in the mailbox |
%T | * | Current threading mode ($use_threads) |
%u | * | Number of unread messages in the mailbox (seen or unseen) |
%v | NeoMutt version string | |
%V | * | Currently active limit pattern, if any |
%>X | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with "X" | |
%|X | Pad to the end of the line with "X" | |
%*X | Soft-fill with character "X" as pad |
For an explanation of "soft-fill", see the $index_format documentation.
* = can be optionally printed if nonzero
Some of the above sequences can be used to optionally print a string if their value is nonzero. For example, you may only want to see the number of flagged messages if such messages exist, since zero is not particularly meaningful. To optionally print a string based upon one of the above sequences, the following construct is used:
%<sequence_char?optional_string>
where sequence_char is a character from the table above, and optional_string is the string you would like printed if sequence_char is nonzero. optional_string may contain other sequences as well as normal text.
Here is an example illustrating how to optionally print the number of new messages in a mailbox:
%<n?%n new messages>
You can also switch between two strings using the following construct:
%<sequence_char?if_string&else_string>
If the value of sequence_char is non-zero, if_string will be expanded, otherwise else_string will be expanded.
As another example, here is how to show either $sort and $sort_aux or $use_threads and $sort, based on whether threads are enabled with $use_threads:
%<T?%s/%S&%T/%s>
You can force the result of any printf(3)
-like sequence to be lowercase
by prefixing the sequence character with an underscore ("_") sign.
For example, if you want to display the local hostname in lowercase,
you would use: "%_h
".
If you prefix the sequence character with a colon (":") character, NeoMutt will replace any dots in the expansion by underscores. This might be helpful with IMAP folders that don't like dots in folder names.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Setting this variable causes the "status bar" to be displayed on the first line of the screen rather than near the bottom. If $help is set too, it'll be placed at the bottom.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, threading will only make use of the "In-Reply-To" and "References:" fields when you $sort by message threads. By default, messages with the same subject are grouped together in "pseudo threads.". This may not always be desirable, such as in a personal mailbox where you might have several unrelated messages with the subjects like "hi" which will get grouped together. See also $sort_re for a less drastic way of controlling this behavior.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When unset, NeoMutt won't stop when the user presses the terminal's
susp key, usually "^Z". This is useful if you run NeoMutt
inside an xterm using a command like "xterm -e neomutt
".
On startup NeoMutt tries to detect if it is the process session leader.
If so, the default of suspend is "no" otherwise "yes". This default covers
the above mentioned use case of "xterm -e neomutt
".
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will generate "format=flowed" bodies with a content type
of "text/plain; format=flowed
".
This format is easier to handle for some mailing software, and generally
just looks like ordinary text. To actually make use of this format's
features, you'll need support in your editor.
The option only controls newly composed messages. Postponed messages, resent messages, and draft messages (via -H on the command line) will use the content-type of the source message.
Note that $indent_string is ignored when this option is set.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Affects the ~b
, ~B
, and ~h
search operations described in
section "patterns". If set, the headers and body/attachments of
messages to be searched are decoded before searching. If unset,
messages are searched as they appear in the folder.
Users searching attachments or for non-ASCII characters should set this value because decoding also includes MIME parsing/decoding and possible character set conversions. Otherwise NeoMutt will attempt to match against the raw message received (for example quoted-printable encoded or with encoded headers) which may lead to incorrect search results.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If $strict_threads is unset, then messages may also be grouped by subject. Unlike threading by "In-Reply-To:" and "References:" header, grouping by subject does not imply a parent-child relation between two messages.
To determine the ancestry between messages grouped by subject, Neomutt uses their date: only newer messages can be descendants of older ones.
When $thread_received is set, NeoMutt uses the date received rather than the date sent when comparing messages for the date.
See also $strict_threads, and $sort_re.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, the internal-pager will pad blank lines to the bottom of the screen with a tilde ("~").
Type: number
Default: 0
Along with $read_inc, $write_inc, and $net_inc, this variable controls the frequency with which progress updates are displayed. It suppresses updates less than $time_inc milliseconds apart. This can improve throughput on systems with slow terminals, or when running NeoMutt on a remote system.
Also see the "tuning" section of the manual for performance considerations.
Type: number
Default: 600
When NeoMutt is waiting for user input either idling in menus or in an interactive prompt, NeoMutt would block until input is present. Depending on the context, this would prevent certain operations from working, like checking for new mail or keeping an IMAP connection alive.
This variable controls how many seconds NeoMutt will at most wait until it aborts waiting for input, performs these operations and continues to wait for input.
A value of zero or less will cause NeoMutt to never time out.
Type: path
Default: “/tmp
”
This variable allows you to specify where NeoMutt will place its temporary files needed for displaying and composing messages.
If this variable is not set, the environment variable $TMPDIR
is
used. Failing that, then "/tmp
" is used.
Type: character string
Default: “ +TCFLR
”
Controls the character used to indicate mail addressed to you.
Character | Default | Description |
1 | <space> | The mail is not addressed to your address. |
2 | + | You are the only recipient of the message. |
3 | T | Your address appears in the "To:" header field, but you are not the only recipient of the message. |
4 | C | Your address is specified in the "Cc:" header field, but you are not the only recipient. |
5 | F | Indicates the mail that was sent by you. |
6 | L | Indicates the mail was sent to a mailing-list you subscribe to. |
7 | R | Your address appears in the "Reply-To:" header field but none of the above applies. |
Type: number
Default: 0
Quoted text may be filtered out using the <toggle-quoted>
command.
If set to a number greater than 0, then the <toggle-quoted>
command will only filter out quote levels above this number.
Type: mailbox
Default: (empty)
If set, this variable specifies the path of the trash folder where the mails marked for deletion will be moved, instead of being irremediably purged.
NOTE: When you delete a message in the trash folder, it is really deleted, so that you have a way to clean the trash.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Controls whether NeoMutt tries to set the terminal status line and icon name. Most terminal emulators emulate the status line in the window title.
Type: string
Default: “M%<n?AIL&ail>
”
Controls the format of the icon title, as long as "$ts_enabled" is set. This string is identical in formatting to the one used by "$status_format".
Type: string
Default: “NeoMutt with %<m?%m messages&no messages>%<n? [%n NEW]>
”
Controls the format of the terminal status line (or window title), provided that "$ts_enabled" has been set. This string is identical in formatting to the one used by "$status_format".
Type: command
Default: (empty)
Setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to open a pipe to a command instead of a raw socket. You may be able to use this to set up preauthenticated connections to your IMAP/POP3/SMTP server. Example:
set tunnel="ssh -q mailhost.net /usr/local/libexec/imapd"
Note: For this example to work you must be able to log in to the remote machine without having to enter a password.
When set, NeoMutt uses the tunnel for all remote connections. Please see "account-hook" in the manual for how to use different tunnel commands per connection.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will assume the $tunnel connection does not need STARTTLS to be enabled. It will also allow IMAP PREAUTH server responses inside a tunnel to proceed. This is appropriate if $tunnel uses ssh or directly invokes the server locally.
When unset, NeoMutt will negotiate STARTTLS according to the ssl_starttls and ssl_force_tls variables. If ssl_force_tls is set, NeoMutt will abort connecting if an IMAP server responds with PREAUTH. This setting is appropriate if $tunnel does not provide security and could be tampered with by attackers.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will jump to the next unread message, if any, when the current thread is uncollapsed.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will automatically uncollapse any collapsed thread that receives a new message. When unset, collapsed threads will remain collapsed. the presence of the new message will still affect index sorting, though.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Warning: do not set this variable unless you are using a version
of sendmail which supports the -B8BITMIME
flag (such as sendmail
8.8.x) or you may not be able to send mail.
When set, NeoMutt will invoke $sendmail with the -B8BITMIME
flag when sending 8-bit messages to enable ESMTP negotiation.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will qualify all local addresses (ones without the "@host" portion) with the value of $hostname. If unset, no addresses will be qualified.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will set the envelope sender of the message. If $envelope_from_address is set, it will be used as the sender address. If unset, NeoMutt will attempt to derive the sender from the "From:" header.
Note that this information is passed to sendmail command using the
-f
command line switch. Therefore setting this option is not useful
if the $sendmail variable already contains -f
or if the
executable pointed to by $sendmail doesn't support the -f
switch.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will generate the "From:" header field when sending messages. If unset, no "From:" header field will be generated unless the user explicitly sets one using the "my_hdr" command.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will look for IPv6 addresses of hosts it tries to contact. If this option is unset, NeoMutt will restrict itself to IPv4 addresses. Normally, the default should work.
Type: enumeration
Default: unset
The style of threading used in the index. May be one of "flat" (no threading), "threads" (threaded, with subthreads below root message) or "reverse" (threaded, with subthreads above root message). For convenience, the value "yes" is a synonym for "threads", and "no" is a synonym for "flat".
If this variable is never set, then $sort
controls whether
threading is used, $sort_aux
controls both the sorting of
threads and subthreads, and using <sort-mailbox>
to select
threads affects only $sort
. Once this variable is set,
attempting to set $sort
to a value using "threads" will
warn, the value of $sort
controls the sorting between
threads while $sort_aux
controls sorting within a thread,
and <sort-mailbox>
toggles $use_threads
.
Example:
set use_threads=yes
See the "Use Threads Feature" section for further explanation and examples.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will add a "User-Agent:" header to outgoing messages, indicating which version of NeoMutt was used for composing them.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Controls whether NeoMutt will ask you to press a key after an external command
has been invoked by these functions: <shell-escape>
,
<pipe-message>
, <pipe-entry>
, <print-message>
,
and <print-entry>
commands.
It is also used when viewing attachments with "auto_view", provided that the corresponding mailcap entry has a needsterminal flag, and the external program is interactive.
When set, NeoMutt will always ask for a key. When unset, NeoMutt will wait for a key only if the external command returned a non-zero status.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will weed headers when displaying, forwarding, or replying to messages.
Also see $copy_decode_weed, $pipe_decode_weed, $print_decode_weed.
Type: number
Default: 0
When set to a positive value, NeoMutt will wrap text at $wrap characters. When set to a negative value, NeoMutt will wrap text so that there are $wrap characters of empty space on the right side of the terminal. Setting it to zero makes NeoMutt wrap at the terminal width.
Also see $reflow_wrap.
Type: number
Default: 78
This option specifies the number of characters to use for wrapping an outgoing message's headers. Allowed values are between 78 and 998 inclusive.
Note: This option usually shouldn't be changed. RFC5233 recommends a line length of 78 (the default), so please only change this setting when you know what you're doing.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Controls whether searches wrap around the end.
When set, searches will wrap around the first (or last) item. When unset, incremental searches will not wrap.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Controls whether NeoMutt writes out the "Bcc:" header when preparing messages to be sent. Some MTAs, such as Exim and Courier, do not strip the "Bcc:" header; so it is advisable to leave this unset unless you have a particular need for the header to be in the sent message.
If NeoMutt is set to deliver directly via SMTP(see $smtp_url), this option does nothing: NeoMutt will never write out the "Bcc:" header in this case.
Note this option only affects the sending of messages. Fcc'ed copies of a message will always contain the "Bcc:" header if one exists.
Type: number
Default: 10
When writing a mailbox, a message will be printed every $write_inc messages to indicate progress. If set to 0, only a single message will be displayed before writing a mailbox.
Also see the $read_inc, $net_inc and $time_inc variables and the "tuning" section of the manual for performance considerations.
The following is the list of available functions listed by the mapping in which they are available. The default key setting is given, and an explanation of what the function does. The key bindings of these functions can be changed with the bind command.
The generic menu is not a real menu, but specifies common functions (such as movement) available in all menus except for pager and editor. Changing settings for this menu will affect the default bindings for all menus (except as noted).
Table 9.2. Default Generic Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<bottom-page> | L | move to the bottom of the page |
<check-stats> | calculate message statistics for all mailboxes | |
<current-bottom> | move entry to bottom of screen | |
<current-middle> | move entry to middle of screen | |
<current-top> | move entry to top of screen | |
<end-cond> | end of conditional execution (noop) | |
<enter-command> | : | enter a neomuttrc command |
<error-history> | show log (and debug) messages | |
<exit> | exit this menu | |
<first-entry> | <Home> | move to the first entry |
<first-entry> | = | move to the first entry |
<half-down> | ] | scroll down 1/2 page |
<half-up> | [ | scroll up 1/2 page |
<help> | ? | this screen |
<jump> | jump to an index number | |
<last-entry> | <End> | move to the last entry |
<last-entry> | * | move to the last entry |
<middle-page> | M | move to the middle of the page |
<next-entry> | <Down> | move to the next entry |
<next-entry> | j | move to the next entry |
<next-line> | > | scroll down one line |
<next-page> | <Pagedown> | move to the next page |
<next-page> | <Right> | move to the next page |
<next-page> | z | move to the next page |
<previous-entry> | <Up> | move to the previous entry |
<previous-entry> | k | move to the previous entry |
<previous-line> | < | scroll up one line |
<previous-page> | <Left> | move to the previous page |
<previous-page> | <Pageup> | move to the previous page |
<previous-page> | Z | move to the previous page |
<redraw-screen> | ^L | clear and redraw the screen |
<refresh> | ^L | clear and redraw the screen |
<search> | / | search for a regular expression |
<search-next> | n | search for next match |
<search-opposite> | search for next match in opposite direction | |
<search-reverse> | Esc / | search backwards for a regular expression |
<select-entry> | <Enter> | select the current entry |
<select-entry> | <Keypadenter> | select the current entry |
<select-entry> | <Return> | select the current entry |
<shell-escape> | ! | invoke a command in a subshell |
<show-log-messages> | show log (and debug) messages | |
<show-version> | V | show the NeoMutt version number and date |
<tag-entry> | t | tag the current entry |
<tag-prefix> | ; | apply next function to tagged messages |
<tag-prefix-cond> | apply next function ONLY to tagged messages | |
<top-page> | H | move to the top of the page |
<what-key> | display the keycode for a key press |
Table 9.3. Default Index Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<alias-dialog> | open the aliases dialog | |
<autocrypt-acct-menu> | A | manage autocrypt accounts |
<bounce-message> | b | remail a message to another user |
<break-thread> | # | break the thread in two |
<buffy-list> | . | list mailboxes with new mail |
<catchup> | mark all articles in newsgroup as read | |
<change-folder> | c | open a different folder |
<change-folder-readonly> | Esc c | open a different folder in read only mode |
<change-newsgroup> | i | open a different newsgroup |
<change-newsgroup-readonly> | Esc i | open a different newsgroup in read only mode |
<check-traditional-pgp> | Esc P | check for classic PGP |
<clear-flag> | W | clear a status flag from a message |
<collapse-all> | Esc V | collapse/uncollapse all threads |
<collapse-thread> | Esc v | collapse/uncollapse current thread |
<compose-to-sender> | compose new message to the current message sender | |
<copy-message> | C | copy a message to a file/mailbox |
<create-alias> | a | create an alias from a message sender |
<decode-copy> | Esc C | make decoded (text/plain) copy |
<decode-save> | Esc s | make decoded copy (text/plain) and delete |
<decrypt-copy> | make decrypted copy | |
<decrypt-save> | make decrypted copy and delete | |
<delete-message> | d | delete the current entry |
<delete-pattern> | D | delete non-hidden messages matching a pattern |
<delete-subthread> | Esc d | delete all messages in subthread |
<delete-thread> | ^D | delete all messages in thread |
<display-address> | @ | display full address of sender |
<display-message> | <Enter> | display a message |
<display-message> | <Keypadenter> | display a message |
<display-message> | <Return> | display a message |
<display-message> | <Space> | display a message |
<display-toggle-weed> | h | display message and toggle header weeding |
<edit> | edit the raw message (edit and edit-raw-message are synonyms) | |
<edit-label> | Y | add, change, or delete a message's label |
<edit-or-view-raw-message> | e | edit the raw message if the mailbox is not read-only, otherwise view it |
<edit-raw-message> | edit the raw message (edit and edit-raw-message are synonyms) | |
<edit-type> | ^E | edit attachment content type |
<exit> | x | exit this menu |
<extract-keys> | ^K | extract supported public keys |
<fetch-mail> | G | retrieve mail from POP server |
<flag-message> | F | toggle a message's 'important' flag |
<followup-message> | followup to newsgroup | |
<forget-passphrase> | ^F | wipe passphrases from memory |
<forward-message> | f | forward a message with comments |
<forward-to-group> | forward to newsgroup | |
<get-children> | get all children of the current message | |
<get-message> | get message with Message-Id | |
<get-parent> | get parent of the current message | |
<group-chat-reply> | reply to all recipients preserving To/Cc | |
<group-reply> | g | reply to all recipients |
<imap-fetch-mail> | force retrieval of mail from IMAP server | |
<imap-logout-all> | logout from all IMAP servers | |
<limit> | l | show only messages matching a pattern |
<limit-current-thread> | limit view to current thread | |
<link-threads> | & | link tagged message to the current one |
<list-reply> | L | reply to specified mailing list |
<list-subscribe> | subscribe to a mailing list | |
<list-unsubscribe> | unsubscribe from a mailing list | |
<mail> | m | compose a new mail message |
<mail-key> | Esc k | mail a PGP public key |
<mailbox-list> | . | list mailboxes with new mail |
<mark-message> | ~ | create a hotkey macro for the current message |
<modify-labels> | modify (notmuch/imap) tags | |
<modify-labels-then-hide> | modify (notmuch/imap) tags and then hide message | |
<modify-tags> | modify (notmuch/imap) tags | |
<modify-tags-then-hide> | modify (notmuch/imap) tags and then hide message | |
<next-entry> | J | move to the next entry |
<next-new> | jump to the next new message | |
<next-new-then-unread> | <Tab> | jump to the next new or unread message |
<next-subthread> | Esc n | jump to the next subthread |
<next-thread> | ^N | jump to the next thread |
<next-undeleted> | <Down> | move to the next undeleted message |
<next-undeleted> | j | move to the next undeleted message |
<next-unread> | jump to the next unread message | |
<next-unread-mailbox> | open next mailbox with new mail | |
<parent-message> | P | jump to parent message in thread |
<pipe-entry> | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command |
<pipe-message> | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command |
<post-message> | post message to newsgroup | |
<previous-entry> | K | move to the previous entry |
<previous-new> | jump to the previous new message | |
<previous-new-then-unread> | Esc <Tab> | jump to the previous new or unread message |
<previous-subthread> | Esc p | jump to previous subthread |
<previous-thread> | ^P | jump to previous thread |
<previous-undeleted> | <Up> | move to the previous undeleted message |
<previous-undeleted> | k | move to the previous undeleted message |
<previous-unread> | jump to the previous unread message | |
<print-message> | p | print the current entry |
<purge-message> | delete the current entry, bypassing the trash folder | |
<purge-thread> | delete the current thread, bypassing the trash folder | |
<quasi-delete> | delete from NeoMutt, don't touch on disk | |
<query> | Q | query external program for addresses |
<quit> | q | save changes to mailbox and quit |
<read-subthread> | Esc r | mark the current subthread as read |
<read-thread> | ^R | mark the current thread as read |
<recall-message> | R | recall a postponed message |
<reconstruct-thread> | reconstruct thread containing current message | |
<reply> | r | reply to a message |
<resend-message> | Esc e | use the current message as a template for a new one |
<root-message> | jump to root message in thread | |
<save-message> | s | save message/attachment to a mailbox/file |
<set-flag> | w | set a status flag on a message |
<show-limit> | Esc l | show currently active limit pattern |
<show-log-messages> | M | show log (and debug) messages |
<sidebar-first> | move the highlight to the first mailbox | |
<sidebar-last> | move the highlight to the last mailbox | |
<sidebar-next> | move the highlight to next mailbox | |
<sidebar-next-new> | move the highlight to next mailbox with new mail | |
<sidebar-open> | open highlighted mailbox | |
<sidebar-page-down> | scroll the sidebar down 1 page | |
<sidebar-page-up> | scroll the sidebar up 1 page | |
<sidebar-prev> | move the highlight to previous mailbox | |
<sidebar-prev-new> | move the highlight to previous mailbox with new mail | |
<sidebar-toggle-virtual> | toggle between mailboxes and virtual mailboxes | |
<sidebar-toggle-visible> | make the sidebar (in)visible | |
<sort-mailbox> | o | sort messages |
<sort-reverse> | O | sort messages in reverse order |
<sync-mailbox> | $ | save changes to mailbox |
<tag-pattern> | T | tag non-hidden messages matching a pattern |
<tag-subthread> | tag the current subthread | |
<tag-thread> | Esc t | tag the current thread |
<toggle-new> | N | toggle a message's 'new' flag |
<toggle-read> | toggle view of read messages | |
<toggle-write> | % | toggle whether the mailbox will be rewritten |
<undelete-message> | u | undelete the current entry |
<undelete-pattern> | U | undelete non-hidden messages matching a pattern |
<undelete-subthread> | Esc u | undelete all messages in subthread |
<undelete-thread> | ^U | undelete all messages in thread |
<untag-pattern> | ^T | untag non-hidden messages matching a pattern |
<view-attachments> | v | show MIME attachments |
<view-raw-message> | show the raw message |
Table 9.4. Default Pager Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<bottom> | <End> | jump to the bottom of the message |
<bounce-message> | b | remail a message to another user |
<break-thread> | # | break the thread in two |
<buffy-list> | . | list mailboxes with new mail |
<change-folder> | c | open a different folder |
<change-folder-readonly> | Esc c | open a different folder in read only mode |
<change-newsgroup> | open a different newsgroup | |
<change-newsgroup-readonly> | open a different newsgroup in read only mode | |
<check-stats> | calculate message statistics for all mailboxes | |
<check-traditional-pgp> | Esc P | check for classic PGP |
<clear-flag> | W | clear a status flag from a message |
<compose-to-sender> | compose new message to the current message sender | |
<copy-message> | C | copy a message to a file/mailbox |
<create-alias> | a | create an alias from a message sender |
<decode-copy> | Esc C | make decoded (text/plain) copy |
<decode-save> | Esc s | make decoded copy (text/plain) and delete |
<decrypt-copy> | make decrypted copy | |
<decrypt-save> | make decrypted copy and delete | |
<delete-message> | d | delete the current entry |
<delete-subthread> | Esc d | delete all messages in subthread |
<delete-thread> | ^D | delete all messages in thread |
<display-address> | @ | display full address of sender |
<display-toggle-weed> | h | display message and toggle header weeding |
<edit> | edit the raw message (edit and edit-raw-message are synonyms) | |
<edit-label> | Y | add, change, or delete a message's label |
<edit-or-view-raw-message> | e | edit the raw message if the mailbox is not read-only, otherwise view it |
<edit-raw-message> | edit the raw message (edit and edit-raw-message are synonyms) | |
<edit-type> | ^E | edit attachment content type |
<enter-command> | : | enter a neomuttrc command |
<error-history> | show log (and debug) messages | |
<exit> | i | exit this menu |
<exit> | q | exit this menu |
<exit> | x | exit this menu |
<extract-keys> | ^K | extract supported public keys |
<flag-message> | F | toggle a message's 'important' flag |
<followup-message> | followup to newsgroup | |
<forget-passphrase> | ^F | wipe passphrases from memory |
<forward-message> | f | forward a message with comments |
<forward-to-group> | forward to newsgroup | |
<group-chat-reply> | reply to all recipients preserving To/Cc | |
<group-reply> | g | reply to all recipients |
<half-down> | scroll down 1/2 page | |
<half-up> | scroll up 1/2 page | |
<help> | ? | this screen |
<imap-fetch-mail> | force retrieval of mail from IMAP server | |
<imap-logout-all> | logout from all IMAP servers | |
<jump> | jump to an index number | |
<link-threads> | & | link tagged message to the current one |
<list-reply> | L | reply to specified mailing list |
<list-subscribe> | subscribe to a mailing list | |
<list-unsubscribe> | unsubscribe from a mailing list | |
<mail> | m | compose a new mail message |
<mail-key> | Esc k | mail a PGP public key |
<mailbox-list> | . | list mailboxes with new mail |
<mark-as-new> | N | toggle a message's 'new' flag |
<modify-labels> | modify (notmuch/imap) tags | |
<modify-labels-then-hide> | modify (notmuch/imap) tags and then hide message | |
<modify-tags> | modify (notmuch/imap) tags | |
<modify-tags-then-hide> | modify (notmuch/imap) tags and then hide message | |
<next-entry> | J | move to the next entry |
<next-line> | <Enter> | scroll down one line |
<next-line> | <Keypadenter> | scroll down one line |
<next-line> | <Return> | scroll down one line |
<next-new> | jump to the next new message | |
<next-new-then-unread> | <Tab> | jump to the next new or unread message |
<next-page> | <Pagedown> | move to the next page |
<next-page> | <Space> | move to the next page |
<next-subthread> | Esc n | jump to the next subthread |
<next-thread> | ^N | jump to the next thread |
<next-undeleted> | <Down> | move to the next undeleted message |
<next-undeleted> | <Right> | move to the next undeleted message |
<next-undeleted> | j | move to the next undeleted message |
<next-unread> | jump to the next unread message | |
<next-unread-mailbox> | open next mailbox with new mail | |
<parent-message> | P | jump to parent message in thread |
<pipe-entry> | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command |
<pipe-message> | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command |
<post-message> | post message to newsgroup | |
<previous-entry> | K | move to the previous entry |
<previous-line> | <Backspace> | scroll up one line |
<previous-new> | jump to the previous new message | |
<previous-new-then-unread> | jump to the previous new or unread message | |
<previous-page> | <Pageup> | move to the previous page |
<previous-page> | - | move to the previous page |
<previous-subthread> | Esc p | jump to previous subthread |
<previous-thread> | ^P | jump to previous thread |
<previous-undeleted> | <Left> | move to the previous undeleted message |
<previous-undeleted> | <Up> | move to the previous undeleted message |
<previous-undeleted> | k | move to the previous undeleted message |
<previous-unread> | jump to the previous unread message | |
<print-entry> | print the current entry | |
<print-message> | p | print the current entry |
<purge-message> | delete the current entry, bypassing the trash folder | |
<purge-thread> | delete the current thread, bypassing the trash folder | |
<quasi-delete> | delete from NeoMutt, don't touch on disk | |
<quit> | Q | save changes to mailbox and quit |
<read-subthread> | Esc r | mark the current subthread as read |
<read-thread> | ^R | mark the current thread as read |
<recall-message> | R | recall a postponed message |
<reconstruct-thread> | reconstruct thread containing current message | |
<redraw-screen> | ^L | clear and redraw the screen |
<reply> | r | reply to a message |
<resend-message> | Esc e | use the current message as a template for a new one |
<root-message> | jump to root message in thread | |
<save-entry> | save message/attachment to a mailbox/file | |
<save-message> | s | save message/attachment to a mailbox/file |
<search> | / | search for a regular expression |
<search-next> | n | search for next match |
<search-opposite> | search for next match in opposite direction | |
<search-reverse> | Esc / | search backwards for a regular expression |
<search-toggle> | \\ | toggle search pattern coloring |
<set-flag> | w | set a status flag on a message |
<shell-escape> | ! | invoke a command in a subshell |
<show-log-messages> | show log (and debug) messages | |
<show-version> | V | show the NeoMutt version number and date |
<sidebar-first> | move the highlight to the first mailbox | |
<sidebar-last> | move the highlight to the last mailbox | |
<sidebar-next> | move the highlight to next mailbox | |
<sidebar-next-new> | move the highlight to next mailbox with new mail | |
<sidebar-open> | open highlighted mailbox | |
<sidebar-page-down> | scroll the sidebar down 1 page | |
<sidebar-page-up> | scroll the sidebar up 1 page | |
<sidebar-prev> | move the highlight to previous mailbox | |
<sidebar-prev-new> | move the highlight to previous mailbox with new mail | |
<sidebar-toggle-virtual> | toggle between mailboxes and virtual mailboxes | |
<sidebar-toggle-visible> | make the sidebar (in)visible | |
<skip-headers> | H | jump to first line after headers |
<skip-quoted> | S | skip beyond quoted text |
<sort-mailbox> | o | sort messages |
<sort-reverse> | O | sort messages in reverse order |
<sync-mailbox> | $ | save changes to mailbox |
<tag-message> | t | tag the current entry |
<toggle-quoted> | T | toggle display of quoted text |
<toggle-write> | % | toggle whether the mailbox will be rewritten |
<top> | <Home> | jump to the top of the message |
<top> | ^ | jump to the top of the message |
<undelete-message> | u | undelete the current entry |
<undelete-subthread> | Esc u | undelete all messages in subthread |
<undelete-thread> | ^U | undelete all messages in thread |
<view-attachments> | v | show MIME attachments |
<view-raw-message> | show the raw message | |
<what-key> | display the keycode for a key press |
Table 9.5. Default Alias Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<delete-entry> | d | delete the current entry |
<exit> | q | exit this menu |
<limit> | l | show only messages matching a pattern |
<mail> | m | compose a new mail message |
<sort-alias> | o | sort messages |
<sort-alias-reverse> | O | sort messages in reverse order |
<tag-entry> | <Space> | tag the current entry |
<undelete-entry> | u | undelete the current entry |
Table 9.6. Default Query Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<create-alias> | a | create an alias from a message sender |
<exit> | q | exit this menu |
<limit> | l | show only messages matching a pattern |
<mail> | m | compose a new mail message |
<query> | Q | query external program for addresses |
<query-append> | A | append new query results to current results |
<sort> | o | sort messages |
<sort-reverse> | O | sort messages in reverse order |
Table 9.7. Default Attachment Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<bounce-message> | b | remail a message to another user |
<check-traditional-pgp> | Esc P | check for classic PGP |
<collapse-parts> | v | toggle display of subparts |
<compose-to-sender> | compose new message to the current message sender | |
<delete-entry> | d | delete the current entry |
<display-toggle-weed> | h | display message and toggle header weeding |
<edit-type> | ^E | edit attachment content type |
<exit> | q | exit this menu |
<extract-keys> | ^K | extract supported public keys |
<followup-message> | followup to newsgroup | |
<forget-passphrase> | ^F | wipe passphrases from memory |
<forward-message> | f | forward a message with comments |
<forward-to-group> | forward to newsgroup | |
<group-chat-reply> | reply to all recipients preserving To/Cc | |
<group-reply> | g | reply to all recipients |
<list-reply> | L | reply to specified mailing list |
<list-subscribe> | subscribe to a mailing list | |
<list-unsubscribe> | unsubscribe from a mailing list | |
<pipe-entry> | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command |
<pipe-message> | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command |
<print-entry> | p | print the current entry |
<reply> | r | reply to a message |
<resend-message> | Esc e | use the current message as a template for a new one |
<save-entry> | s | save message/attachment to a mailbox/file |
<undelete-entry> | u | undelete the current entry |
<view-attach> | <Enter> | view attachment using mailcap entry if necessary |
<view-attach> | <Keypadenter> | view attachment using mailcap entry if necessary |
<view-attach> | <Return> | view attachment using mailcap entry if necessary |
<view-mailcap> | m | force viewing of attachment using mailcap |
<view-pager> | view attachment in pager using copiousoutput mailcap | |
<view-text> | T | view attachment as text |
Table 9.8. Default Compose Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<attach-file> | a | attach files to this message |
<attach-key> | Esc k | attach a PGP public key |
<attach-message> | A | attach messages to this message |
<attach-news-message> | attach news articles to this message | |
<autocrypt-menu> | o | show autocrypt compose menu options |
<copy-file> | C | save message/attachment to a mailbox/file |
<detach-file> | D | delete the current entry |
<display-toggle-weed> | h | display message and toggle header weeding |
<edit-bcc> | b | edit the BCC list |
<edit-cc> | c | edit the CC list |
<edit-content-id> | Esc i | edit the 'Content-ID' of the attachment |
<edit-description> | d | edit attachment description |
<edit-encoding> | ^E | edit attachment transfer-encoding |
<edit-fcc> | f | enter a file to save a copy of this message in |
<edit-file> | Esc e | edit the file to be attached |
<edit-followup-to> | edit the Followup-To field | |
<edit-from> | Esc f | edit the from field |
<edit-headers> | E | edit the message with headers |
<edit-language> | ^L | edit the 'Content-Language' of the attachment |
<edit-message> | e | edit the message |
<edit-mime> | m | edit attachment using mailcap entry |
<edit-newsgroups> | edit the newsgroups list | |
<edit-reply-to> | r | edit the Reply-To field |
<edit-subject> | s | edit the subject of this message |
<edit-to> | t | edit the TO list |
<edit-type> | ^T | edit attachment content type |
<edit-x-comment-to> | edit the X-Comment-To field | |
<exit> | q | exit this menu |
<filter-entry> | F | filter attachment through a shell command |
<forget-passphrase> | ^F | wipe passphrases from memory |
<get-attachment> | G | get a temporary copy of an attachment |
<group-alternatives> | & | group tagged attachments as 'multipart/alternative' |
<group-multilingual> | ^ | group tagged attachments as 'multipart/multilingual' |
<group-related> | % | group tagged attachments as 'multipart/related' |
<ispell> | i | run ispell on the message |
<move-down> | + | move an attachment down in the attachment list |
<move-up> | - | move an attachment up in the attachment list |
<new-mime> | n | compose new attachment using mailcap entry |
<pgp-menu> | p | show PGP options |
<pipe-entry> | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command |
<pipe-message> | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command |
<postpone-message> | P | save this message to send later |
<print-entry> | l | print the current entry |
<rename-attachment> | ^O | send attachment with a different name |
<rename-file> | R | rename/move an attached file |
<send-message> | y | send the message |
<smime-menu> | S | show S/MIME options |
<tag-entry> | T | tag the current entry |
<toggle-disposition> | ^D | toggle disposition between inline/attachment |
<toggle-recode> | toggle recoding of this attachment | |
<toggle-unlink> | u | toggle whether to delete file after sending it |
<ungroup-attachment> | # | ungroup 'multipart' attachment |
<update-encoding> | U | update an attachment's encoding info |
<view-attach> | <Enter> | view attachment using mailcap entry if necessary |
<view-attach> | <Keypadenter> | view attachment using mailcap entry if necessary |
<view-attach> | <Return> | view attachment using mailcap entry if necessary |
<view-mailcap> | force viewing of attachment using mailcap | |
<view-pager> | view attachment in pager using copiousoutput mailcap | |
<view-text> | view attachment as text | |
<write-fcc> | w | write the message to a folder |
Table 9.10. Default Browser Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<buffy-list> | . | list mailboxes with new mail |
<catchup> | mark all articles in newsgroup as read | |
<change-dir> | c | change directories |
<check-new> | check mailboxes for new mail | |
<create-mailbox> | C | create a new mailbox (IMAP only) |
<delete-mailbox> | d | delete the current mailbox (IMAP only) |
<descend-directory> | descend into a directory | |
<display-filename> | @ | display the currently selected file's name |
<enter-mask> | m | enter a file mask |
<exit> | q | exit this menu |
<goto-folder> | = | swap the current folder position with $folder if it exists |
<goto-parent> | p | go to parent directory |
<mailbox-list> | . | list mailboxes with new mail |
<reload-active> | load list of all newsgroups from NNTP server | |
<rename-mailbox> | r | rename the current mailbox (IMAP only) |
<select-new> | N | select a new file in this directory |
<sort> | o | sort messages |
<sort-reverse> | O | sort messages in reverse order |
<subscribe> | s | subscribe to current mbox (IMAP/NNTP only) |
<subscribe-pattern> | subscribe to newsgroups matching a pattern | |
<toggle-mailboxes> | <Tab> | toggle whether to browse mailboxes or all files |
<toggle-subscribed> | T | toggle view all/subscribed mailboxes (IMAP only) |
<uncatchup> | mark all articles in newsgroup as unread | |
<unsubscribe> | u | unsubscribe from current mbox (IMAP/NNTP only) |
<unsubscribe-pattern> | unsubscribe from newsgroups matching a pattern | |
<view-file> | <Space> | view file |
Table 9.13. Default Editor Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<backspace> | <Backspace> | delete the char in front of the cursor |
<backspace> | <Delete> | delete the char in front of the cursor |
<backward-char> | <Left> | move the cursor one character to the left |
<backward-char> | ^B | move the cursor one character to the left |
<backward-word> | Esc b | move the cursor to the beginning of the word |
<bol> | <Home> | jump to the beginning of the line |
<bol> | ^A | jump to the beginning of the line |
<buffy-cycle> | <Space> | cycle among incoming mailboxes |
<capitalize-word> | Esc c | capitalize the word |
<complete> | <Tab> | complete filename or alias |
<complete-query> | ^T | complete address with query |
<delete-char> | <Delete> | delete the char under the cursor |
<delete-char> | ^D | delete the char under the cursor |
<downcase-word> | Esc l | convert the word to lower case |
<eol> | <End> | jump to the end of the line |
<eol> | ^E | jump to the end of the line |
<forward-char> | <Right> | move the cursor one character to the right |
<forward-char> | ^F | move the cursor one character to the right |
<forward-word> | Esc f | move the cursor to the end of the word |
<help> | Esc ? | this screen |
<history-down> | <Down> | scroll down through the history list |
<history-down> | ^N | scroll down through the history list |
<history-search> | ^R | search through the history list |
<history-up> | <Up> | scroll up through the history list |
<history-up> | ^P | scroll up through the history list |
<kill-eol> | ^K | delete chars from cursor to end of line |
<kill-eow> | Esc d | delete chars from the cursor to the end of the word |
<kill-line> | ^U | delete chars from cursor to beginning the line |
<kill-whole-line> | delete all chars on the line | |
<kill-word> | ^W | delete the word in front of the cursor |
<mailbox-cycle> | <Space> | cycle among incoming mailboxes |
<quote-char> | ^V | quote the next typed key |
<redraw-screen> | ^L | clear and redraw the screen |
<transpose-chars> | transpose character under cursor with previous | |
<upcase-word> | Esc u | convert the word to upper case |
Table 9.14. Default Autocrypt Account Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<create-account> | c | create a new autocrypt account |
<delete-account> | D | delete the current account |
<exit> | q | exit this menu |
<toggle-active> | a | toggle the current account active/inactive |
<toggle-prefer-encrypt> | p | toggle the current account prefer-encrypt flag |
Table of Contents
The following people have been very helpful to the development of Mutt:
Kari Hurtta, Vikas Agnihotri, Francois Berjon, Aric Blumer, John Capo, David Champion, Brendan Cully, Liviu Daia, Thomas E. Dickey, David DeSimone, Nickolay N. Dudorov, Ruslan Ermilov, Edmund Grimley Evans, Michael Finken, Sven Guckes, Lars Hecking, Mark Holloman, Andreas Holzmann, Marco d'Itri, Björn Jacke, Byrial Jensen, David Jeske, Christophe Kalt, Tommi Komulainen, Felix von Leitner (a.k.a “Fefe”), Brandon Long, Jimmy Mäkelä, Lars Marowsky-Bree, Kevin J. McCarthy, Thomas “Mike” Michlmayr, Andrew W. Nosenko, David O'Brien, Clint Olsen, Park Myeong Seok, Thomas Parmelan, Ollivier Robert, Thomas Roessler, Roland Rosenfeld, Rocco Rutte, TAKIZAWA Takashi, Allain Thivillon, Gero Treuner, Vsevolod Volkov, Ken Weinert
This document was written in DocBook, and then rendered using the Gnome XSLT toolkit.